/" , / puaue. \ HEAL in 98W! NATIONAL CLEARINGHOUSE FOR MENTAL HEALTH INFORMATION WM 5/73; 4' 1: , '/:'/ CAT. FOP. PUBLIC HE.) -TH ( ' \SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY ON 3 F OCCUPATIONAL' MENTAL HEALTH U. 5. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH. EDUCATION. AND WELFARE iLSPublic Healfh Service} , [X I" [‘03 A DOCUL'L’IENTS DEPARTI‘JIENT *3 OCT 27 1965 LlBKXARY Uflivmsm OF CALIFORNIA U.S.S.D. Copies of the numerous publications cited in this bibliography are not avail- able for distribution from The National Clearinghouse for Mental Health Information. If the Publications are unavailable locally, they may usually be obtained via inter-library loan from the National Library of Medicine or the Library of Congress. Applications may be made through most medical, university, or public libraries. NATIONAL CLEARINGHOUSE FOR MENTAL HEALTH INFORMATION A SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY ON OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH Prepared under contract for the National Clearinghouse for Mental Health Information by the Center for Occupational Mental Health, White Plains, New York. 7U.S. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH, EDUCATION, AND WELFARE PUBLIC HEALTH SERVICE NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF MENTAL HEALTH Bethesda, Md. 20014- PUBLIC HEALTH SERVICE PUBLICATION NO. 1338 Contents INTRODUCTION OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES . OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC EN- TRIES INDEX TO SPECIFIC ENTRIES . INDEX TO NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES JOURNALS SEARCHED . . . . . 66 157 161 165 Introduction Occupational mental health as a specific area of concern to workers in the field of mental health, as well as to management and labor in business and industry, has not previously been defined in bibliographic terms. In recognition of this fact, the National Clearinghouse for Mental Health Information of the National Institute of Mental Health in Bethesda requested the Center for Occupational Mental Health of White Plains, N.Y., to collaborate in the prep- aration of a preliminary bibliography in this very complex and important field. Center directors and consultants participating were Ralph Collins, David Gold- stein, Harry Levinson, John MacIver, and Graham C. Taylor. Project con- sultants, all active in the various professional disciplines involved, were Chris Argyris, Matthew Brody, Sidney Cobb, J. R. P. French, Frederick Herzberg, Leonard Himler, Robert L. Kahn, Floyd Mann, Kenneth Munden, and W. Donald Ross. It was found from the outset that the literature in this area is not sharply circumscribed but is diffusely distributed throughout the fields of occupational medicine, social, clinical, and industrial psychology, cultural anthropology, social psychiatry, and psychiatry proper, to say nothing of literature citations which appear in sources addressed to management, labor, business, and engineering. It is hoped that this bibliography will provide some guidelines for more sharply defining the field. This volume was primarily designed for the psychiatrist or clinical psychologist with an interest in industrial mental health problems. Specifically, this material was prepared for the clinician with general training who may have been asked to serve as a consultant to an industry or other work organization, but who lacks familiarity with such operations. The occupational physician should also find this bibliography of real value in answering his questions about the contributions of the mental health disciplines to the progress of his work. Those in other medical specialties and in the behavioral sciences will find the parameters of occupational mental health defined. Hopefully, those active in related disciplines will find publications listed of which they were not previously aware. Mental health educators will encounter reference to useful teaching aids and texts for working with industrial groups. Criteria for Inclusion of Bibliographic Entrier: In attempting to delineate one field of occupational mental health, one must presume a primary concern with the mental health of people at work. Effects of mental illness in an occupa- tional setting and factors deriving from work which influence the mental health VI INTRODUCTION status of people on the job would form the primary focus of concern of any such unified system of knowledge. Accordingly, the compilers agreed that items to be included in the bibliog- raphy should meet one or more of the following criteria: 1. Be concerned with the mentally ill worker; 2. Be concerned with factors in the work environment which may have etiologic relationship to mental illness; 3. Be concerned with factors in the work environment which stimulate mentally healthy behavior; and 4-. Be concerned with morale, job satisfaction, and specific occupational roles which may also be related to mental health in industry, even if the text of the publica- tion does not make such an explicit association. It became quickly evident that it would not be possible to include all relevant publications; consequently, the aim of this bibliography is to be comprehensive rather than complete. The editors have relied heavily on the judgment of the compilers and reviewers, who, collectively, represent the fields of psychiatry, occupational medicine, psychology, and sociology. Publications were included if: 1. The author was a recognized authority on some phases of occupational mental health and his subject field was within the scope of the general criteria; 2. The publication was specifically concerned with mental health in industry; and 3. When the publication was regarded, in the judgment of the reviewers, as being of historic significance, and therefore eligible for consideration as a “classic.” The language content of this list is limited to books, journals, pamphlets, and monographs in English. Although the majority of publications are from writers from the United States, references from workers in the United Kingdom and Canada, as well as other foreign workers whose publications have appeared in English, are included. The bibliography has been arranged in two major sections. The entries in the first section were selected with a view to providing a specific definition of the field of occupational mental health. It will be noted that they have generally a clinical orientation, i.e., the references are concerned primarily with symptoms of mental illness and mental health in the work environment. The second section of the bibliography concerns itself with entries which, while peripheral to a work situation and mental illness referable to it, neverthe- less provide a broad matrix in which the more specific references may be fixed. Thus references have been drawn from medical specialties other than pyschiatry but which have a bearing on mental health and psychological disturbances in the field of work. Similarly, contributions have been drawn from the general area. of the behavioral sciences, including sociological, cultural, political, and psychological publications which were determined to be relevant to the general field of occupational mental health. ANN OTATI ONS : This bibliography has been only partially annotated. Where the title of an article clearly describes the contents, no note was deemed INTRODUCTION Vll necessary. However, notes were added in those cases where an article was felt to be either typical of the viewpoint of a significant author’s work, or where the editors felt it would be helpful' to point up or emphasize various aspects of the field. The subject index, which has been appended, provides a key to the contents of the literature encompassed by this entire list. ALAN MCLEAN RICHARD DUNNINGTON VIRGINIA MCLEAN Center for Occupational Mental Health Occupational Mental Health: Specific Entries 1. ABEL, T. H. “A Study of a Group of Subnorrnal Girls Successfully Ad- justed in Industry and the Commu- nity.” Amer ] Ment Defic, 45:66— 72, 1940. 2. ACHILLES, P. S. “Regarding ‘Mental Illness in Industry’ by Rob- ert N. McMurray, H. B. R., March— April 1959.” Harv Bsnx R, 37 (5) :31—32,1959. Industry has much to gain by con- tributing to research in mental illness, because the huge costs of mental illness (about $3 billion annually) appear di- rectly in profit and loss sheets and in- directly in industry’s tax burden. In- dustry employs a cross section of the population, both healthy and disturbed. 3. ADAMS, J. R. “Trauma and the Psychiatrist.” Indus-tr Med Surg, 24(6) 1257, June 1955. The psychological reactions to physi- cal trauma are discussed for the indus- trial physician. 4. ADLER, A. “Mental Following Head Injury.” Neural Psychiat, 53:34, 1945. 5. ADLER, A. “The Psychology of Repeated Accidents in Industry.” Amer ] Psychiat, 98:99—10], 1941. 6 AHERN, E. “Preventive Psychia- try in Industry.” Mgmt Newt, 22:1, Jan. 1949. Symptoms A rch The Carnegie fellowship for 2 year’s training in industrial psychiatry at Cornell University is discussed for a management publication. 7. AIR HYGIENE FOUNDATION OF AMERICA. “Sick Absenteeism in In- dustry.” The Foundation, Pitts- burgh, Med Ser Bull 4, 1940. 8. ALBRECHT, P. A. “A Study of the Personality Changes Resulting from a Training Program in Human Relations and Administrative Skills for Industrial Executives.” Unpub- lished Doctoral Dissertation, Univer- sity of Chicago, 1953. 9. ALCOHOLISM RESEARCH PROJECT. “Second Annual Report, Nov. 1957— Oct. 1958.” Psychol Serv Center, Univ of Tenn, Knoxville, 1959. 10. AMERICAN ACADEMY OF OCCUPA- TIONAL MEDICINE. “Role of Psy- chiatry in Industrial Medical Training.” Proceedings of Annual Meeting, 1953. 11. AMERICAN GAs “Absenteeism Due to Illness.” Association, New York, 1953. 12. AMERICAN JOURNAL OF PSYCHO- THERAPY (EDITORIAL). “The Or- ganization Man in Psychiatry.” Amer ] Psychother, 16(4) :563—566, October 1962. ASSOCIATION. The OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES Physicians along with big business, big labor and big government, are becoming “organization men.” The problems in- volved in the physician’s filling this role are discussed. Medicine and psychiatry have become overorganized. 13. AMERICAN PSYCHIATRIC ASSOCIA- TION. Newsletter, Committee an Occupational Psychiatry. Pub- lished quarterly since 1959. The Association, Washington, DC. Includes current commentary on pro- grams and publications in the specific field of occupational mental health. Published under the editorship of A. A. McLean during its first 3 years. The current editor is J. MacIver. Copies may be obtained free of charge from the APA. 14. AMERICAN PSYCHIATRIC ASSOCIA- TION. “Troubled People on the job.” Committee on Occupational Psychiatry. The Association, Wash- ington, D.C., 1959. This is a 30-page pamphlet for super- visory and personnel people summarizing psychiatric concepts in lay terms for practical application in industry. 15. AMERICAN PSYCHOLOGICAL Asso- CIATION. “The Psychologist in In- dustry.” Division of Business Industry. The Association, Wash- ington, D.C., 1959. This 24-page pamphlet discusses indus- try’s problems in using psychologists, as well as concepts of selection, testing, management development, counseling, employee motivation, human engineer- ing, marketing, motivation research, and public relations research. 16. ANDERSON, V. V. “The Contri- bution of Mental Hygiene in In- dustry.” Proc First Int Congr Ment Hyg, 1:696—718, 1932. 17. ANDERSON, V. V. “The Prob- lem Employee, His Study and Treat- 20. ANDERSON, W. ment.” Personnel], 7:203, Octo- ber 1928. 18. ANDERSON, V. V. Psychiatry in Industry. Harper, New York, 1929. This is the first published volume de- voted tO industrial psychiatry. It reports a program established at the R. H. Macy Company in New York during the 1920‘s. Particularly important for its historical significance, this program utilized the staffing pattern and concepts of the child guidance clinic in a personnel depart- ment setting. 19. ANDERSON, V. V. “Psychiatry in Industry.” Amer ] Psychiat, 100: 134—138, April 1944. AND KUNCE, J. “Stresses of Discharge for the Mental Patient.” ]. Rehabilit, 28 (3) :21—22, 1962. In making the transition from hospital to community the mental patient appears to stay too long in an overprotective en- vironment causing him to have dimin- ished skills in meeting the demands of normal community life. Through the use of counseling, increasing responsi- bility in the institutional environment, and by half-way houses and trainee-em- ployee work programs the patient is bet- ter prepared for these stresses. Suppor- tive and/or counseling services are also needed for those in primary relationships with the patient before he returns to the community so that less stress may be created that will react against the main- tenance of mental health of the patient. 21. ARBOUS, A. G. AND KERRICK, J. E. “The Phenomenon of Acci- dent Proneness.” Industr Med Surg, 22:45—141, April 1953. 22. ARGYLE, M., GARDINER, G., AND CIOFFI, F. “Supervisory Methods Related to Productivity, Absenteeism and Labor Turnover.” Hum Relat, 11:23—40, February 1958. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 3 A study of 90 foreman in 8 British factories is reported which suggests so- cial or organizational variables have not profoundly aflected productivity. Su- pervision, however, has clear influence: democratic, employee-centered super- vision raises productivity, while close, punitive production-centered supervision lowers productivity. Foreman training, group size, and sex differences do not seem significant. There is considerable methodological discussion. (36 refer- ences.) 23. ARGYRIS, C. “Individual-Orga- nization Actualization.” Admin Sci Q, September 1959. 24. ARGYRIS, C. “The Individual and Organization Structure.” Amer Mgmt Ass, New York, Personnel Series No. 16823—11, 1956. 25. ARGYRIS, C. “Organizational Effectiveness Under Stress.” Harv 35115 R, 38(3), May—June 1960. 26. ARGYRIS, Organization. 1957. 27. ARGYRIS, C. The Present State of Research in Human Relations in Industry. Yale University, Labor and Management Center, New Haven, 1954-. 28. ARGYRIS, C. Understanding Or- ganizational Behavior. The Dor- sey Press, Homewood, Ill., 1960. C. Personality and Harper, New York, This book reports a study of variables in human personality and in organiza- tions. The processes by which they in- fluence one another are explored using semistructured interviews. Among data considered are demands made by the or- ganization on the employee, predisposi- tions expressed by employees, informal activities employees create to adapt to the formal organization, and administra- tive reactions to informal activities. 29. ARNSTEIN, R. L. “The psycho- logical Aspects of Emotional Prob- lems of Executives, Psychological Aspects of the Causation of Emo- tional Problems.” Industr Med Surg, 32(5) :178—180, hiay 1963. External or internal stresses may pre- vent an individual from adjusting or cop- ing and lead to psychological dysfunc- tion. Executive problems of this sort are divided into three types: 1. Job prob- lems as related to success or failure. 2. Non-job problems. 3. Personal prob- lems relating to expectations and fears which in turn may interact with the job. A hypothetical case is presented. 30. ASHMAN, G. R., POWLES, W. E., Ross, W. D. AND AGRANOFF, B. “Case-Finding and Interviewing Methods for a Preventive Occupa- tional Psychiatric Programme.” Proc Third World Congress of Psychiatry, 1961, 1:284—292, Mon- treal, Canada, 1962. 31. ASSOCIATION or INDUSTRIAL MED- ICAL OFFICERS. “The Health of the Executive.” Trans Ass Induxtr Med Ofiicers, 9: 83, October 1959. This article examines critically the hy- pothesis that today’s executives are suffer- ing unduly from three categories of dis- ease (cardiovascular, psychosomatic and psychoneurotic) and finds little clinical evidence to support that they are. The question is raised as to the amount of stress associated with the second level of management and if this is the most logi- cal population to react with symptoms. Here also, there is no definitive evidence. The suggestion is made that a critical evaluation of 20th century living, includ- ing job evaluation, may be productive. 32. AYERS, A. W., BURR, H. B. AND TUTTLE, W. B. “Personality Con~ comitants of Peptic Ulcers Among Managerial Supervisory and Pre- 4 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES supervisory Personnel.” ] Occup Med, 5(5) :252—258, May 1963. The authors present a synopsis of pre- vious studies dealing with the aspects of personality, temperment, and motiva- tion that have been presented as dis‘ tinguishing peptic ulcer victims from others. They also suggest an eight- point counseling approach to the ulcer patient and suggest further directions for research. 33. BACON, S. D. Alcoholism and In- dustry. Yale Center of Alcohol Studies, New Haven, 1951. 34. BAETGER, A. M. Women in In- dustry: Their Health and Efli- ciency. Saunders, Philadelphia and London, 1946. 35. BAILLIE, J. H. “Mental Health in Industry.” Canad ] Public Health, 53:359—61, September 1960. 36. BAIRD, V. C. “Employee Efli- ciency and Emotional Problems of Workers in Industry.” Southern Med], 52:744—746, June 1959. 37. BALDWIN, M. “The Problem of Temporal Lobe Epilepsy in Occu- pational Medicine.” Arch Environ Health, 11253—256, September 1960. 38. BANNISTER, H. “Another Ap- proach to the Problem of Accident Causation” Brit ] Psychol, 28: 304— 314, 1938. 39. BARKER, R. G., WRIGHT, B. A. and GONICK, M. R. Adjustment to Phy- sical Handicap and Illness: A Sur- vey of the Social Psychology of Phy- sique and Disability. Social Science Research Council, New York, Bull. 55, 1946. 40. BARo, W. Z. Back Injuries. “Industrial Head The Neurological and Psychiatric Viewpoint.” In- dustr Med Surg, 19:69—71, 1960. 41. BARRITT, J. L. ers in Industrial Practice. Industr Med Surg, 28: 393—7, Sept. 1959. 42. BARRY, C. E. “Clinical Counsel- ing—Its Value in Industry.” Per- sonnel ], 42(1) : 21—24, January 1963. Both an employee and a firm will profit from an unbiased and discrete clinician who, by recognizing the unseen forces which influence an individual, can create an atmosphere conducive to discussion and problem resolution. He can direct an employee toward self-improvement and aid the employer in his decisions. 43. BARTEMEIER, L. H. “Mental Health in Industry: Employer-Em- ployee Relationships.” World Fed Ment Health Bull, 2(6): 36—43, 1950. 44. BARTLEY, S. H. AND CHUTE, E. Fatigue and Impairment in Man. hicGraw-Hill; New York, 1947. “Litigation Breed- 7, 45. BASI—IFORD, H. “Some Aspects of Sick Absence in Industry.” ] R Sanit Instit, 60:360, 1940. 46. BEARD, J. H., SCHMIDT, J. R. AND SMITH, M. M. “The Use of Tran- sitional Employment in the Rehabili- tation of the Psychiatric Patient.” ] Nerv Ment Dis, 136:507—514, May 1963. 47. BEAUMONT, C. “Epilepsy and the Employer’s Liability.” Trans Ass Industr Med Oflicers, 9:53—56, July 1959. The author is an English attorney who discusses epilepsy and employer’s liability as this applies to British law. The ques- tion of employer’s liability is divided into three distinct but related parts: (1) His OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 5 liability to the servant himself; (2) his liability to fellow servants who might be injured by a servant’s negligence; (3) his liability to third parties who might be injured by a servant’s negligence. Words and terms are defined and court cases in- volving injuries or damages resulting from attacks of epilepsy are cited. 48. BEHAN, R. C. AND HIRSCIIFELD, A. H. “The Accident Process. II. Toward More Rational Treatment of Industrial Injuries.” ] Amer Med Ass, 186(4) :300—306, Oct. 26, 1963. 49. BEHREND, B. “Employment of Persons Under Active Psychiatric Care.” American Academy of Oc- cupational Medicine, Proceedings of Annual Meeting, 1955. 50. BEILIN, H. “Effect of Social (Oc- cupational) Role and Age Upon the Criteria of Mental Health.” ] Soc Psychol, 48:247—256, 1958. 51. BELENSON, L. “Mental Health in Industry.” ]. Occup Med, 3:335—340, July 1961. This commentary points out contribu- tions of the past 40 years to the under- standing of mental health (or illness) in industry. It discusses personality, mental mechanisms, and their influences. Commenting that often it takes a psychi- atrist 2 years to overcome the resistances toward him in industry, the author none- theless concludes that “mental health programs in industry are good business.” 52. BELL, D. I. “The Problem of Functional Disease as Seen in Indus- try.” Canad Med Ass ], 48:108— 110, 1943. 53. BELL, R. G. “Problems Resulting from the use of Habituating Drugs in Industry.” Amerqublic Health, 48:585—589, May 1958. Clinical experience convinces the au- thor that any nervous system depressant or stimulant classifies as a habituating drug. In terms of degree: (1) Alcohol, (2) sedatives and tranquilizers, (3) nar- cotics (a minor problem). Most addicts to (2) and (3) were previously addicted to (1). Industry, because of its annual loss to alcohol, should not blame the bev- erage firms but instead spend money on research to help prevent problems through educational programs and clini- cal procedures. 54. BELL, R. G. “Industry as a Medi- um for the Promotion of Mental Health.” Canad A/Ied A55 ], 60: 220—224, 1949. 55. BENDER, J F. “Emotional Adjust- ment of Workers.” Personnel ], 22: 301—307, 1944. 56. BENNING, D. “Outbreak of Mer- cury Poisoning in Ohio.” Industr Med Surg, 271354—363, July 1958. This is a dramatic report of 52 mercury poisoning cases in a small rural Ohio factory making carbon generator brushes. The employees were all women. Socio- logical data, psychiatric, and physical symptoms are discussed. 57. BENT CREEK SEMINAR ON EMO- TIONAL HEALTH IN INDUSTRY, May 1961. Industr Med Surg, 31:49—- 94, February 1962. “Work, the ‘Last Dis 58. BERGLER, E. Bastion’ Engulfed in Neurosis.” Nerv Syst, 8: 317—319, 1947. 59. BERLIN, I. N. “The Theme in Mental Health Consultation Ses- sions.” Amer ] Orthopsychiat, 30:827—828, 1960. The consultation session usually has a central theme which reveals the conflicts of the consultee which prevent adequate functioning on the job and which when understood and responded to by the con- sultant helps the consultee in his work. 6 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 60. BIELIAUSKAS, V. J. AND WOLFE, H. E. “The Attitude of Industrial Employers Toward Hiring Of For- mer State Mental Hospital Pa- tients.” ] Clin Psychol, 16:256— 259, 1960. Interviews of personnel officers of 251 manufacturing firms revealed that the majority showed a highly positive atti‘ tude toward the hiring of State mental hospital patients. “Traumatic Neu- I ndustr Med, 61. BIERHOFF, J. roses of Industry." 15:109—112, 1946. 62. BILLS, A. G. “Fatigue in Mental Work.” Physiol R, 17:436, 1937. 63. BINGHAM, W. H. “The Acci- dent Prone Employee.” Metro- politan Life Insurance Co., New York, 1931. 64. B] ERNER, B., HOLM, A. AND SWEN- SON, A. “Diurnal Variation in Mental Performance. A Study of Three-Shift Workers.” Brit ] In- dust Med, 12: 103,1955. 65. BLACK, B. J “Rehabilitation of Post Psychotic Patients by Industrial Workshop.” Di: New Syst, 22 (Suppl 6): 125—128, April 1961. The author describes the sheltered workshop program as instituted by Altro Workshop. He sees the workshop as an “intermediary station between hospital atmosphere and the real world” which offers an opportunity to develop such ego- strengths as will make it possible for the patient to become a stable member of society. They report a 70-percent voca- tional success in patients followed up. 66. BLACK, B. J., MEYER, H. J. AN'D BORGATTA, E. F. “Case Study of a Protected Workshop.” ] Soc Issues, 16(2) 2 4046,1960. This description of the Altro program outlines the population served, the staff, and the services offered. When a sample of ex-psychiatric patients served by Altro was compared with a sample not served, the difference in rehospitalization rate was in the direction expected but not statistically significant. 67. BLAIN, D. “Fostering the Mental Health of Ministers.” Pastoral Prychol, 11(103) :5—14, 1960. This article outlines basic threats “to the minister’s mental health as well as the basic principles upon which he can build a mentally healthy life for him- self; his family, and his parish. 68. BLOCK, M. A. “Danger of Alco- holism in the Transportation Indus- try.” ]. Amer Med Ass, 170:2203— 5, August 1959. 69. BLOOD, W., HARWOOD, J. AND VERNON, H. M. “Discussion on Effects of War-Time Industrial Con- ditions on Mental Health.” Proc Royal Society Med, 35:693—698, 1942. 70. BAKAY, L. “Money Improves Whiplash Patients.” ] Amer Med Ass, 185(3) :39, July 1963. This brief item reports that 80 to 90 percent of persons studied by Dr. Bakay, who were suffering from whiplash in- juries, showed marked improvement fol- lowing financial settlement of their claims. A neurosurgeon, he makes the point the “whiplash” is a medico-legal term rather than medical. Emotional factors are involved, with psychosomatic complaints, desire for monetary compen- sation, anxieties, and unduly long treat- ments playing a part in the ultimate re- covery of the patient. 71. BRACELAND, F. J. “Emotional Problems Among Executives.” Mad Ann DC, 24(5) :219—224, 275—276, May 1955. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 7 72. BRACELAND, F. J. “Emotional Problems of Executives.” Mich Bsns R, 8(2) :1013, 1956. 73. BRACELAND, F. J. “Man and his Work: Health Maintenance in In- dustry, with Special Reference to the Executive-Psychiatric Considera- tions.” Address to the Congress on Industrial Health, Washington, D.C., Jan. 25, 1955. 74. BRACELAND, F. F. “Mental Hy- giene and Morale. Hosp Corps Q, Washington, D.C., 18:51—53, 1945. 75. BRADLEY, W. D. “Industrial Psy- chiatry: Past, Present, Future.” A thesis in Industrial Relations pre- sented to the faculty of the Grad- uate Division of the Wharton School, University of Pennsylvania in par- tial fulfillment of the requirements for a degree in master of business administration, Philadelphia, Pa., 1957, (unpublished). A comprehensive history of industrial psychiatry together with a review of cur- rent programs based on interviews with several psychiatrists currently serving in the field. 76. BREED, W. “Occupational Mo- bility and Suicide Among White Males.” Amer Sociol R, 28 (2) :179—188, April 1963. Relates individual suicides to work, class, and class mobility (mostly down. ward). A man plays many roles (the work role being central) yet all interact and work failure alone is not the only major factor in suicides. This is based upon study of cases in New Orleans. 77. BREKKE, B. “Factory Doctors and Mental Hygiene.” Bull World ch Ment Health, 4(1): 41, Feb. 1952. An article which describes the re- habilitation program at Roffey Park in England, considers psychiatric aspects. 78. BREND, W. A. Traumatic Mental Disorders, Courts of Law. Heine- mann, London, 1938. 79. BRENNAN, J. J. AND EKDAHL, A. G. “Are Psychotics Accident Prone?” Amer ] Psychiat, 120(2): 175, Au- gust 1963. This brief study of VA hospital pa- tients at Bedford, Mass, involved in a total of 588,000 hours of paid employ- ment over an 8-year period, demonstrated no lost time accidents. The conclusion of this study is that “psychoties are not accident prone.” 80. BRENNER, C., FRIEDMAN, A. P., MERRITT, H. H., AND DENNY- BROWN, D. E. “Post-traumatic Headache.” ] Neurosurg, 1:379, 1944. 81. BREWSTER, H. H. “Emotional Factors in Accident Proneness.” Pastoral Psychol, 2:20—23, 1952. 82. BRIDGES, C. D. “Epilepsy and Job Placement” in job Placement of the Physically Handicapped. lVIcGraw- Hill, New York, 1946. 83. BRILL, N. Q. AND BEEBE, G. W. A Follow-up Study of War Neuroses. Veterans’ Administration Medical Monograph, January 1955. 84. BRODMAN, K. “Absenteeism, Working Efficiency and Emotional Maladjustments in Groups of Em— ployees.” Industr Med, 14(1) :1—5, January 1945. A study of a mail-order book company employing mostly women, showed that departments varied in the number of em- ployees reporting to the medical depart- ments about the following problems: absenteeism, lateness, and labor turn- 8 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES over. The emotionally maladjusted worker showed higher frequency of these traits. 85. BRODMAN, K. “How Psychiatry Can Help Your Plant.” Mod In- dustr, 15:54, October 1947. 86. BRODMAN, K. Men at Work—The Supervisor and his People. Cloud Inc., Chicago, 1947. 87. BRODMAN, K. “The Organization of a Mental Hygiene Unit in Indus- try.” Industr Med, 15 : 259—262, April 1946. A basic paper on organization and aims of a mental health unit is presented. 88. BRODMAN, K. “Rates of Absentee- ism and Turnover in Personnel in Relation to Employees’ Work Atti- tudes.” Industr Med, 142953—957, 1945. 89. BRODMAN, K. AND HELLMAN, L. “Absenteeism and Separation in Re- lation to Length of Employment.” Industr Med, 162219—222, May 1947. This is an analysis of psychological factors involved in length of employment in relationship to absenteeism and emo- tional stability. 90. BRODMAN, K. AND HELLMAN, L. P. “The Relation of Group Morale to Incidence and Duration of Medical Incapacity in Industry.” Psychosom Med, 92381—385, November—De- cember 1947. 91. BRODY, M. Mental Hygiene in Industry.” Hyg, 29:371—385, July 1945. 92. BRODY, M. “Dynamics of Mental Hygiene in Industry.” I ndustr Med, 14: 760, September 1945. “The Dynamics of Ment 93. BRODY, M. “Neuropsychiatry and Placement of Industrial Workers.” Conn Med ], 9:84—88, February 1945. 94. BROOKS, A. L. “Mental Hygiene and the Industrial Physician.” Ment Hyg, 28:37—40, 1944. 95. BROOKS, G. W. “Motivation for Work in Psychiatric Rehabilitation.” Dis New Syst, 22 (Suppl. 4) 2129-— 132, April 1961. The author states that motivation for work is not remuneration, fear, or satis- faction, but responsibility. He outlines four ways to induce responsibility from workers—“careful placement, high stand- ards, adequate feedback of information to the worker, and opportunities for par- ticipation in management.” 96. BROPIIY, A. L. AND HOROWITZ, P. 0. “Improving Poor Work Ad- justment Through Psychodiagnostic Evaluation.” Ment Hyg, 45:46—52, January 1961. Emotional problems at work decrease employee satisfaction and productivity. This paper deals with the problem of handling manifest emotionally disturbed workers instead of dealing with preven- tive, or early treatment measures. The conclusion was that many (62 percent) employees on the verge of being termi- nated because of inability to handle their job, were able to be helped by a psychi- atric team assessment and recommenda- tion approach. 97. BROWN, J. A. C. The Social Psy- chology of Industry, Human Rela- tions in the Factory. Penguin Books, Baltimore, Md., 1954. 98. BROWN, M. “The Application of Mental Hygiene to Problems of the Industrial Nurse.” Industr Med, 11 :97—100, February 1942. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 9 99. BROWN, M. “The Mental Health of Workers.” Industr Med, 12: 148—150, 1943. 100. BUREAU OF NATIONAL AFFAIRS. The Bu- reau, Washington, D.C., Survey N0. 63, 1961. This report reviews the employee coun- seling program in 136 companies and dis- cusses various techniques, aspects, and evaluations of them. It concerns very few professional programs, focusing rather on those staffed by personnel people. “Employee Counseling.” 101. BURLING, T. “New Approaches in Management Organization and Job Design.” Industr Med Surg, 31(11):482—487, November 1962. 102. BURLING, T. “Personality and the Economic Situation.” Amer ] Orthopxychiat, 9(6) : 616—622, July 1939. 103. BURLING, T. “Psychiatry in In- dustry.” Industr Labor Relat R, 8(1) :30—37, 1954. 104. BURLING, T. “The Role of the Professionally Trained Mental Hy- gienist in Business.” Amer] Ortho- prychz'at, 11:48, January 1942. 105. BURLING, T. AND LONGAKER, W. “Training for Industrial Psychiatry.” Amer ] Psychiat, 111(7) :493, Jan- uary 1955. A description of formal training in industrial psychiatry at the New York State School of Industrial and Labor Re- lations at Cornell University which in- cludes both didactic work and supervised internship in industry. 106. BURLINGAME, C. C. “The Hu- man Side of Human Relations in Industry.” Digest Neural Psychiat, 15:85—89, 1947. 776—430765—- —2 107. BURLINGAME, C. C. “Mental Health in Industry.” Digext Neurol Psychiat, 17:462—476, 1948. 108. BURLINGAME, C. C. “Psychiatry in Industry. Review of Psychiatric Progress.” Amer ] Prychiat, 103 :549—553, January 1946; 104:493—496, January 1947; 105: 538—540, January 1948; 1061520— 522, January 1949. 109. BURLINGAME, C. C. “Psycho- somatic Elements: When the Fore- man is a Pain in the Neck.” Oceup filed, 2:593—598, 1946. 110. BURLINGAME, C. C. “You Can Drive a Horse to Water.” Ment Hyg, 291208, April 1945. 1 11. BURRIS, C. F. “The Place of the Foreman in Maintaining a Healthful Plant.” Industrial Hygiene Confer- ence, Mellon Institute, Pittsburgh, Pa., 1945. 112. BUSINESS WEEK. “Industry is the Psychiatrist’s New Patient.” Business Week, No. 1381:56—59, February 18, 1956. This is a report of industrial psychiatry focusing on academic programs at the Menninger Foundation and at Yale University. 113. BUYNISKI, E. F. “Psychiatry in Industry as Seen by an Industrial Physician.” ] Occup Med, 3: 198— 202, April 1961. To be of value in industry, a psychi- atrist should acquaint himself with indi- vidual plant policy and routine. Discus- sion with the plant physician on his own level is important. Dispensary personnel must be trained in “emotional first aid” and emotional pressures upon workers be considered. Dr. Buyniski discusses a suc- cessful psychiatric program in industry 10 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES and areas in which the trained psychi- atrist is most needed. 114. BUZZARD, E. F. “Traumatic Neu- resthenia.” AIent Hyg, 8(2) : 425—- 437, April 1924. 115. BYRD, O. E. Factors in Mental Health.” journal, 49: 77—78, 1960. Such factors as job security, affection, freedom, and independence, sense of ac- complishment and recognition, self- esteem, and acceptance are discussed as they relate to the mental health of teach- ers. 116. CAMERON, D. C. “Human Re- lations in Occupational Health.” Bull World Fed Ment Health, 5: 218—222,1953. 117. CAMERON, D. C. “Human Rela- tions in Occupational Health.” Public Health Rept, 67: 686, July 1952. 118. CAMERON, D. E. “Job Misfits” in Human Behavior and Its Relation to Industry. Cameron, D. E. and Ross, H. G., editors. McGill Uni- versity, Montreal, Canada, 1944. 119. CAMERON, D. E. Life is for the “Teacher Health: NEA Living. Macmillan, New York, 1948. 120. CAMERON, D. E. “Psychiatry in Industry.” Canad .Mea’ Ass ], 53: 538. December 1945. 121. CAMERON, D. E. “Psychologi- cally Hazardous Occupations.” I n- dustr Med, 15:332—335, lVIay 1946. 122. CAMERON, D. E. AND Ross, H. G. Human Behavior and its Relation to Industry. McGill University, Mont— real, Canada, 1944. This book contains a series of essays by psychiatrists and psychologists which dis- cuss absenteeism, job misfits, the relation of health to behavior and the application of contemporary medical and psychologi— cal concepts to industrial problems. 123. CAMERON, D. E. AND Ross, H. G. Studies in Supervision. McGill Uni- versity, Montreal, Canada, 1945. This small volume of essays considers supervision as one aspect of human re- lations in industry. It includes articles by D. E. Cameron, E. Mayo, L. Giber- son, L. Himler, and others. 124. CANTONI, L. J. “Emotional Ma- turity Needed for Success in Busi- ness.” Personnel ], 34:173—176, 1955. 125. CANTONI, L. J. “Twenty One Signs that Suggest Serious Emotional Disturbances.” Personnel], 33(8) : 300—301, January 1955. 126. CANTow, L. A., ET AL. “A Psy- chiatric Approach to the Problem of Human Relations in Industry.” Personnel, 27:431—438, 1951. 127. CAPEL, E. H. “Problems of Neuroses in Industry.” Practitioner, 149:435—363, 1952. 128. CAPLAN, G. An Approach to Community Mental Health. Grune & Stratton, New York, 1959. Based on a series of lectures to profes- sionals, this book is concerned with pre- ventive psychiatry and the role of the professional in mental health. Various readjustment problems are considered. The nurse, social worker, and the doctor in their preventive roles are discussed and a. community psychiatric program is structured. 129. CAPLAN, G. “Concepts of Men- tal Health and Consultation.” U.S. Government Printing Office, Wash- ington, D.C., 1959. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 11 “Research in Scot Med ], 130. CARSTAIRS, G. M. Social Psychiatry.” September 1961. Rehabilitated chronic schizophrenics now employed by the Ford Motor Co. were studied and the conclusion drawn that incentive makes no significant con- tribution to the rate of production for this grOup. However, workshop en- vironment and a wage-earning job were beneficial. 131. CHAMBERS, E. G. “Industrial Fatigue.” Occup Psychol, 35(1— 2) :44—57, 1961. A summary is provided of hard-to—get reports by the Industrial Fatigue (later Health) Research Board between 1919 and 1938. (88 refs.). 132. CHAMBERS, E. G. “A Prelimi- nary Inquiry into the Part Played by Character and Temperament in Ac- cident Causation.” ] Ment Sci, 85: 115—118, 1939. 133. CHANCE, M. A. “Conceptual and Methodical Problems in Cross Cultural Health Research.” Amer ] Public Health, 52(3):410—417, 1962. 134. CHIESMAN, M. E. “Absenteeism in Industry: Clinical Aspects of Ab- senteeism.” Royal Society Promot Health ], 772681—686, October 1957. 135. CHILDs, A. J. AND SWEETMAN, M. T. “A Study of 104 Cases of Migraine.” British ] Industr Med, 18:234—236, July 1961. This is a study of the incidence of migraine in an industrial population of 4,700. “It is generally believed that migraine affects mainly the intellectual and executive members of the commu- nity.” This survey showed that the inci- dence was higher in this group, but by no means restricted to the managerial group. The management representatives had to quit work more often because of migraine attacks than did the manual worker. 136. CHODORKOFE, B.., KRYSTAL, H., NUNN, J. AND WITTENBERG, R. “Employment Characteristics of Hospitalized Alcoholics.” Quart ] Stud Alcohol, 22:106—110, March 1961. In one year 10 percent of all patients were admitted to Detroit Receiving Hos- pital for alcoholic diseases. Due to prev- alence of alcoholics in industry, the sug- gestion is made that industrial organiza- tions support alcohol rehabilitation programs as a solution to the problem, rather than dismissing individuals. 137. CHRISTENSEN, C. W. “The Oc- currence of Mental Illness in the Ministry: Family Origins.” ] Pas- toral Care, 14-: 13—20, 1960. A study of clinical material indicates that the choice of religious work as a pro- fession is primarily influenced by the family environment as it affected the development of the personality. Sug- gestions are made for future research on mental illness among the clergy. 138. CLARK, R. E. “Psychoses, In- come and Occupational Prestige.” Amer ] Sociol, 54:433—440, March 1949. 139. CLARKE, E. K. AND LAW, S. G. “Personality Components in Em- ployment Problems.” Occup Med, 21116.125, August 1946. 140. CLARKE, E. K. Psychiatric Problems at Oak Ridge.” Amer ] Psychiat, 102:437—444, January 1946. 141. COBB, SIDNEY. “Patterns of Illness in Executives, Foreman and Craftsmen.” Forum on “The Man in Management” sponsored by the 12 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES Connecticut Mutual Life Insurance Company, Hartford, Conn., Oct. 25, 1962. The sociological and psychological factors that contribute to illness must be considered in elIective prevention and treatment. These factors influence the new epidemic diseases (heart, cancer, etc.). This study also suggests that the work situation, along with personal fac- tors, predispose to ulcers; that potential leadership may be measured in terms of such measures as serum uric acid level; that there is a correlation between sick leave absences, dispensary visits, and frequency of feelings of irritability. 142. COBB, SIDNEY, FRENCH, J. R. P. Jr., KAHN, R. L. AND MANN, F. C. “An Environmental Approach to Mental Health.” Bull NY Acad Sci, 107: 596—606, May 1963. 143. COBB, STANLEY. “Applications of Psychiatry to Industrial Hygiene.” ] Industr Hyg, 1: 343—347, Novem- ber 1919. 144. COHEN, R. R. “Application of Military Mental Hygiene to Indus- try.” Occup Med, 1: 333—344, 1946. 145. COHEN, R. R. AND EBAUGH, F. G. “Place of Psychiatry in the Indus- trial Team.” Oecup Med, 5: 522- 529, May 1948. 146. COLLIER, H. E. “The Mental Manifestations of Some Industrial Illnesses.” Oecup Psyc/zol, 13: 89— 97, 1939. 147. COLLIER, H. E. “Neurotic and Psychiatric States as Causes Of In- ability to Work in England, 1940—1.” Brit Med J, 11: 461, 1943. 148. COLLINS, C. P. Naval Dock Yard.” 1257, December 1959. “Accidents in a Bull Hyg, p. This article reports the accident rate in an employee population of 10,000 men of mixed ethnic background over a 2-year period. The fact that there was a focus on accidents over this period led to a sharp decrease; variance in the number of accidents was also broken down and showed positive correlation between (a) ethnic groups, (b) age (highest 26-35, lowest over 56), and (c) day of the week (highest on Monday with secondary peak on Friday). 149. COLLINS, R. T. A [Manual of Neurology and Psychiatry in Oe- cupatimzal Medicine. Grune & Stratton, New York, 1961. 150. COLLINS, R. T. “Psychiatry and Industry.” Ment Hyg News, 4(8) : 4, 1954. 151. COLLINS, R. T. “Practical Ap- plication of Psychiatric Techniques in Industry.” Arch Industr Health, 172620—623, June 1958. This discussion was part of a panel at the American Academy of Occupational Medicine dealing with the gradual entry of the psychiatrist into many fields since World War II and the relation of this to employee-centered industrial medicine. The paper consists of a listing of points relating to: Physician-patient relation- ship, its relation to history taking, the positive aspects of patient-doctor rela- tionship and interviewing technique. 152. COLLINS, R. T. AND KLEMES, M. A. “Review of Psychiatric Prog- rcss, Industrial Psychiatry.” Amer I Psychiat, 112(7):546—549, Jan. 1956. 153. COLLINS, R. T. “Review of Psychiatric Progress, Industrial Psy- chiatry.” Amer ] Psychiat, 113(7) :633—636, Jan. 1957; 114 (7):627—630, Jan. 1958; 115(7): 630—632, Jan. 1959. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 13 154. COLLINs, R. T. “Review of Psychiatric Progress, Occupational Psychiatry.” Amer ] Psychiat, 116(7):608—611, Jan. 1960; 117 (7):605—610, Jan. 1961; 118(7): 604—609, Jan. 1962. Entries No. 152, 153, and 154- above are reviews of the past year’s contribu- tions to industrial psychiatry, including its philosophy, domestic and foreign ac- tivities, appointments and publications. They contain extensive bibliographies and were prepared with the assistance of the Committee on Industrial Psychia- try of the American Psychiatric Associa- tion. 155. COLLINS, S. D., PHILLIPS, F. R., AND OLIVER, D. S. “Accident Fre- quency, Place of Occurence, and Relation to Chronic Disease.” U.S. Public Health Service Pub. No. 249 (Public Health Monograph NO. 14) . U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 1953. 156. CONNECTICUT MUTUAL INSUR- ANCE Co. Fifth Annual Human Relations Forum—Oct. 24-, 1963. “Talent and Tension.” Goldstein, D. H., Babcock, H. H., Mahler, F., Weybrew, B. B. and Howell, H. W. Published by the company, Hart- ford, Conn., 1964-. This is the latest in a series of five forums, sponsored annually since 1959 by this insurance carrier. A transcript of a round table discussion, the authors deal with concepts of creativity from the view- point of psychiatry, psychology, indus- trial medicine, and music. All five meet- ings have been published and are avail- able from the company together with a series of mental health pamphlets. 157. CONTE, W. R. AND STUBBLE- FIELD, R. L. “The Industrial Phy- sician and the Depressed Patient.” Industr Med Surg, 29 2 470—473, Oc- tober 1960. This discusses the depressive episode and how it aercts a worker in an inplant adjustment. It describes symptomatology of two types: Psychological and biologi- cal and the dynamics in early develop- ment. Medical management of depres- sion is also outlined. 158. CONTE, W. R. “Motivation for A c c i d e n t Prevention.” Industr Med Surg, 30 : 93—95, March 1961. This is a discussion by a psychiatrist of factors that aid in accident preven- tion: Fear motivation, education, re- wards, responsibility, and supervision. 159. COPPLESTONE, J. F. “The Em- ployment of Epileptics in New Zea- land Factories.” New Zeal Med ], 58 : 658—67, October 1959. 160. CORNWALL, C. J. AND RAFFLE, P. A. B. “Sickness Absence of “’0- men Bus Conductors.” Brit ] Industr Med, 18:197—212, July 1961. This research study analyzes sick-leave absences for years 1953—57 of married and single women bus conductors. It suggests there is a propensity for married women to be absent more often. 161. CORONA, E. A. “The Psycho- pathic Personality in Industry.” Personnel, 29:467—469, 1953. 162. COZAN, L. W. “A Broader Con- cept of Work Fatigue.” ] Person- nel Admin Induxtr Relat, 321—6, 1957. “We tend to think of fatigue in terms of physiological and psychological as- pects,” states this author. Emotional factors should also be considered and much research is needed in this area. 163. CRONIN, J. W., SOLBY, B., AND VVILDER, W. S. “An Industrial Men- tal Hygiene Program for Federal 14 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES Employees.” Public Health Rept, 60: 1323—1336, 1945. 164. CRUIKSIIANK, W. H. “Mental Hygiene in Industry.” Canad ] Public Health, 46(12) 1475, Decem- ber 1955. Company administrative and industrial medical practices as they bear on mental health in the plant are outlined. 165. CULPIN, M. “Psychological Dis- orders in Industry.” Symposium on Industrial Medicine. Practitioner, 137 2 324—333, September 1936. 166. CULPIN, M. AND SMITH, M. The Nervous Temperment. Government Publications—M e d i e a 1 Research Council, Industrial Health Research Board, Report No. 61, 1930 H. M. Stationery Office, London, England. 167. DAKIN, M. “Psychogenic Fac- tors in the Care of Women Work- ers.” Industr Med, 13:459—464, 1944. 168. D’ALONzo, C. A. “Rehabilita- tion of Workers Addicted to Alco- hol.” Industr Med Surg, 30:14— 15, 1961. At DuPont, alcoholism is openly rec- ognized and treated as a disease. Dis- missals are a last resort since aid from A.A. and remaining on the job under supervision have produced a good rate of remission. 169. D’ALONzo, C. A. AND FLEMING, A. S. “Occupational Psychiatry Through the Medical Periscope.” Industr Med Su‘rg, 25(10) 1466, October 1956. This descriptive article outlines the Eastman, DuPont, American Cyanamid, and General Electric programs in this field. 170. DALTON, K. “Menstruation and Accident Proneness.” Brit Med ], 2: 1425, November 1960. It is suggested that the increased lethargy during menstruation along with premenstrual tension is responsible for both a lowered judgment and a slow reaction time that is notable on the job. 171. DASTUR, H. P. “Resource Paper for Research Symposium on Indus- trial Mental Health and Human Re- lations.” Tata Industries, Ltd., Bombay, India, 1954. 172. DAVIES, T. A. L. “Society and \Vork,” chapter 2 in Mental Health and Human Relations in Industry, Edited by Ling, T. M. H. K. Lewis, London, England, 1954. 173. DAVIS, F. “Deviance Disavowal: The Management of Strained Inter- action by the Visibly Handicapped.” Soc Prob, 9(2) :120—132, 1961. Data obtained from interviewing 16 physically handicapped persons provided an analysis of the coping behavior and the sociability of the handicapped and concludes that his interactional prob- lems are not too dissimilar from those of others except in degree. 174. DAWSON, W. S. “The Psycho- neurotic in Industry.” Med ] Aust, 11225—228, February 1950. 175. “DEEP THERAPY ON THE ASSEM- BLY LINE.” Ammunition, the Mag- azine of the United Auto Workers, CIO, pages 47—51, April 1949. A news commentary strongly critical of management utilization of psychiatric consultants. The implication is that their use would be solely for purposes of manipulating union members toward management identification. 176. DERSHIMER, F. W. “Psychiatry in Industry: Review of Psychiatric Progress.” Amer ] Psyc/ziat, 108 (7) :536—538, January 1952; 109 (7) :524—526, January 1953; 110 (7) :527—528, January 1954; 111 (7) :534—535, January 1955. Brief reviews of some of the publica- tions and activities in industrial psychia- try during these years. Considerable per- sonal opinion is expressed by the author. 177. DERSHIMER, F. W. “Construc- tive Forces on the Job.” Ment Hyg, 32:372—381, July 1948. 178. DERSHIMER, F. W. “Effective D i s c i p l i n e Promotes Mental Health.” American Academy of Occupational Medicine. Proceed- ings of Sixth Annual Meeting, pages 36—40, February 1954. A psychiatrist with the DuPont Co. since 1943 discusses mental health and role of the psychiatrist in industry. 179. DERSHIMER, F. W. “A Psychia- trist Looks at Human Relations in Industry.” Personnel, 26: 156—162, 1949. 180. DEVEER, M. R. VAN ALPHEN. Success and Failure in Induxtry. A Psychomedical Study. Van Gor- cum & Comp, Assen., The Nether- lands, 1955. 181. DICKSON, W. J. “The Haw- thorne Plan of Personnel Counsel- ing.” Amer ] Orthopsychiat, 15 (2) 1343, April 1945. This article by one of the originators of the activity describes the Western Electric counseling program which grew out of the Hawthorne researches. Lay counselors sought to bring about personal adjustments through interviews which form the basis of the technique. N0 advice is given, nor is the counseling activity considered psychotherapeutic. 183. DONNELLY, J. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 182. DOLL, R. JONES, E, AND BUCK- ATSCI—I, M. M. “Occupational F ac- tors in the Aeitiology of Gastric and Duodenal Ulcers, with an Estimate of their Incidence in the General Population.” Medical Research Council Reports No. 276. H. M. Stationery Office, London, England, 1951. “Environment and Mental Health.” Arch Environ Health, 6(6) :697—719, June 1963. This article concerns the individuals’ interaction with his environment. It views personal identification in terms of environment and considers function as affected by isolation or close contact. It further discusses security and coping mechanisms, the psychological environ- ment within an organization (formal and informal), the wish for acceptance by authority, and the effects of chronic stress upon mental health. 184. DOWLING, C. B. “Health of the Nation’s Management.” M anage- ment, 15(8) :52—57, June—July 1963. This article is based on the annual “checkup” of 5,000 executives, a ques- tionnaire on job stress sent to 6,000 execu- tives and the personal experience and knowledge of the author. It examines the physical, mental, and social health of the executive. Physically 66 percent were essentially normal. Emotional reactions led the list of problems reported but the stresses causing these are identified with individual personality, not age, occupa- tion or job demands; social health over- all is high and is related to childhood experiences. 185. DUNN, J. P. AND COBB, S. “Fre- quency of Peptic Ulcer Among Exec- utives, Craftsman and Foreman.” J Occup Med, 41343—348, July 1962. 16 186. DUNBAR, F. Psychosomatic Di- agnosis, chapter IV on fractures. Paul B. Hoeber, New York, 1943. This is a brief review of accident sta- tistics reported in the literature followed by a detailed report on the personality characteristics of fracture patients drawn from a study by the author. 187. DUVAL, A. M. “Psychiatry and the Everyday Work of the Fore- man.” Advanc Algml, 22:15—17, December 1957. A number of typical cases of emotional maladjustment are reported which show that a psychiatrist can aid managers in establishing a climate to assist the dis- turbed worker to better understanding of himself. 188. DZIENCIOL, N. “Alcoholism in Industry.” Industr Relat R, 2:5— 12, Fall, 1962. Descriptions of the alcoholic employee are presented which suggest he is differ- ent from the common stereotype of such a person. Ways to diagnose and help him are outlined, based on the plan of the Yale Center for Alcoholic Studies. 189. EADIE, G. A. “One Hundred Problem People: A Study of Acci- dent Frequency, Medical Com- plaints, Absenteeism, and Discipli- nary Penalties in a Manufacturing Industry.” Industr Med Surg, 20: 215—217, 1951. 190. EADIE, G. A. “The Overall Men- tal Health Needs of the Industrial Plant with Special Reference to War Veterans.” Ment Health, 29: 101— 106, January 1945. An article which deals primarily with the rehabilitation of discharged service- men with psychiatric illness during war time and suggests application to peace time industry. 194. EARLY, D. P. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 191. EADIE, G. A. “Practical Meth- ods for Handling Psychosomatic Problems in Industry.” Industr Med, 18:369—371, September 1949. 192. EADIE, G. A. “Psychoneurosis— Its Impact on Industry.” Industr Med, 15:325—330, 1946. 193. EADIE, G. A. “Who Can Work? Neuropsychiatric Aspects.” Industr Med, 13:533—535, July 1944. Various selection and placement methods for workers with neuropsychiat- ric conditions are reviewed. “The Industrial Therapy Organization (Bristol). The First Two Years.” Lancet, 1:435—436, Feb. 23, 1963. This discusses the first 2 years of the Industrial Therapy Organization pro- gram in the inpatient industrial depart- ment of Glenside Hospital—a plan for long stay, long unemployed psychiatric patients with residual disability. Of the 239 patients in the program, results showed that 23 percent became wage earners during the study period. 195. EBAUGH, F. G. AND RYNER, C. A. “Review of Psychiatric Progress, Education and Industrial Psychi- atry.” Amerszychiat, 98(4) :600— 603, January 1942. 196. ECKER, J. L. “Constructive Op- portunities for Mental Hygiene in Industry.” Med Bull, 182402—408, November 1958. If the medical department is to make a greater contribution to the level of mental hygiene, a better rapport must be established with supervisors, manage- ment, and the individual employee him- self. Personality difficulties on the job should engage the physician’s earliest attention. Proper placement is the like- liest means of promoting health. / OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 17 197. EILBERT, H. “Emergence of Medical Personnel as Industrial Counselors.” Arch Industr Health, 162155—162, 1957. This is an historical review of welfare measures applied in industry since 1900. The role the doctor and nurse have played is highlighted; only recently have they emerged in a counseling capacity, concerned with emotional reactions (48 references). 198. ELIASBERG, W. “A Study in the Psychodynamics of the Industrial Executive.” ] Clin Psychopat/z, 10:276—294, 1949. 199. ELKIND, B. “Industrial Psychia- try.” Ment Hyg, 132378—92, 1929. 200. ELKIND, H. B. Preventative Management—Mental Hygiene in I ndurtry. B. C. Forbes, New York, 1941. 201. EMPLOYEE RELATIONS BUDLETIN. “What a Mental Health Program Can Do.” The Bulletin, Report No. 863: 1—5, July 1963. This describes the mental health activ- ity of the Equitable Life Assurance So- ciety and its integration into the total employee health program. The article offers guide lines for setting up similar programs. 202. ENGLAND, A. 0. “Preventive Industrial Mental Hygiene.” Per- sonnel ], 29:417—420, 1951. 203. ERDMANN, A. J., BRODMAN, K., DEUTSCHBERGER, J., AND WOLFF, H. G. “Health Questionnaire Use in an Industrial Medical Depart- ment.” Industr Med, 22:355, Au- gust 1953. 204. EVANS, C. K. “The Consulting Psychologist in Industry.” Amer ] Orthopsychiat, 16(4) 2623, October 1946. The duties of the psychologist in in- dustry and various facets of his job are described. 205. EWALT, J. R. “Psychiatry in In- dustry.” Industr Med Surg, 29: 474—479, October 1960. The potential contribution psychiatry can make to industry is discussed and a comprehensive program is outlined. The article further discusses the work situa- tion as it relates to mental health. 206. EWALT, J. R. “Psychiatry in In- dustry.” Texas ] Med, 55(11) : 872—877, November 1959. 207. EWALT, J. R. AND FARNSWORTH, D. L. “Psychiatry in Industry," chapter 29 in Textbook of Psychi- atry. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1963. 208. FALKEY, D. B. “Individual Problem Drinking On and Off the Job.” ] Occup Med, 4(12) :726— 731, December 1962. The handling of alcoholic problems in several companies is discussed as are the activities of Alcoholic Anonymous, Na- tional Council on Alcoholism and North American Association of Alcoholism Pro- grams. Comments on the DuPont, Con- solidated Edison, Eastman Kodak, and the Norton Co. programs are included. 209. FARMER, E. AND CHAMBERS, E. G. “A Psychological Study of Indi- vidual Diflerences in Accident Rates.” Government Publications— Medical Research Council, Indus- trial Health Research Board, Report No. 38, 1926. H. M. Stationery Of- fice, London, England. 210. FARMER, E. AND CHAMBERS, E. G. “A Study of Personal Qualities in Accident Proneness and Profi- ciency.” Government Publica- tions—Medical Research Council, 18 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES Industrial Health Research Board, Report No. 55, 1929. H. M. Sta- tionery Office, London, England. 211. FEDERATION EMPLOYMENT AND GUIDANCE SERVICE. “An Inte- grated Community-Oriented Voca- tional Rehabilitation Approach to the Vocational Problems of the Dis- abled Individual 60 Years of Age and Older.” The Service, New York, July 1963. 212. FELDMAN, P. E., VICKERY, C. C., AND HIMLER, L. E. “Maintaining Emotional Health.” Industr Med Surg, 25:227—236, 1956. 213. FELIX, R. H. “How A Business- man Stays Healthy.” Nation’s Busi- ness, September 1956. 214. FELIX, R. H. “Practical Psychi- atry in Industry.” Arch Industr Health, 17:614—619, June 1958. This discusses good and poor leader- ship in relation to dissatisfaction and ill health. It also demonstrates the cor- relation of patterns of supervision and the accident rate, e.g., an autocratic super- visor may triple the accident rate in his department. 215. FELTON, J. S. “The Coffee Break”. Industr Med Surg, 28: 433—446, October 1959. 216. FELTON, J. S. “Evaluation of the Whole Man.” ] Occup Med, 3 :579—585, December 1961. 217. FELTON, J. S. “How to Stay Healthy Though Overworked.” Dun’s R, 72:42-43, 85—87, August l958. Available data show that the executive often suffers from stress diseases charac- terized by physical change, but no more than others of the same age in less respon- sible positions. Tension is clearly iden- tified with the personality of the individ- ual executive and stems from within the man rather than from the outer forces of his environment. 218. FELTON, J. S. “Progressive In- dustry and the Worried Employee.” Men! Hyg, 37:545—554, 1953. 219. FELTON, J. S. “Recognition of Neurotic Illness by the Industrial Nurse.” Industr Nursing, 7: 10— 15, March 1948. 220. FELToN, J. S. “Social Implica- tions of Illness in Industry.” ] Soc Casework, 30:271—276, July 1949. 221. FETTERMAN, J. L. “The Treat- ment of Neuroscs Associated with Trauma.” Induxtr .Med, 4:475— 480, 1935. 222. FETTERMAN, J. L. “Vertebral Neuroscs.” P s y e h o 5 0 m .Med, 2:265, July 1940. 223. FETTERMAN, J. L. “Neuro-Psy- chiatric Aspects of Industrial Acci- dents.” Industr .Med, 15296—100, February 1946. 224. FEUTINGER, J. “The Mental Factor in the Economic Adjustment of 500 Disabled Ex-Servicemen.” [Merit Hyg, 10:677—700, 1926. 225. FIELD, L. W., EWING, T., AND WAYNE, D. N. “Observations on the Relation of Psychosocial Factors to Psychiatric Illness Among Coal Miners.” Int ] Soc Psychiat, 3(2) :133—145, autumn 1957. 226. FISHER, V. E. The Disxatixfied Worker. Macmillan, New York, 1931. The author, director of the Mental Hygiene Clinic at New York University, proposes the thesis that much vocational maladjustment and industrial unrest is a OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 19 reflection of the individual’s own emo- tional reactions and cites case histories in support of this theory. 227. FLEMING, A. D’ALONzo, C., AND ZAPP, J [Modern Occupational Medicine. Lea & Febiger, Phila- delphia, Pa., 1954-. 228. FLETCHER, L. J. AND SIMONJ. R. “The Relation Between Method of Wage Payment and Incidence of Psychosomatic Disorders.” Occup Psychol, 36(3) :140—145, July 1962. The result of a study of one company’s medical records (1,624 employees over a period of 3 years), demonstrated that there was no difference in the rate of psychosomatic disorders reported by an incentive payment group and a regular dayworker group. 229. FLINN, D. E. “Transient Psy— chotic Reactions During Travel.” Amer ] Psychiat, 119(2) :173—174, 1962. Twenty-two cases of transient psycho- ses termed “travel syndrome” are dis- cussed as they occurred in the military setting during travel under “isolated” conditions among strangers, with inac- tivity, monotony, unaccustomed sur- roundings and absence of accustomed social relationship. 230. FORSTER, N. K. “Mental At- titudes: Their Relationship to In- dustrial Accidents.” Industr Med, 6: 193—195, 1937. 231. FORTUNE. “The Alcoholic Ex. ecutive.” Fortune, January 1960. 232. FOUNTAIN, C. W. “Labor’s Place in an Industrial hIental Health Pro- gram.” Ment Hyg, 29(1) :95, Jan- uary 1945. 233. FOUNTAIN, W. W., EADIE, G. A., HIMLER, L. E., AND MARKUSON, K. E. Industrial .Mcm‘al Health. National Committee for Mental Hygiene. New York, 1944. 234. FRANCO, S. C. “Chronic Alco- holism as a Medical Problem in In- dustry.” Industr .Med Surg, 20(2) : 547, December 1951. The former Consolidated Edison Co. (New York) program of alcoholic re- habilitation is outlined. With the es- tablishment of the alcoholic clinic at Bellevue Hospital this program is no longer in operation. 235. FRANCO, S. C. “A Company Pro- gram for Problem Drinking: Ten Years’ Follow-up.” ] Occup Med, 22157—162, April 1960. 236. FRANCO, S. C. “Disability Eval- uation: A Function of the Industrial hiedical Department.” I Occup Med, 5(9) :433—442, September 1963. This reviews disabled workers em- ployed by the Consolidated Edison Co. and its techniques for dealing with these employees. The types of illnesses which were found to be most prevalent are out- lined. Functional disorders are second on the list of 10 illness categories and psychotic reaction are the largest sub- group. 237. FRANCO, S. C. “Problem Drink- ing and Industry.” Quart ] Stud Alcohol, 15: 453, September 1954. 238. FRANK, J. P. “The Impact of a Diagnosis of Silicosis.” Arch En- viron Health, 3:34—35, July 1961. The author points out the severe psy- chological impact on a worker when told he has incurable silicosis and must quit his job. He feels the companies should not “retire” these men on a disability pension but keep them at a job free from exposure to silica. 239. FRASER, D. C. Stress and its Effect on Perform- “Environmental 20 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES ance.” Occup. Psychol, 31:248— 255,1957. The author feels there is a definite pat- tern in breakdowns under stress, though it may differ considerably with different measures of performance. He believes that repeated exposure to environmental stress may build cumulatively, leading ultimately to breakdown. 240. FRASER, H. F. “Problems Re- sulting from the use of Habituating Drugs in Industry.” Amer ] Public Health, 482561—570, May 1958. Habituating drugs which impair per- formance and induce physical depend- ence provoke many problems in industry. The most universal offenders in these respects are alcohol and barbituates. Other drugs which induce physical de- pendence under conditions of abuse are meprobamate and Doriden. Habituat- ing drugs which do not provide physical dependence include cocaine, marijuana, and the amphetamines. 241. FRASER, R., ET. AL. “The Inci- dence of Neurosis Among Factory Workers.” Government Publica- tions—Medical Research Council Reports, Industrial Health Research Board. H. M. Stationery Office, London, England, 1947. 242. FRENCH, J. R. P. AND KAHN, R. L. to Studying the Industrial Environ- ment and Mental Health.” I Soc Issues, 28(3) 21—47, 1962. 243. FRENCH, J. R. P. AND KAST, S. V. “The Effects of Occupational Status on Physical and Mental Health.” [Soc Issues, 28(3) :67—89, 1962. 244. FRENCH, J R. P., KAHN, R. L., AND MANN, F. C., editors. “Work, Health and Satisfaction.” ] Soc Issues, 28(3), July 1962. “A Programmatic Approach The total issue of this journal is de- voted to research reports from the Uni- versity of Michigan. 245. FRUMKIN, R. M. “Occupation and Mental Illness.” Public Wel- fare Statistics, 7:4—13, 1952. 246. FRUMKIN, R. 1%. “Occupation and Major Mental Disorders,” in Mental Health and Mental Disorder, Rose, A. M., editor. Norton, New York, 1955. 247. GADOUREK, I. AND KOEKEBAK- KER, J. “Industrial Mental Health.” Bull World Fed .Ment Health, 2(1) :48c52, 1950. 248. GARDNER, Y. “Alcoholism: The Concern of Industry and the Com- munity.” Industr Med Surg, 27:648—649, 1958. This is a general article on the prob- lem of alcoholism and the resources avail- able to treat it. Mention is made of ex- perience of the Corning Glass Works and of Ingersoll-Rand of Coming, New York. 249. GARNER, H. H. “Injuries to the Head: Psychiatric Implications in their Management.” Industr Med Surg, 20: 507—508, 1961. 250. GASQUE, M. R. AND PLUMB, C. S. “Suicide During Productive Years.” Arch Environ Health, 2:457—661, April 1961. This paper deals with suicide in an in- dustrial setting. The authors feel that the industrial physician, nurse, and supervisory personnel should be able to pick up suicidal prodromata and assist the employee to get help. 251. GELB, L. A. “Rehabilitation of Mental Patients in a Comprehensive Rehabilitation Center.” N Y S ] Med, 60(15), August 1960. A rehabilitation center which was pre- viously limited to helping physically dis- OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 21 abled may be suited to provision of a full range of services that mentally ill patients require but do not have available to them in present facilities. Beginning efforts to provide such services at the Institute for the Crippled and Disabled, an outpatient comprehensive rehabilitation center affili- ated with New York University, are described. 252. GELLMAN,W. “Vocational Eval- uation of the Emotionally Handi- capped.” ] Rehabilit, 2319—10, 13, 32, 1957. This is a discussion of the use of the evaluative workshop by the Vocational Adjustment and Evaluation Center of the Jewish Vocational Services of Chicago as an integral part of the vocational coun- seling and rehabilitation process for the emotionally handicapped worker. 253. GERARD, D. L., SAENGER, G., AND WILE, R. “The Abstinent Alco- holic.” Arch Gen Psychiat, 6:83— 95, 1962. This study reports on the followup of 299 patients known to the Connecticut Commission on Alcoholism. Statistics on their social and job adjustment are presented. 254. GERSHON, S. AND SHAW, F. H. “Psychiatric Sequelae of Chronic Exposure to Organophosphorus In- secticides.” Lancet, 121371—1374, June 1961. A study of 16 cases of acute exposure to the phosphate-ester insecticides is re- ported. The efTects on the nervous sys- tem are stressed and the fact noted that these effects lasted 6 to 12 months after the exposure ceased. (See entry No. 283.) 255. GERSTLE, W. J. Psychiatry, Automation and the In- dustrial Physician.” Industrial Med Surg, 311157—161, April 1962. ‘ ‘Occupational 256. GERSTLE, W. J. “Preventive Psy- chiatry: A Modern Concept in In- dustrial Medicine.” ]. Occup Med, 42148—151, March 1962. 257. GIBERSON, L. G. “Dealing with Emotional Problems in the Office.” Amer Mgmt A35, 87:22—28, 1939. 258. GIBERSON, L. G. “Emotional First Aid Stations.” Personnel, 16: 1~15, 1939. 259. GIBERSON, L. G. “Job Misfits: Personality Difficulties,” in Human Behavior and It: Relation to Indus- try, Cameron, D. E. and Ross, H. G., editors. McGill University Press, Montreal, Canada, 1944. 260. GIBERSON, L. G. “Industrial As- pects of Aging Personnel.” Public Health Report, Supp 168, pages 22— 33, 1942. 261. GIBERSON, L. G. “Industrial Morale.” Industr Med, 11:116— 118, 1942. 262. GIBERSON, L. G. “M e n t al Health in Industry.” Cliniex, 2(3)»: 719—730, October 1943. 263. GIBERSON, L. G. Health in Industry.” 15: 255—259, 1937. 264. GIBERSON, L. G. “Pitfalls in In- dustry for the Psychiatrist.” Med Women’s ], 47:144—146, 1940. 265. GIBERSON, L. G. “Practical Value and Application of Industrial Health Work from the Viewpoint of Industrial Psychiatry.” Industr Med, 92626—629, December 1940. 266. GIBERSON, L. G. “A Psychiatrist Looks at the Supervisor.” Metro- politan Life Insurance Co., New York, 1945. “Nervous Personnel ], 22 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 267. GIBERSON, L. G. “Psychiatry in Industry.” Personnel ], 15: 91—95, 1936. 268. GIBERSON, L. G. “Psychiatry in Personnel Work.” Industr Med. 122164—172, March 1943. 269. GIBERSON, L. G. “The Role of Psychiatry in Industry.” Dis Nerv Syst, 72304—309, October 1946. 270. GIBERSON, L. G. Problem Employee.” Ass, 134:30—36, 1953. 271. GIBERSON, L. G. “The Tech- nique of Listening to the Worried Employee.” Industr Med, 9:414, July 1940. 272. GIBERSON, L. G. “Today’s In- dustrial Psychiatry.” ] Amer Med Wom Ass, 2:280—281, June 1947. 273. GIBERSON, L. G. “A Wartime Survey of Industrial Psychiatry.” Med Clin N Amer, p. 1085, July 1942. In a. symposium on industrial medicine, this article briefly outlines the history of industrial psychiatry in the United States. 274. GIBERSON, L. G. “Women in In- dustry and the Older Worker,” chapter 5, in Human Behavior and Its Relation to Industry. Cameron, D. E. and Ross, H. G., editors. Mc- Gill University Press, Montreal, Canada, 1944. 275. GILDEA, C. L. “The Psychiatrist Talks to Foremen and Counselors.” Ment Hyg, 30:406—420, 1946. 276. GILMER, B. VON HALLER. Indus- trial Psychology. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1961. Thirty-one chapters include discussions of attitudes, job satisfactions, morale, and industrial mental health. “Salvage the Amer Algmt 277. GINSBERG, E. AND ASSOCIATES. The Ineflective Soldier: Lessons for Management and Nation. Vol. I, The Lost Divisions; vol. II, Break- down and Recovery; vol. III, Pat- terns of Performance. Columbia University Press, New York, 1959. 278. GINSBERG, S. W. A Psychiatrist’s View on Social Issues. Columbia University Press, New York, 1963. 279. GLASS, A. J. “An Attempt to Predict Probable Combat Effective- ness by Brief Psychiatric Examina- tion.” Amer ] Psychiat, 106:181, 1949. 280. GLASS, A. J. ET AL. “Psychiatric Prediction and Military Effective- ness: US. Armed Forces Med ], 7:1427, 1956; 7: 1575, 1956; 8:346, 1957. 281. GOLDSTEIN, D. H. “Motivations in Return to Work.” Industr Med Surg, 30:64—65, February 1961. “The more meaningful work can be made for the employee, the more power- ful will be his motivation to return to work after an absence due to illness or injury.” . . . Author’s conclusion. 282. GOLIM, M. “The Troubled Em- ployee.” ] Amer Med Ass, 168 (10):1371—1375, November 1958. This article reports the establishment of the American Medical Association’s Joint Committee on Mental Health in Industry. It describes what is being done in this field privately and by organiza- tions such as World Health Organiza- tion, Industrial Medical Association, and the Menninger Foundation and makes suggestions for industrial health pro- grams. 283. GOLz, H. H. “Comment on Gershon, S. and Shaw, F. H. ‘Psy- chiatric Sequelae of Chronic Ex- OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 23 posure to Organophosphorus In- secticides,’ Lancet 121371—1374, June 24-, 1961.” Lancet, 369—370, Aug. 12, 1961. The author challenges the validity of the observations and questions the con- clusions of entry No. 254-. 284. GORDON, G. “Industrial Psy- chiatry—5 Year Plant Experiences.” Industr Med Surg, 21 (12) :585, De- cember 1952. 285. GORDON, G. Mental Hygiene.” 1:277—280, 1959. 286. GORDON, G. “The Man and His Job,” in Human Problems in Man- agement. Connecticut Mutual Life Insurance 00., Hartford, Conn, 1961. 287. GORDON, G. “Personal Respon- sibility in Accidents.” ] Occup Med, 3:237—239, May 1961. Chance plays a much smaller role in so—called “accidental” injury than pre- viously supposed. Man is governed by motivations in his own personality which are manifested overtly in his behavior, and investigations into people with acci- dent proneness often reveal a “self- destructive life style.” This may be pre- dictive of future behavior. 288. GOSHEN, C. E. “Simplified Psy- chiatric Nomenclature for the In- dustrial Physician and General Prac- tioner.” Industr Med Surg, 29 : 461—464, October 1960. A simple nomenclature is proposed to clarify communication between the psy- chiatrist and other branches of medicine. Recommended terms are listed for nor- mal psychoneurosis, psychosis, delirium, and other diagnostic categories. 289. GosuNG, R. H. “Peptic Ulcer and Mental Disorder.” ] Psy- chosom Res, 2: 190—198, 1957. “Industry’s Role in ] Occup Med, A survey of 2,068 male psychiatric patients with a history of peptic ulcer showed that there was increased inci- dence among men in their fifties and sixties, among urban as compared to rural dwellers and among foremen as compared to other occupations. 290. GOSWAMI, S. “Industrial Neu- rosis.” Ind ] Psychol, 322201—210, 1957. The common patterns of neuroses seen in industry are defined and explained. Work in the United States, Canada, and Great Britain is compared and general procedures for diagnosis and treatment are outlined. 291. GOTTER, C. “The Industrial Physician and the Worker’s Home Problems.” Industr .Med Surg, 21 (6) 1273, June 1952. The chief of a large industrial medical department writes of the “private talks" employees request about families and self. A contribution can be made to the mental health Of employees by short in- terviews and health education efforts through such talks and in company publications. 292. GRACE, J “Keep Your Em- ployees out of the Hospital.” Harv Bsns R, 37(5) :119—126,1959. While technological improvements are reducing muscular fatigue, the increase in tempo, demands and challenges of today’s jobs has resulted in greater ten- sion for many workers. Programs of preventive medicine will increase morale and productivity while reducing ab- senteeism, insurance costs, and needless surgery. 293. GRAVLEY, G. G. “Jobs and Emotions.” The Wall Street [our- nal, page 1, Mar. 5, 1963. There is growing awareness by man- agement in many large companies of the relationship between employees’ mental health and huge losses caused by absen- teeism, turnover, alcoholism, accidents, 24 297. GREENWALD, H. and low productivity. Companies sponsoring mental health programs now employ 400 psychiatrists as full or part- time consultans. The experiences 10f such programs in several companies is discussed, as well as implications for company liability for employee mental illness as described in two workmen’s compensation cases. 294. GREENBURG, L. A. “The Use of Tranquilizers by the Worker.” Compren: Med, 9:13—15, Septem- ber—November 1957. The author reports on the use of meprobamate in the treatment of alco- holic workers. When compared with a placebo, meprobamate gave highly sig- nificant results in the agitated, irritable, and anxious, as well as the depressed. The conclusion was drawn that meproba— mate will be of some benefit in the tension state of nonalcoholics. Other tran— quilizers were not found to be of value in the work situation. 295. GREENBLATT, M. AND SIMON, B., editors. Rehabilitation of the Men- tally Ill. American Association for the Advancement of Science, Wash- ington, D.C., 1959. 296. GREENHILL, S. “Mental Health and the Worker.” ] Occup Med, 2 : 576—578, December 1960. The author discusses human factors affecting mental health and productivity (family, society, and place Of work) under these headings: Emotional devel- opment of individuals, social milieu, changes in social attitudes, work situa- tion, and psychodynamics of workplace. “Psychoana- lytic Profile of a Factory.” Psycho- analysis, 5(4): 27—37, 1957. Each worker studied in the factory received a high degree of individualized attention from a paternalistic employer who made allowances for occasional re- gressions in the form of play. The author OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES concludes that this sort of psycho- analytic investigation may supply addi- tional insights into factory life. 298. GREENWALD, H. The Call Girl. Ballantine Books, New York, 1958. 299. GREENWOOD, M. AND WOODS, H. M. “The Incidence Of Indus- trial Accidents upon Individuals, with special reference to Multiple Accidents.” Government Publica- tions—Medical Research Council, Industrial Health Research Board, report NO. 4, 1919 (reprinted 1953). H. M. Stationery Office, London, England. 300. GROUP FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF PSYCHIATRY, COMMITTEE ON PSYCHIATRY IN INDUSTRY. “The Application of Psychiatry to Indus- try.” Report No. 20, July 1951. A comprehensive statement of the role Of the psychiatrist in industry is formu- lated by several authorities with expe- rience in the field. The qualifications and functions of the industrial psychia- trist are discussed together with their relationships to executives, personnel managers, industrial physicians, unions, and the community. (Extensive bibliog- raphy.) 301. GUNDRY, C. H. “Industrial Psy- chiatry.” Canad I Public Health, 40: 7—12, January 1949. 302. GURIN, G., VEROFF, J. AND FELD, 5. Americans View Their Mental Health. A Nationwide Interview Survey. Basic Books, New York, 1960. A report of the University Of Michigan Survey Research Center of findings from an interview survey of 2,460 adult Americans, including questions of life adjustment and perceived problems and needs, with individual chapters dealing with work, symptom patterns, and dem- ographic characteristics. “Industry Considers Mental Health.” ] Occup .Med, 2 (6) 1299, June 1960. This is a report of 200 executives from 80 corporations who, in discussing the aims of business, concluded that the cost of neglecting mental health was about four times that of caring for it adequately. 304. HAKKIRUM, S. AND TOIVAINEN, Y. “Psychological Factors Causing Labor Turnover Among Under- ground Workers.” Occup Psychol, 34:15—30, 1960. A sample of 135 Finnish copper miners were given tests of intelligence and per- sonality. Only emotional liability, assessed by motor disturbance after the Ambiguous Situation Test, was signifi- cantly related to job tenure. 305. HALLECK, L. AND MILLER, H. “Th e Psychiatric Consultation: Questionable Social Precedence of some Current Practices.” Amer ] Psychiat, 120(2): 164—169, August 1963. A critical view of the various roles played by the psychiatric consultant to different organizations such as social agencies, industry, universities, govern- ments, and courts. It suggests ques- tions the psychiatrist should ask himself before he submits a formal report to any such agency. 306. HALLIDAY,J. L. “Dangerous Oc- cupation: Psychosomatic Illness and Morale: A Study Based on the In- vestigation of Incapacitating Dis- orders in Underground Miners.” Psychosom Med, 5: 71—84, 1943. 307. HALLIDAY, J. L. “Pyschoneurosis as a Cause of Incapacity Among In- sured Persons.” Brit Med J, 1: 85—- 88, 99—102, March 1935. 308. HANNA, J. V. “Job Stability and Earning Power Of Emotionally Mal- W6-430—-65—3 309. HANNAFORD, E. S. 311. HARRISON, F. M. 313. HAUTY, G. T. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 25 303. HABBE, S. adjusted as Compared with Emo- tionally Adjusted \Vorkers.” ] Ab- norm Soc Psychol, 30: 155—163, 1935. “Listen for Accidents.” Safety Maintenance, 122: 12—14, December 1961. 310. HARGREAVES, G. R. “The Psy- chological Significance of Work.” [Went Health, 18: 44—50, 1959. The author feels that factors in the significance of work are primarily satis- factions in performance and value to society, and psychological hazards are illness, economic unemployment and re- tirement. “Psychiatry Aboard a Hospital Ship During the Attack on Pearl Harbor.” War Med, 8:238, 1945. 312. HARVARD lVIE'DICAL SCHOOL AND PSYCHIATRIC SERVICE, MASSACHU- SETTS GENERAL HOSPITAL. Com- munity Mental Health and Social Psychiatry: A Reference Guide. Harvard University Press, Cam- bridge, Mass., 1962. This gives a detailed index and com- prehensive annotations which offer cover- age of community mental health and social psychiatric literature. “Psychological Problems of Space Flight,” in Phys- ics and Aledicine of the Atmosphere and S pace. John Wiley, New York, 1960. A discussion of psychological prob- lems which may compromise the relia- bility of human functioning in space, such as confinement (which produced ir- ritability or hostility), detachment (anxi- ety, apathy, fear). Most subjects showed behavioral aberrations and loss of effi- ciency. 26 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 314. HAUTY, G. T. AND PAYNE, R. B. “Problems Resulting from the use of Habituating Drugs in Industry: Effects of Analeptic and Depressant Drugs upon Psychological Be- havior.” ] Public Health, 48:571— 577, May 1958. This paper reports an experiment that simulated tasks performed in the opera- tion of aircraft and the aflect of analeptic drugs upon normal healthy men. Tests showed that these drugs postponed the onset of fatigue and the determination of proficiency. Dexedrine restored pro- ficiency and also counteracted the adverse effects of a motion sickness preventive. 315. HAYES, P. AND HAYWORTH, W. A. “Psychiatric Breakdown in Higher Executives.” Tran: Ass In- dustr Med Ofiieers, page 84, Oc- tober 1959. Of the factors commonly supposed to be important in executives breakdowns, work was of doubtfully ascribed signifi- cance. No special type of psychiatric illness seemed to occur in the executive group studied and such significant differ- ences as are to be seen reflect, if anything, the “better” type of personality possessed by the executive group (as compared to the worker control group). 316. HAYWORTH, T. AND NOLAN, J. “Mental Health for Employees.” Personnel ], 28:52—58, June 1949. 317. HENDERSON, R. M. and BACON, S. D. “Problem Drinking: The Yale Plan for Drinking and Indus- try.” Quart ] Stud Alcohol, 14 (2) :247—262, June 1953. The authors list the steps taken in a. joint management-medical-union-com- munity undertaken to help the alcoholic in industry. 318. HENDERSON, W. K., WALTER, D. E., AND WILSON, J. F. “An Enquiry Into Long-Term Incapac- ity for Work.” Bull Hyg, 34(1): 48, Jan. 1959. Health Bull, 16 (4) :68—74, October 1958. A series of reports published in the 1930’s revealed long-term incapacity for work accounts for more than one-third of the time lost through sickness. The study reported in this article suggests possible reduction of this incapacity and draws the following conclusions: (1) Main cause of incapacity is mental illness, (2) lack of medical facilities is no factor, (3) social factors did aggravate illness. 319. HERON, A. AND BRAITHWAITE, D. “Emotional Stability in C01- liery Workers.” Brit] Industr Med, 19:27, 1953. 320. HERSEY, R. B. “Emotional Cycles in Man.” ]. Ment Sci, 77: 151—169, 1931. 321. HERSEY, R. B. Factors in Accidents.” ], 15:59—65, 1936. 322. HERSEY, R. B. Health of Workers.” 18:462—468, 1934. 323. HERSEY, R. B. “Periodic Emo- tional Changes in Male Workers.” Personnel], 7:459—463, 1929. 324. HERSEY, R. B. “Rate of Pro- duction and Emotional States.” Personnel ], 19:355—364, 1932. 325. HERSEY, R. B. Workers’ Emo- tions in Shop and Home. Uni- versity of Pennsylvania, Philadel- phia, Pa., 1932. 326. HERSEY, R. B. “Zest for Work—Gone or Hiding?” Ment Hyg, 38: 12—27, 1954. 327. HERSHEY, R. “The Psycho- pathologies of Business Life.” Personnel], 39:359—362, 1961. “Emotional Personnel “The Mental [Went Hyg, OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 27 According to the author many errors occurring in business situations are in- dications of the unconscious process at work, and may be reduced by examining one’s feelings toward other people in- volved in the situation. 328. HERZBERG, F. The [Mental Health Efiects of the Work En- vironment. Foundation for Re- search on Human Behavior, 1963. 329. HERZBERG, F. Mental Health in Industry. Psychological Service of Pittsburgh, 1955. 330. HERZBERG, F. “New Ap- proaches in Management Organi- zation and Job Design.” Industr Med Surg, 31(11) :477—481, 1962. 331. HERZBERG, F., MAUSNER, B., PETERSON, R. 0., AND CAPWELL, D. F. [ob Attitudes: Review of Research and Opinion. Psycho- logical Service of Pittsburgh, 1957. This contains a detailed chapter by G. C. Taylor on mental health in indus- try with an extensive bibliography. 332. HILL, D. “The Difficult Epi- leptic and his Social Environment.” Trans Ass Industr Med Ofi’icers, 9: 45—50, July 1959. A consideration of the epileptic patient in England, physically, socially, and men- tally. His work ability and personality problems are assessed. 333. HIMLER, L. E. “Current Trends in Industrial Psychiatry.” Amer J Psychiat, 103:149—153, September 1946. 334. HIMLER, L. E. “Emotional Problems in Industry: Recognition and Preventive Measures.” In- dustr .Med Surg, 30:131—4, April 1961. Because half of the patients seen in in- dustrial medical departments have emo- tional problems, the industrial physician is the one to identify these and give aid. These problems are discussed under the following headings: (1) Personality fac- tors antedating employment, ( 2) psycho- logical stress factors on the job, (3) psy- chiatric diagnosis, (4) recognition of treatment needs, (5) readjustment phase. 335. HIMLER, L. E. “Human Rela- tions and Accident Prevention.” Industr Med Surg, 20(3) :121—123, March 1951. 336. HIMLER, L. E. “The Industrial Environment,” chapter 7, in Studies in Supervision. Cameron, D. W. and Ross, H. G., editors. McGill University Press, Montreal, Canada, 1945. 337. HIMLER, L. E. “Occupational Rehabilitation Following Mental Illness.” Indurtr Med Surg, 29: 480—483, October 1960. Dr. Himler points out the conscious and unconscious need for work follow- ing mental illness and then discusses the factors to be considered in re-em- ployment: (1) Age, (2) personality background, (3) diagnosis and clinical course, (4) treatment and discharge procedure, (5) attitude of the patient, his family and his employer. 338. HIMLER, L. E. “Personality Dis- orders of Older Employees.” In- dustr Med, 18:248—252, June 1949. 339. HIMLER, L. E. “The Place of Psychiatry in Industry.” ] Mich Med Soc, 49:75—78, January 1950. 340. HIMLER, L. E. “Psychiatric Ap- proach in Current Mental Health Problems in Industry.” ]. Mich Med Soc, 43:564~568, July 1944. 28 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 34-1. HIMLER, L. E. “Psychiatric Re- habilitation in Industry,” in Mili- tary Neuropsyehiatry. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md., 194-6. 342. HIMLER, L. E. “Psychiatric Techniques in the Management of Employee Problems.” ] Amer Med Ass, 128:638—639, 1945. 34-3. HIMLER, L. E. “Psychothera- peutic Aspects of Foreman Con- tacts.” Ment Hyg, 29(1) 2106, January 1945. The industrial psychiatrist, according to the author, trains and helps the fore— man in human relations through lectures, case discussions, and informal conver- sations. 344. HINKLE, L. E., PINSKY, R. H., GROSS, I. D., AND PLUMMER, N. “The Distribution of Sickness Dis- ability in a Homogeneous Group of ‘Healthy Adult Men.’ ” Amer ] Hyg, 64:220—242, 1956. 345. HINKLE, L. E. AND PLUMMER, N. “Life Stress and Industrial Absen- teeism—the Concentration of Sick- ness and Absenteeism in One Seg- ment of a Working Population.” Industr Med Surg, 21 (8) :363—375, August 1952. A study is reported which investi- gated the distribution of absenteeism among a group of female workers and its relation to problems of administration and illness. One-third of the working group contributed two-thirds of the absences and also had a higher accident rate and more administrative difficulties. 346. HINKLE, L. E., REDMONT, R., PLUMMER, N., AND WOLFF, H. G. “Women in Industry: An Exami- nation of the Relation Between Symptoms, Disability, and Serious Illness in two Homogeneous Groups of Men and Women.” Amer ] Public Health, 50:1327—36, September 1960. 34-7. HINKLE, L. E. AND WOLFF, H. G. “Health and the Social En- vironment: Experimental Investi- gations.” In: Explorations in Social Psychiatry. Leighton, A. H., Clau- sen, J. A., and Wilson, R. N., edi- tors. Basic Books, New York, 1957. The authors found in a large sample of predominantly working class persons that those individuals who were most frustrated in their aspirations and dis- appointed in their accomplishments, also had the highest incidence of illness and showed more disturbances of mood, thought, and behavior than those who came nearer to reaching their aspirations. 348. HIPPS, J. C. “A Proposed Technique for Assessing Adjust- ment at Work.” Industr Med Surg, 27:520~523, October 1958. This Westinghouse study is an early part of a long-range project on work environment and its relation to psy- chiatric illness. Assessment is by the supervisor, daily, on carefully chosen quantifiable criteria including attendant productivity and behavior. Dispensary visits are recorded separately. Twenty supervisors and 175 workers were studied. 349. HIRSCHBERG, J. C., ROGERS, L., STUBBLEFIELD, R. L., THALER, M., PRINCI, E, AND COLEMAN, J. V. “A Study of Miners in Relation to the Accident Problem: In Psy- chiatric Evaluation.” Amer J Orthopsyehiat, 20:552—559, 1950. 350. HIRSCHFELD, A. H. AND BEHAN, R. C. “The Accident Process. I. Etiological Considerations of Indus- trial Injuries.” ] Amer Med Ass, 186(3) :193—199, October 1963. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 29 The authors reviewed 300 cases of industrial accidental injuries referred during litigation when the workers sought compensation for their injuries. They introduce the concept of the “ac- cident process” and relate it to the worker’s behavior prior to accidents, during the recovery process and in his subsequent actions. Serious consider- ation is given to psychodynamic, social, legal, and compensation problems so often involved in such cases. 351. HITCHCOCK, M. “Emotional Health in Industry.” Industr Med, 10 : 505—506, November 1941. 352. HOPHEAD, T. H. “Problem Drinking in Industry.” Arch In- dustr Hyg Comp Med, 9(6) :526, June 1954. 353. HORNEY, K. “Inhibitions in Work.” Amer ] Psychoanal, 7:18— 25, 1947. 354. HOWE, H. F. AND WOLEMAN, W. “Guide for Evaluating Em- ployability after Psychiatric Ill- ness.” ] Amer Med Ass, 181(12): 1086—1089, Sept. 22, 1962. This guide for physicians was pre- pared by a joint committee of the American Medical Association Council on Mental Health and its Council on Industrial Health. 355. HUNT, R. G. Factors in Mental Disorder.” havSei, 4296-106, 1959. An appraisal of the status of re- search on sociocultural variables and mental disorder, with reference to demographic, ecological and cross-cul- tural factors as well as social stratifica- tion and social mobility studies. Psy. chiatric treatment is additionally con- sidered. “Socio-cultural Be- 356. INDUSTRIAL MEDICINE AND SUR- GERY, editorial. “Industrial Man- agement: The Industrial Physician and Expansions in Industrial Med- ical Programs.” Industr Med Surg, 32(1) :45—46, January 1963. The author views the job of industrial medicine, the role of the industrial physician, and the need for the expan- sion of industrial medical programs. He feels that occupational health should move further into the industrial community with psychiatry playing an important role. 357. IRVIN, E. A. “Psychosomatic Consultations in Industry.” I ndustr Med, 15: 1—5, 1946. 358. IRVING, J. G. “The Physiolog- ical Aspects of Emotional Problems of Executives. Physical Aspects in the Causation of Emotional Prob- lems.” Industr Med Surg, 32(5): 170—173, May 1963. In this article case material is pre- sented to stress the need to rule out organic disease before diagnosing psycho- neurosis. The physical and predisposing causes of emotional disorders are clas- sified with particular emphasis on occu- pational factors as precipitating mechan- isms in such illness. 359. JACKSON, H. M. “Develop- ments Relating to Mental Health.” Arch Environ Health, 4(3): 350- 355, March 1962. Mental health problems are discussed in the light of present day technological and sociological change and their effect upon industry. Preventive and thera- peutic measures to be taken by indus- trial psychiatrists are suggested. Mani- festations of mental illness on the job are listed. 360. JAHODA, M. “Incentives to Work: A Study of Unemployed Adults in a Special Situation.” Occup Psychol, 16:20—30, 1942. 30 361. JAHODA, M. “Some Socio-Psy- chological Problems of Factory Life.” Brit ] Psychol, 31:191—206, January 1942. 362. JAMES, W. R. L. “Fatal Addic- tion to Trichlorethylene.” Brit ] Industr Med, 20(1) :47—49, Janu- ary 1963. This article recounts the case of a worker with a fatal exposure to trichlor- ethylene. Psychiatric symptoms during the year of exposure prior to death are reported in detail. 363. JANIS, I. L. Airwar and Emo- tional Stress: Psychological Studies of Bombing and Civil Defense, chapters 4—8. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1951. 364-. JAQUES, E. The Changing Cul- ture of a Factory. Dryden Press, New York, 1952. A research study of a British factory from a socio-psychological-psychoana- lytic viewpoint. The author is a psychi< atrist who headed a research team from the Tavistock Clinic. This is a well- documented and detailed volume and is regarded as a milestone in occupational mental health reseach. 365. JAQUES, E. “Psycho-pathology in Industrial Life.” Ment Health, 18:50—55, 1959. According to Jaques it cannot be as- sumed that the pressures of work di- rectly cause mental illness; rather, the existing neuroses of individuals are in- fluenced by industrial life so that indi- viduals are permitted to act out the disturbed parts of their personalities in work. 366. JAQUES E. AND CROOK, I. “The Personality Make-Up of Emotion- ally Unstable Soldiers in Relation to Occupational Adjustments.” ]. Clin Psychol, 2:221—230, 1946. 368. JARRETT, M. C. 369. JEND, W. 370. JENNISON, J. 371. JOHNSON, D. E. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 367. JARRETT, M. C. “The Mental Hygiene of Industry—Report of Progress on Work Undertaken Un- der the Engineering Foundation of New York City.” Ment Hyg, 4: 867—884, October 1920. This is a summary of the early work of Southard and others which forms an historical backdrop to present-day programs of research and application of psychiatric concepts in industry. “The Psycho- pathic Employee: A Problem of Industry.” The National Commit- tee for Mental Hygiene, New York, 1922. “The Role of the Physician in the Prevention of On- Duty Accidents.” ] Occup Med, 5(7) :331—335, July 1963. This article outlines the author’s con- cept of the role that the industrial phy- sician plays in accident prevention. He discusses motivating psychological factors in accidents and outlines the areas in which management can further develop safety programs. “Observations Made on a Group of Employees with Duodenal Ulcer.” Amer ] Med Sci, 196:654—662, 1938. “A Depressive Retirement Syndrome.” Geriatrics, 13 : 314—319, 1958. 372. JOHNSON, R. H. AND PATTER- SON, C. H. “Vocational Objectives for the Emotionally Disabled.” ] Counsel Psychol, 4:291—296, 1957. The problem of whether some occu- pations are more suitable than others for the emotionally disabled is considered. The conclusion is that further research in this area is needed. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 31 373. JOHNSON, W. C. “Accident Prevention: An Overview of the Field.” Industr Med Surg, 31 : 162, April 1962. 374. JOHNSTONE, R. T. “Fear, Frus- tration and Futility; the Industrial Aspect.” Arch Industr Hyg Occup Med, 82391—8, 1953. 375. JONES, M. AND SCARISBRUCK, R. “Efl‘ort Intolerance in Soldiers: Re- view of 500 Cases.” War Med, 2: 901, November 1942. 376. JONES, M. “The Industrial Neurosis Unit at Belmont Hos- pital,” chapter 2, in The Thearpeu- tic Community. Basic Books, New York, 1953. 377. JONES, M. “The Working of an Industrial Neurosis Unit.” Occup Ther, 26:213—221, August 1947. 378. JOURNAL OF THE AMERICAN MEDICAL ASSOCIATION, editorial, “Woe and Work.” ] Amer Med Ass, 16821377, November 1958. 379. JOURNAL OF THE AMERICAN MEDICAL ASSOCIATION, editorial, “Troubled People on the Job.” ] Amer Med Ass, 173(12) :1361, July 23, 1960. The problems emotional disturbances pose to industry include absenteeism, ac- cidents, and reactions to authority fig- ures. The need for supervisors who un- derstand these factors is discussed. The editorial comments on the American Psychiatric Association publication, “Troubled People on the Job.” 380. KAHN, R. L., FRENCH, J. R. P., MANN, F. C., AND WOLFE, D. M. “The Effects of the Industrial En- vironment on Mental Health.” In- stitute for Social Research, Ann Arbor, Mich., 1959. (Mimeo- graphed.) 381. KAMMAN, G. R. “Traumatic Neurosis, Compensation Neurosis, or Attitudinal Pathosis?” Arch N eurol Psychiat, 65 : 593—603, 1951. 382. KAMMER, A. G. “Effects of Management Environment on Man- agement Health.” Arch Environ Health, 5:201—207, September 1962. 383. KAPLAN, O. J. “The Mental Health of Older Workers.” The Aged and Society, Derber, M., edi- tor. Industrial Relations Research Association, Champaign, 111., 1950. 384. KAPLAN, S. M. AND HETRICK, E. S. “Thyrotoxicosis, Traumatic Neurosis and the Dangerous En- vironment.” Psychosom Med, 24: 240, May—June 1962. A case history is presented to show the relation between a sudden over- whelming, traumatic incident and the onset of thyrotoxicosis. The difficulties in differentiating between the symptoms of these disorders suggest a relationship between thyrotoxicosis and traumatic neurosis. 385. KEATINGE, G. R. AND Bos, A. “Accident, Sickness, and Absence Records: A Comparative Study of Two Matched Groups.” Brit ] Industr Safety, 5(62) 1247—251, 1962. Two matched groups of 39 persons employed in a factory, one with low and one with high accident rates, were compared in respect to their work rec- ord, health, and social background. 32 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 386. KEHOE, R. A. “A Critical Ap- praisal of Current Practices in the Clinical Diagnosis of Lead Intoxi- cation.” Industr Med 69" Surg, 20:253, 1951. 387. KINGSLEY, L. V. AND HYDE, R. W. “The Health and Occupa— tional Adequacy of the Mentally Deficient.” ] Abnorm Soc Psychol, 40(1) :37—46, January 1945. 388. KIRCHNER, W. K. “A Fresh Look at the Safety Program: The Fallacy of Accident-Proneness.” Personnel, 38(6) :34—37, Novem- ber—December 1961. It is the author’s opinion that the so- called “permanent accident prones” are made up of a very small group. Acci- dent proneness is a fluid situation, af- fecting different people at different times. 389. KLEINER, R. J. AND PARKER, S. “Goal Striving, Social Status, and Mental Disorder: A Research Re- view.” Amer Sociol Rev, 28(2): 189—203, April 1963. This research review relates goal-striv- ing, social status, mobility, and mobility orientation to mental illness, not as sep- arate variables, but as complex inter- actions. 390. KLEMES, M. A. “A Psychiatrist in Industry: A Preventive Ap- proach.” Industr Med Surg, 24: 127, March 1955. 391. KLEMES, M. A. AND KALLIJEAN, V. J. “The Group Psychotherapist in Industry: A Preventive Ap- proach.” Int] Group Psychother, 5(1) :91, January 1955. This article outlines techniques which use a group method to teach under- standing of self and others to manage- ment in industry. 392. KNIGHT, J. A. AND BAIRD, V. C. “Mental Health in Industrial Prac- tice. Mental Hygiene Among Em- ployees.” ] Occup .Med, 3:365— 368, August 1961. 393. KNIGHT, J. A. AND BAIRD, V. C. “Mental Health in Industrial Prac- tice. Early Detection of Emotional Disorder.” ] Occup Med, 3:412— 416, September 1961. 394. KNIGHT, J. A. AND BAIRD, V. C. “Mental Health in Industrial Prac- tice. The Part-Time Psychiatrist in Industry.” ] Occup Med, 3:463— 466, October 1961. 395. KORNHAUSER, A. “Mental Health of Factory Workers: A De- troit Study.” Hum Org, 21 :43—46, spring 1962. 396. KOZOL, H. L. “Pretraumatic Personality and Psychiatric Se- quelae of Head Injury.” Arch Neurol Psychiat, 53:358, 1945. 397. KUBIE, L. S. “Psychiatry in In- dustry.” Ment Hyg, 29(2) 2201, April 1945. Giving the wartime experience of 10 psychiatrists in industry, the author dis- cusses how psychiatry can play its part in industrial health. 398. KUBIE, L. S. “Psychiatry in In- dustry.” Personnel ], 24:50—55, 1945. 399. Kumsn, s. B. “Problem Work- ers or Workers with Problems.” Supervisory Algmt, 6:6, February 1961. The author states that at least one- half of the 2 million people absent from work on an average day are suffering from some form of emotional distress. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 33 He feels the supervisor must look for reasonable explanations, realizing that some problems may be temporary, but that others may be deep rooted and that the proper professional help is often indicated. 400. LADD, A. C. “Cerebrovascular Disease in an Employed Popula- tion.” ] Chron Dis, 15:985—990, October 1962. 401. LAING, J. K. “Some Aspects of Placing Defectives in Work.” M ent Health, 18:56~59, 1959. Examples of work placement of the mentally retarded, trained at one British institution during the period 1939—53, are described. No universally applicable formula for successful voca- tional adjustment has emerged and it is still necessary to proceed by trial and error. 402. LANDY, D. AND GRIFFITH, W. D. “Employer Receptivity Toward Hir- ing Psychiatric Patients.” M ent Hyg, 42:383—390, 1958. A study in one community showed that a large proportion of potential employers were willing to employ former mentally ill persons. However, most such persons obtained their own jobs without telling employers about their previous illness and investigators ob- tained direct employment aid for only a few who needed it. 403. LANTos, B. “Metapsychologi- cal Considerations on the Concept of Work.” Int ] Psychoanal, 33: 439—443, 1952. 404. LANTos, B. “Work and the In- stincts.” Int ] Psychoanal, 24: 114—119, 1943. Since in analytic practice, disturb- ances of the working capacity come next in importance to the disturbances of sexuality, a detailed study is offered of the meaningfulness of work to the personality, the goals it serves, its re- lationship to play, its sublimation value for sexual drive, and its significance in relation to self-preservation. 405. LAPHAM, R. F. “The Alcoholic Worker: His Recognition and Treatment.” ] Occup Med, 2: 528—531, November 1960. 406. LANTZ, H. R. “Occupational Differences in Mental Disorders.” Soc Probl, 2(2) :100—105, October 1954. 407. LARKE, A. “Industrial Psychia- try: Aid to Human Relations.” Dun’s Rev Cc)" Mod Ind, 63:130- 135, February 1954. 408. LARSON, J. C. AND HAGOPIAN, R., ET AL. The Human Element in Industrial Accident Prevention. Center of Safety Education, Divi- sion of General Education, New York University, 1955. 409. LAUER, D. J. “Modern Reha- bilitation as Seen by an Industrial Physician.” I ndustr Med Surg, 30:11—13, January 1961. Dr. Lauer reports a survey of the practices of three industrial firms to- ward reducing disability and increasing productiveness. He concludes that more emphasis should be placed on the psychological aspects of disability. Sec- ondary gain was seen as prolonged by litigation which produced even further psychological trauma. 410. LAUGHLIN, H. P. “An Ap- proach to Executive Development: Five Years Experience with Ana- lytically Oriented Groups of Execu- tives.” Dis Nerv Syst, 15:12, 1954. 411. LAUGHLIN, H. P. “Manage- ment Seminars on Human Rela- tions: A Psychiatric Contribution 34 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES to the Development of Executives.” George Washington University Medical School, Washington, D.C., 1952. (Mimeographed.) 412. LAUGHLIN, H. P. “Seminars with Executives on Human Rela- tions in the US. Government.” Int ] Group Psychother, 4(2) :165, April 1954. A report of a successful program de- signed to help executives toward a great- er understanding of self and others through group discussions. 413. LAUGHLIN, H. P. AND HALL, M. “Psychiatry for Executives: An Ex- periment in the Use of Group Anal- ysis to Improve Relationships in an Organization.” Amer ] Psychiat, 107:493—497, 1951. 414. LEAVIT'I‘, A. “Industrial Ther- apy: Its Role in a Complete Re- habilitation Program.” Amer Arch Rehabilit Ther, 8(4) :4—8, 1960. The administration of an industrial therapy program, with applications in the rehabilitation of medical, surgical, and psychiatric patients, is outlined. 415. LEE, R. E. AND SCHNEIDER, R. F. “Hypertension and Arteriosclerosis in Executive and Non~Executive Personnel.” ] Amer Aled Ass, 167: 1447-1450, 1958. 416. LEGGo, C. “Fundamentals of Human Behavior.” Industr Med Surg, 24(8) :348, August 1955. 417. LEGGO, C. to Dinner: “Invite the Professor The Social Sciences Have Meaning for Management.” Industr Med Surg, 21(7) :311—318, July 1952. This is a philosophical discussion by an industrial physician of the relation- ships among the social sciences, industry, and industrial medicine. 418. LEGGO, C. Industr Med, March 1945. 419. LEGGO, C. “Resentment: An Obstacle to Recovery.” Industr. Med. Surg, 22(6):241—245, June 1953. 420. LEGGo, C., LAW, S. G., AND CLARKE, E. K. “Industrial Psy- chiatry in the Community of Oak “Psychodynamics.” 14(3) :177—184, Ridge.” Industr Med, 15:244— 253, April 1946. 421. LEHMANN, H. E. “Psychoactive Drugs and Their Influence on the Dynamics of Working Capacity.” ] Occup Med, 22523—527, Novem- ber 1960. 422. LEIGHTON, A. H. An Introduc- tion to Social Psychiatry. Charles C. Thomas, Springfield, Ill., 1960. 423. LEIGHTON, A. H. The Govern- ing of Men. Princeton University Press, Princeton, N.J., 1946. 424. LEIoHTON, A. H. “Psychiatric Disorder and Social Environment.” Psychiatry, 18 : 367—383, 1955. 425. LEONARD, E. D. “The Realities of Rehabilitation.” ] Occup Med, 4:475—481, September 1962. 426. LEOPOLD, R. L. AND DILLON, H. “Psychiatric Considerations in Whiplash Injuries of the Neck.” Penn Med ], 63:385, March 1960. Forty-seven cases were studied during a 2-year period. Particular attention was given to psychodynamic and psy- chopathological aspects of whiplash. ~Drs. Leopold and Dillon concluded that the emotional reaction is not signifi- OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 35 cantly related to preexisting psychologi- cal disease. 432. LEVINSON, H. “Industrial Mental Health.” Menninger Q, 427. LEVINSON, D. “Role, Personal- 11(2) :17—21,June1957. ity and Social Structure in the Or- ganizational Setting.” ] Abnorm Soc Psychol, 58:170—180, 1959. 428. LEVINSON, H. “Alcoholism in Industry.” Menninger Q, 11(2), 1957. A special issue of the Menninger Quarterly is devoted to programs for dealing with alcoholism in industry, in- cluding clinics jointly sponsored by in- dustries, community clinics partially sponsored by industries, and Alcoholic Anonymous programs. (29 references.) 429. LEVINSON, H. “Emotional First Aid on the Job.” Menninger Q, 11(3) :6—15, September 1957. Dr. Levinson deals in lay terms with techniques of recognizing emo- tional disturbance and of counseling with and relating to the disturbed em- ployee. Basic concepts of individual reactions to stressful situations are in- cluded as are principles of unconscious influences determining how one thinks, feels and behaves. (Reprinted as a ten page pamphlet by the National As- sociation for Mental Health.) 430. LEVINSON, H. Emotional Health in the World of Work. Harper & Row, New York, 1964. 431. LEVINSON, H. “Employee Counseling in Industry: Observa- tions of Three Programs.” Bull Menninger Clin, 20:2, March 1956. The counseling programs at the Western Electric, Prudential Life In- surance and Caterpiller Tractor com- panies are described. They have in common the characteristic of being carried out by trained lay people. 433. LEVINSON, H. 434. LEVINSON, H. 435. LEVINSON, H. Dr. Levinson describes the establish- ment of the Division of Industrial Mental Health at the Menninger Foun- dation, as well as its future plans. “A Psychologist Looks at Executive Development.” Harv Bsns R, 40(5) :69—75, Sep- tember—October 1962. This article shows why there are so many failures with present approaches to executive development and how management can use psychological principles to strengthen its programs in the future. “The Psycholo- gist in Industry.” Harv Bm: R, 37 (5) :93—99, 1959. Dr. Levinson discusses the changing role of the psychologist in industry, pointing out implicit dangers in adapt- ing clincial techniques to industrial situ- ations, and suggests steps for manage- ment to improve psychological services. “What Can a Psychiatrist Do in Industry?” Menninger Q, 9(2), spring 1955. This is a description of the mental health programs at Eastman Kodak Co. and American Cyanamid Co. Dr. Lev- inson also describes the survey of indus- trial psychiatry carried out by the Men- ninger Foundation in 1954. Stress is given to the (unconscious) maintenance of personal equilibrium. 436. LEVINSON, H., PRICE, C. R., MUNDEN, K. J., MANDL, H. J., AND SOLLEY. Men, Management and Mental Health. Harvard Univer- sity Press, Cambridge, Mass., 1962. This book is based on the results of a study conducted by a survey team of clinical psychologists, psychiatrists and social scientists. Eight hundred sixty- 36 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES five employees of a Midwestern utility were studied to determine the gratifica- tions people seek in their work and the processes they use to obtain them. A part of the book centers on the psycho- logical contract between employee and the company. What the executives can do to help fulfill this contract is dis~ cussed. Several new hypotheses are pro- posed. 437. LEVY, S. AND FREEDMAN, L. “Psychoneurosis and Economic Life.” Soc Probl, 4(1):55—67, July 1956. 438. LIFE EXTENSION FOUNDATION. “6,000 Managers Report Their Ex- perience.” Mgmt R, 47: 13—21, 1958. 439. LINDER, M. P. AND LANDY, D. “Postdischarge Experience and V0- cational Rehabilitation, Needs of Psychiatric Patients.” Ment Hyg, 42:29—44, 1958. This is a study of the vocational ex- periences of 40 male ex-mental patients which showed the majority to be work- ing one to 21/2 years after leaving the psychiatric hospital, but with consider- able discrepancy between what work many were doing and what work they wanted to be doing. Need for voca- tional guidance and rehabilitative serv- ices for patients is emphasized. 440. LINE, W. “Human Relations and Industrial Health.” Canad Med Ass ], 58:484—486, 1948. 441. LINE, W. “Mental Health in Industry.” Proc Int Congr Alent Health, London, England, 4:175— 182, 1948. 442. LING, T. M. “Industrial Neu- rosis.” Lancet, 1:830—832, 1944. 443. LING, T. M. “Major Psycho- Social Problems in Industry and Psychological and Occupational Ef- fects of Illness and Accident,” in Mental Health and Human Rela- tions in Industry, Ling, T. M., editor. Paul B. Hoeber, Inc., New York, 1955. 444. LING, T. M., editor. Mental Health and Human Relations in In- dustry. H. K. Lewis, London, Eng- land, 1954; Paul B. Hoeber, Inc., New York, 1955. This is a book about the Roffey Park Rehabilitation Center in England which contains chapters by personnel man- agers, business representatives, psy- chiatrists, and psychologists. Relevant chapters are cited as individual entries. 445. LING, T. M. “Occupational Rehabilitation of Psychiatric Cases.” Amer ]. Psychiat, 109: 172—176, 1952. 446. LING, T. M. “Rehabilitation of British Industry’s Neurosis Cases.” ] Rehabilit, 12(4) :33—35, 38, 1946. 447. LING, T. M. “Roffey Park Re- habilitation Centre.” Lancet, 1: 283, 1945. 448. LING, T. M. “Rofi’ey Park Re- habilitation Center.” Occup Ther, 26:222—224, August 1947. I 449. LION, J. S. “The Emotional Stability of Miners with Nystag- mus.” Brit ] Induxtr Med, 15: 204—206, July 1958. Sixty-seven men suffering from coal miners’ nystagmus and the same num- ber of control miners were compared on a battery of objective tests of emo- tional instability. The men with nystag- mus scored significantly more neurotic responses than the controls. Neither OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 37 the severity of the disease nor its dura- tion correlated with emotional instability. 450. LION, J. S. “A Comparison of the Emotional Stability of Coal Miners and Railwaymen.” Brit ] Industr Med, 7:41—45, January 1960. 451. LIONE, J. G. “Convulsive Dis- orders in a Working Population.” ] Occup Med, 3:359—373, August 1961. 452. LUONco, E. P. “The Climate of Stress.” Industr Illed Surg, 28: 288—295, June 1959. The author deplores the trend of socialization of man at the expense of individualism and man’s loss of religious values. He states that 85 percent to 95 percent of people with emotional diffi- culties, and those subject to the stresses of our culture, do not need a psycholo- gist or a psychiatrist, but can find a solution to their problems by talking to family friends, relatives, priest, or min- ister. This is presented within the context of an industrial medical pro- gram. 453. LUONGo, E. P. “Employment of Persons with Certain Physical and Neuropsychiatric Impair- ments.” Occup Med, 3: 1—12, Jan- uary 1947. 454. LUONGo, E. P. “Occupational and Non-occupational Stress in Re- lation to Employee Health.” In- dustr Med Surg, 24:242—246, 1955. 455. MACIVER, J. “The Impact of Psychiatry on American Manage- ment: A Psychiatrist’s View.” In- dustr Med Surg, 31(11) :471—476, November 1962. 456. IVIACIVER, J. “The Profession of Psychiatry,” in Human Problems in Management. Connecticut Mu- tual Life Insurance Company, Hartford, Conn., 1961. 457. MACIVER, J. “Psychiatric As- pects of Cardiovascular Diseases in Industry,” chapter 8, in The Heart of Industry, Warshaw, L.J., editor. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1960. 458. MACIVER, J., MCLEAN, A. A., HERZBERG, F., BURLING, T., AND ROETHLISBERGER, F. J. “Psychia- try and the Future of American Management.” I ndustr Med Surg, 31(11) :499—503, November 1962. 459. MACIVER, J. “Psychological Aspects of Accident Causation.” Industr Med Surg, 28(5) :230—231, May 1959. The article discusses the complexity of accident causation. The author be- lieves that semi nondirective interviews would add significant data to an acci- dent report as destructive impulses are in many instances close to awareness. 460. MACIVER, J. “The Psychologist in Industry: Role as Seen by the Psychiatrist in Industry.” Arch Industr Health, 18:118—119, Au- gust 1958. 461. MACKAY, R. P. “Post-Trau- matic Neuroses.” I nduxtr Med Surg, 29(5) :200, May 1960. A discussion of post-traumatic neu- roses and two of its major types— “anxiety” and “hysteria.” Treatment needs are discussed under these head- ings: (1) Protect patient’s ego against injury and degradation, (2) adapt treatment to patient’s needs, (3) early return to work, (4) be prepared to allow sufficient time for the resolution of theconflict. 38 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 462. MACMILLAN, J. M. “The Phys- iological Aspects of Emotional Prob- lems of Executives: Physical Signs of Emotional Problems.” Industr Med Surg, 32(5) :173~l74, May 1963. 463. MAIN, T. P. AND REES, J. R. “Industrial Stress and Psychiatric Illness,” in Modern Practice in Psy- chological Medicine, Main, T. P. and Rees, J. R., editors. Paul B. Hoeber, Inc., New York, 1949. 464. MAISEL, A. Q., editor. The Health of People Who Work. The National Health Council, New York, 1960. 465. MANN, F. C. AND BAUMGARTEL, J. “Absences and Employee Atti- tudes in an Electric Power Com- pany.” Human Relations Series No. 1, report No. 2. Institute for Social Research, Ann Arbor, Mich., 1952. 466. MANN, F. C. AND HOFFMAN, L. R. Automation and the Work- er: A Study of Social Change in Power Plants. Henry Holt & Com- pany, New York, March 1960. 467. MANN, F. C. AND SPARLING, J. “Changing Absence Rates: An Ap- plication of Research Findings.” Personnel, January 1956. 468. MANN, F. C. AND WILLIAMS, L. K. “Some Effects of the Changing Work Environment in the Office.” ] Soc Issues, 18(3):1— 47, July 1962. 469. MANN, F. C., METZNER, H., AND BAUMGARTEL, H. “The Supervisor and Absence Rates.” Supervisory Mgmt, 2(7) :7—14, 1957. 470. MARGOLIN, R. J. “The Mental Patient Who Wants to Fail.” In- dustr Med Surg, 32(7):269—273, July 1963. This article discusses the self-destruc- tive patterns of some psychiatric patients and suggests techniques for his recog- nition. Methods to correct failure- seeking behavior and considerations for job placement and followup are sug- gested. 471. MARKOWE, M. “Occupational Psychiatry: An Historical Survey and Some Recent Researches.” ] Ment Sci, 99:414, January 1953. 472. MARKOWE, M. “Some Psy- chiatric Problems in Industry.” Clinical], 80:201—207, 1951. 473. MARKOWE, M. AND BARBER, L. “Effects of Psychological Handicap in Two Factory Groups.” Brit ] Industr Med, 9: 221—226, 1952. 474. MARKOWE, M. AND BARBER, L. “Mental Health in Relation to La- bor Turnover of Unskilled Workers in Large Industrial Establishment.” Brit ] Prev Soc Med, 7(4):205— 210, October 1953. 475. MARKOWE, M. AND BARBER, L. “Psychological Handicap in Rela- tion to Productivity and Occupa- tional Adjustment.” Brit ] Industr Med, 19: 125—131, 1953. 476. MARKUSON, K. E. “Mental Hygiene and Industry: Mental As- pects of Industrial Employment.” M ent Hyg, 28:28—36, 1944. 447. MASLow, A. H. Motivation and Personality. Harper & Broth- ers, New York, 1954. 478. MASON, F. V. “A Study of 700 Maladjusted School Teachers.” Ment Hyg, 15:576—599, 1931. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 39 479. MATHEWS, REA. AND Row- LAND, L. W. How to Recognize and Handle Abnormal People. Na- tional Association for Mental Health, New York, 1960. This is a manual for police officers on patterns of behavior indicative of men- tal illness. Useful techniques for deal- ing with such persons are suggested. 480. MAXWELL, M. A. “Early Iden- tification of Problem Drinkers in Industry.” Quart] Stud Alcohol, 21 :655—678, December 1960. Questionnaire data from 406 male problem drinkers in industry are reported which yielded signs of problem drink- ing. The use of these signs would have predicted 72 percent of the study group at an early stage. 481. MAXWELL, M. A. “A Study of Absenteeism, Accidents and Sick- ness Payments in Problem Drinkers in One Industry.” Quart ] Stud Alcohol, 20(2) 2302—312, June 1959. The medical records of one US. com- pany provided data on 48 problem drinkers which were compared wtih 2 matched control groups. The problem drinker was absent 2.5 times as often, cost three times as much in sick pay- ments and had 3.6 times as many acci- dents. 482. MAYER, G. AND FRANZ, H. C. “A Mental Health Programme in Industry.” Bull World Fed Ment Health, 6:52—53, 1954. 483. McATEE, O. B. “Establishment and Function of an Industrial Mental Hygiene Service.” Amer ] Prychz'at, 107:623—627, 1951. 484. McGee, L. C. “The Psycho- logical Aspects of Emotional Prob- lems of Executives: Signs of Psy- chological Factors of Emotional Problems.” Industr Med Surg, 32 (5) :180—181, May 1963. 485. MCGUIRE, T. F. AND LEARY, F. J. “Problems Resulting From the Use of Habituating Drugs in In- dustry: Tranquilizing Drugs and Stress Tolerance.” Amer ] Public Health, 48:578—584, May 1958. A study of 10 healthy airmen and their stress tolerance while on thera- peutic doses of tranquilizers is reported. Psychological factors are discussed and the conclusion is drawn that they should not fly while taking such a drug. 486. MCLEAN, A. A. “Accidents and the ‘Human Factor.’ ” Per- sonnel ], 34:342—345, February 1956. 487. MCLEAN, A. A. “Accident Proneness: A Clinical Approach to Injury Liability.” Industr Med, 24(3) :122—126, March 1955. 488. MCLEAN, A. A. “Emotional Problems of Businessmen.” Ad- vanc Mgmt, 25(9) :9—10, 1960. 489. MCLEAN, A. A. “An Indus- trial Psychiatrist Looks at Employee Communications.” Personnel ], 33(9):340—343, February 1955. 490. MCLEAN, A. A. “Industrial Psychiatry as Preventive Psychia- try.” Amer ] Prychother, 12(4): 817—821, October 1958. 491. MCLEAN, A. A. “Injury-Lia- ble.” Indurtr Med Surg, 22(8): 367—368, August 1953. 492. MCLEAN, A. A. “Management Discovers Psychiatry.” Think, page 6, March 1959. 40 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES. In the business world, the psy- chiatrist’s main job is stimulating mental health rather than treating illness. He engages in clinical activities, in mental health education for management, and in research. He must be familiar with both work locations and processes to be aware of problems they may present. Since emotionally “toxic” factors may be present, the psychiatrist should be able to identify them and make appro- priate recommendations. 493. MCLEAN, A. A. “Medical Problems in Employment Conti- nuity of Senior Citizens: From the Viewpoint of the Psychiatrist.” New York I Med, 61(17):2901— 2905. September 1961. 494. McLEAN, A. A. Policy Formulation and Psychiatry.” Industr Med Surg, 31 (11) :488— 493, November 1962. 495. MCLEAN, A. A. “The Psy- chiatrist and the Profession of Man- agement,” in Human Problems in Management. Connecticut Mutual Life Insurance Company, Hartford, Conn, 1961. 496. MCLEAN, A. A. “Review of Psychiatric Progress: Occupational Psychiatry.” Amer ] Psychiat, 119(7):633—637, January 1963; 120(7) :654~—657, January 1964. 497. MCLEAN, A. A. AND DEREAMER, R. “The Accident Repeater: Psy- chiatric and Statistical Considera- tions.” Postgrad Med, 29(6): 563—568, June 1961. 498. McLEAN, A. A. AND SROLE, L. “How the Executive Can Examine Himself.” Burn Mgmt, 23:36—38, December 1962. “Personnel 499. MCLEAN, A. A. AND TAYLOR, G. C. Mental Health in Industry. McGraw Hill, New York, 1958. Drs. McLean and Taylor offer a guide for persons at various manage- ment levels who formulate policies and procedures which may affect the men- tal health of employees. This work in- cludes comments on emotional problems in industry from the viewpoint of the social psychiatrist and suggests a specific program to improve present practices. 500. MCLEAN, A. A. AND WOHLKING, W., editors. “The Impact of Psy- chiatry on American Management.” Industr Med Surg, 31(11) :469— 503, November 1962, and reprint series No. 129. New York State School of Industrial and Labor Re- lations Cornell University, Ithaca, N.Y. 501. MCMURRAY, R. N. “Efficiency, Work-Satisfaction and Neurotic Tendency: A Study of Bank Em- ployees.” Personnel ], 11:201— 210, 1932. 502. McMURRAY, R. N. “The Ex- ecutive Neurosis.” Harv Bsns R, 30(6) :33—47, 1952. 503. MCMURRAY, R. N. Handling Personality Adjustment in Industry. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1944. 504. MCMURRAY, R. N. “Manage- ment, Mentalities and Worker Re- actions.” Advanc Mgmt, 7(4): 165—172, 1942. 505. MCMURRAY, R. N. Factors in -Labor Disputes.” sonnel, 12: 153, August 1935. 506. MCMURRAY, R. N. “Mental Hygiene in Industry.” Occupa- tions, 14:417—425, 1936. “Mental Per- 508. MECHANIC, D. 511. MELTZER, H. P. 512. MELTZER, H. P. 507. MCMURRAY, R. N. “Mental Illness in Industry.” Harv Bsns R, 37:79—86, 1959. The author states that grossly malad- justed employees, ranging from eccen- trics to borderline psychotics, may be found in every business, and that direct action, such as outright dismissal, is required, not treatment by well in- tended amateurs. “The Concept of Illness Behavior.” ] Citron Dis, 15:189—194, 1962. This is a review and coordination of earlier publications relating to discrimi- nation between illness, illness behavior, and faulty behavior, with a discussion of this as a concept. 509. MEDICAL RESEARCH COUNCIL. “The Personal Factor in Acci- dents.” Government Publica- tions——War Emergency Reports, London, England, 1942. Reprinted 1945. 510. MEILBURG, A. L. AND YOUNG, R. K. “The Hospitalized Min- ister: A Preliminary Study.” Pas- toral Psychol, 11(103) :3l~35, 1950. A survey of the records of all min- isters seen in the North Carolina Baptist Hospital suggests several factors operat- ing in their mental illnesses, uncertainty about the ministry as a vocation, their concept of evangelism and problems relating to overwork. “Frustration, Expectation and Production in In- dustry.” Amer ] Orthopsychiat, 15:329—342, 1945. “Personality Problems in Managerial Groups.” Industr Med, 15:429—434, 1946. 776—430—65—4 517. MENNINGER, OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 41 513. MELZNER, H. AND MANN, F. C. “Employee Attitudes and Ab- sences.” Personnel Psychol, 6(4): 467—485, 1953. 514. MENNINCER, K. Love Against Hate. Harcourt, New York, 1942. 515. MENNINGER, W. C. “Men Ma- chines, and Mental Health.” M ent Hyg. 36: 184-196, 1952. 516. MENNINCER, W. C. “Prescrip- tion for Executive Mental Health.” Aduanc Mgmt, 25:16—17, Septem- ber 1960. The author recommends regular emo- tional checkups for executives. Con- cerning a prescription for improvement of mental health, it is suggested that the executive spend some time periodically thinking about his life, goals, priorities, ambitions, and aspirations. He also should examine his sense of values. W. C. “What Makes an Effective Man?” in Plan- ning for Worker Security and Stability. Personnel series No. 152. American Management Association, New York, 1953. 518. MENNINGER FOUNDATION. To- ward Understanding Man. The Foundation, Topeka, Kans., 1957. 519. MENNINGER, W. C. AND LEVIN- SON, H. “Human Understanding in Industry: A Guide for Super- visors.” Science Research Associ- ates, Chicago, Ill., 1956. This small volume written for lay consumption, deals with the dynamics of personality and of group interations. It is designed for use as a text in super- Visory training. 520. MENNINGER, W. C. AND LEVIN- SON, H. “The Menninger Foun- dation Survey of Industrial Mental 42 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES Health: Observations and Perspec- tives.” Menninger Q, 8:1—13, 1954. 521. MENNINGER, W. C. AND LEVIN- SON, H. “Psychiatry in Industry: Some Trends and Perspectives.” Perronnel, 32 : 90—99, 1955. 522. MERRY, J. “The Relative Roles of Individual Psychotherapy and Group Psychotherapy in the Indus- trial Neurosis Unit.” ] Alent Sci, 99:301—307, 1953. 523. MEYERS, G. B. “Rehabilitation of the Problem Drinker in Indus- try.” Penn Med ], 58(9):1002, September 1955. The author describes the program and results at his plant, Electric Storage Battery Co. He also reviews similar programs in other industries. 524. MICHIGAN INDUSTRIAL MENTAL HEALTH COUNCIL AND MICHIGAN STATE BOARD OF CONTROL FOR VOCATIONAL EDUCATION. Indus- trial Mental Health Manual, Lansing, Mich., 1942. 525. MILLER, M. F., WATKENs, C., AND DAVIS, C. L. “Some Attitudes Commonly Found in Patients In- jured on the Job.” Industr [Med Surg, 30: 135—137, April 1961. A study of 25 employees injured at work concludes that resentment and dissatisfaction were significant factors. 526. MILLET, J. “Patterns of Com- munity Aid for Vocational Treat- ment.” Bull Amer Rehabilit Comm, 1:2, September 1952. 527. MINDUS, E. “Industrial Psy- chiatry in Great Britain, the United States, and Canada.” A re- port to the World Health Organi- zation, Geneva, Switzerland, 1952. This is an extensive report describing the (then) present state of the art. The author visited plants, universities, institutions, and agencies, and reports what he found in industrial psychiatry and related fields during a. 3-month tour. 528. MINDUS, E. “Outlines of a Concept of Industrial Psychiatry.” Bull World Health Org, 13:561— 574, 1955. 529. MINDUS, E. “Psychiatric Eval- uation as an Aid in Surveying Em- ployees.” International Congress of Occupational Health Proceed- ings, Helsinki, Finland, page 63, 1957. 530. MODLIN, H. C. “The Trauma in Traumatic Neurosis.” Bull Menninger Clin, 24(2), March 1960. This is a clinical analysis of 40 pa- tients at Menninger Clinic with a diagnosis of traumatic neurosis. The article discusses the psychological stress factor in this syndrome frequently seen following accidents. Two cases are cited as examples of the circum- stances which initiate the syndrome. Symptoms are listed as are psychody- namics. 531. MONHEIMER, H. “Personality Appraisal of the Injured.” Industr Med Surg, 21 :206—212, 1952. 532. MOORAD, P. J. “Human F ac- tors in Accident Liability with Spe- cial Reference to Accident Repeat- ers in Industry.” Industr Med, 16:494, October 1947. 533. MOORE, H. “Basic Needs of Industrial Workers.” Personnel ], 27 : 344—348, February 194-9. 534. MOORE, H. 535. MORGAN, L. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 43 “Friction Points in Industry, chapter 3, in Studies in Supervision, Cameron, D. E. and Ross, H. G., editors. McGill Uni- versity Press, Montreal, Canada, 1945. “Mental Illness Among the Clergy: A Survey of State Mental Hospitals in Amer- ica.” Pastoral Psychol, 11(103): 24—30, 1960. The proportion of ministers suffering from mental illness corresponds to the proportion of the population identified with their faith. The cause of their illness is not overwork but personality problems which interfered with the achievement of real success. 536. MORGAN, P. S. “Alcoholism in Industry.” Industr Med Surg, 27: 458—460, September 1958. This is a report of an investigation of the records of a 5,000-man company which discusses its method of handling alcoholism in the company and the re- sults of an intensive program. 537. MORIARTY, J. D. “Post-Trau- matic Neuroses.” Industr Med Surg, 222337—340, 1953. 538. MORIARTY, J. D. “Psychiatric Casualties in Industry.” I ndustr Med Surg, 202538—540, 1951. 539. MUENCH, G. A. “A Clinical Psychologist’s Treatment of Labor- Management Conflict.” Personnel Psychol, 13: 165-172, 1960. This paper describes an attempt by a clinical psychologist to deal with an intense labor-management conflict in a manufacturing company, using as the primary tool a nondirective relationship with individuals and groups to clarify feelings, attitudes, and issues. This ef- fectively resulted in the establishment of 541. MUNDEN, 542. MUNDEN, K. J., LEVINSON, H 544. NATIONAL better communication parties involved. between all 540. MUNDEN, K. J. “Emotional Dis- turbances of the Employee.” Amer Ass Industr Nurse: ], 77(12) :20— 22, December 1963. K. J. “Pre-retire- ment Planning.” Mind Over M at- ter, 7(1) :29—31, March 1962. AND WHITNEY, L. H. “Dilemmas of the Occupational Physician in Mental Health Programming.” ] Occup Med, 2(5):201-210, May 1960. Part 1. (Munden) deals with the problems that nonpsychiatrie phyicians contend with when faced with psy- chiatric issues. Part 2. (Levinson) deals more specifically with the problems and frustrations an industrial physician may face in setting up and operating industrial mental health programs. Part 3. (Whitney) adds that the physician not only has to be therapy- oriented himself, but must be ready and willing to utilize all levels within his organization. 543. MURRAY, J. F. “An Experi- ment in Changing the Attitudes of Employers Toward Mental Illness.” Ment Hyg, 42:402—408, 1958. This paper offers a description of the work done by a rehabilitation planning committee of employers in promoting the employment of former mental patients. An intensive study of patients' problems, of success on the job, of ability to work with others, was followed by a program of public information. ASSOCIATION FOR MENTAL HEALTH. “Manual for Mental Health Seminars for Busi- ness and Industrial Executives.” The Association, New York, 1962. 44 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 545. NATIONAL COMMITTEE FOR MENTAL HYGIENE, INC. “Mental Hygiene and Industry.” Ment Hyg, 28(1) :28—54, January 1944. 546. NATIONAL INDUSTRIAL CONFER- ENCE BOARD. “Industry Considers Mental Health.” Mgmt Record, 21(11) :361—364, November 1959. 547. NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF MEN- TAL HEALTH. “It’s Good Business to Know Your Men.” Public Health Service Publication 379, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 1955. 548. NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF MEN- TAL HEALTH, COMMUNITY SERV- ICES BRANCH. A Review of Men- tal Health in Industry. USPHS, Washington, D.C., October 1957. Prepared by Lucy D. Ozarin, this bibliography gives a history of mental health in industry, a summary of types of programs, a description of specific company programs, and a list of insti- tutions providing training and research in this field. (An extensive annotated bibliography. ) 549. NATIONAL RESEARCH COUNCIL, COMMITTEE ON WORK IN INDUS- TRY. Fatigue of Workers: Its Re- lation to Industrial Production. Reinhold, New York, 1941. 550. NATIONAL SAFETY NEWS. “How Management Can Aid Em- ployee Mental Health.” Nat Safety News, 69: 161, 167—168, June 1954. 551. NEEL, R. G. “Nervous Stress in the Industrial Situation.” Personnel Psyclzol, 8: 405—415, 1955. 552. NIELSON, J. M. “Medical Sci- ence for the Lawyer: The Gener- alized Sub-acute Neuromuscular Exhaustion S y n d r o m e.” Rocky Mountain Law Review, 18 : 279, April 1946. 553. NELSON, C. “I. “Effect of Su- pervisory Leadership Attitudes Upon Accident-Prone Employees.” Amer Psychol, 6(7) 1353, July 1951. Fifty accident-free and 50 accident- prone employees were studied by the Bernreuter and the Guilford-Martin tests. Results were validated by further study of 25 employees in each group. The author feels the accident-prone group could have been predicted and screened out. 554. NEUMAN, G. S. “Report No. 5: Persons with Mental Retardation.” University of the State of New York. The State education department. Division of vocational rehabilitation, Albany, N.Y., February 1963. 555. NEUMAN, G. S. “Report No. 11: Persons with Epilepsy.” University of the State of New York. The State education department. Divi- sion of vocational rehabilitation, Al- bany, N.Y., February 1963. 556. NEWBOLD, E. M. “A Contribu- tion to the Study of the Human Factor in the Causation of Acci- dents.” Government Publications— Medical Research Council, Indus- trial Health Research Board, report No. 34. H. M. Stationery Office, London, England, 1926. 557. NINow, E. H. “Submarine Psy- chiatry.” Arch Environ Health, 6(5): 579—588, May 1963. A psychiatrist, assigned to submarine service, discusses the selection of person- nel in terms of the psychological test and psychiatric interview. 0 n e hundred OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 45 fourteen submariners were referred and a breakdown on their problems is given, along with the most significant stresses during prolonged submergence. The most effective preventive measure is screening. 558. NOE, F. E. “Chronic Mercurial Intoxication: A Review.” Industr .Med Surg, 291559—564, December 1960. This is a review of chronic mercurial intoxication, the psychiatric symptoms and signs being fine intention tremor of hands, irritability, depression, timidity, and exaggerated emotional response. 559. NOEHREN, W. A. “Psychiatry in Hanford.” Amer ] Psychiat, 103: 200—204, 1946. 550. NORBURY, F. G. “Evaluation of Tranquilizers.” I ndustr Med Surg, 262437-439, September 1957. In evaluating tranquilizers for railroad workers, Whitehorn’s dictum that “a moderate amount of anxiety is essential for all of us,” acts as a guide. Knowl- edge of side effects on the part of both patient and doctor is particularly im- portant. 561. NORBURY, F. G. “Neuropsy- chiatric Conditions in Railroad Em- ployees.” Industr Med, 16: 122, March 1947. 562. NORMAN, L. G. “The Health of Bus Drivers: A Study in London Transport.” Lancet, 2:569—570, 1956; 2:807—812, 1958. Bull of Hyg, 34(2):132—133, February 1959. 563. NOVICK, R. G. “Mental Hy- giene and Industrial Health.” Nat Safety N ews, 28—29, December 1947. 564-. OAKLEY, C. A. “The Industrial Misfit.” Hum Factors, 8: 123—130, 1934-. 565. OBERNDORF, C. P. “Psychopa- thology of Work.” Bull Menninger Clin, 15:77—84, 1951. 566. O’BRIEN, C. C. “Alcoholism Among Disciplinary Cases in Indus— try.” Quart ] Stud Alcohol, 19: 268—278, 1949. 567. O’CONNOR, N. AND RAWNSLEY, K. “Incentives with Paranoid and Non-paranoid Schizophrenics in a Workshop.” Brit ] Med Psychol, 32: 133, 1959. A total of 40 schizophrenic patients was studied in a workshop setting to de- termine the influence of individual at- tention, encouragement, special incen- tives, and psychotherapy on work per- Twenty paranoid and 20 non-paranoid schizophrenic males were studied. There was steady continuous improvement in work performance un- affected by the incentives and treatment used. No measurable change in social behavior of any of the four groups was noticed. 568. O’CONNOR, R. B. “The Impact of Emotions on Production and Safety.” Menninger Q, 13(3) :1—6, September 1958. Here is a brief description of “situa- tional problems in industry” and of psy- choses and severe psychoneurosis, illus- trating the direct impact of emotions on production and safety at work. 569. O’CONNELL, D. D. AND LUNDY, R. M. pertensive Cardiac Patients Com- formance. “Level of Aspiration in Hy- pared with Non-hypertensive Cardi- ac Patients with Arteriosclerotic Heart Disease.” ] Consult Psychol, 25(4) :353—359, 1961. 46 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES The hypertensive group arrange for repeated failure by consistently setting ex- cessively high goals. Level of aspiration was based on Minnesota Rate of Manipu- lation Test. 570. ODEGAARD, O. “The Incidence of Psychoses in Various Occupa- tions.” Int ] Soc Psychiat, 2:85— 104, autumn 1956. 571. OLIVERE, P. J. “Decisive Think- ing in the Prevention and Treatment of Emotional Disorders.” I ndustr Med Surg, 32 (4-) :147—149, April 1963. 572. OLSHANSKY, S., GROB, 8., AND MALAMUD, I. T. “Employers’ At- titudes and Practices in the Hiring of Ex-mental Patients.” Ment Hyg, 42:391—401, 1958. Large scale study of the greater Bos- ton labor market, 1956—57, revealed that potential employers approved in theory the hiring of ex-mental patients, but did not do so in actual practice. It is sug- gested that an effort be made to educate industrial physicians, employment agen- cies and trade unions to understand work potential of ex-mental patients. 573. OLSHANSKY, S. AND UNTERBER- GER, H. “The Meaning of Work and its Implications for the Ex- mental Hospital Patient.” Ment Hyg, 1:139—149, January 1963. Adults in our culture are expected to work. The concepts of work of Freud, K. Menninger, and Hendrick are Out- lined. Work today is often devoid of intrinsic meaning, and for the working class the major goal is job security and the avoidance of boredom. Some of the problems which the psychiatric patient encounters when resuming his work role are examined in detail. 574. OLSHANSKY, S., GROE, 5., AND EKDAHL, M. “Survey of Employ- ment Experiences of Patients Dis- charged From Three State Mental Hospitals During Period 1951— 1953.” Ment Hyg, 44: 510—522, 1960. A study of the vocational adjustment of ex-mental hospital patients indicated, from the substantial number employed, that ex-patients may have less difficulty in adjusting to work roles than to social and family roles, and that raises questions concerning the assumption that negative employer attitudes deter employment. 575. OPINION RESEARCH CORP. “Chronic Alcoholism in Industry.” O.R.C., Princeton, N.J., April 1952. 576. OSBORNE, E. E., VERNON, H. M. AND MUSCIO, B. “Two Contribu- tions to the Study Of Accident Causa- tion.” Government Publications— Medical Research Council, Indus- trial Health Research Board. H. lVI. Stationery Office, London, England, 1922. 577. OSNATO, M. “Industrial Neu- roses.” Amer ]. Psychiat, 5(1) :1, July 1925. 578. OVESEY, L. “Fear of Vocational Success.” Arch Gen Psychiat, 7 (2) :82—92, August 1962. Fear of vocational achievement is a common, present-day phobia. The fail- ure in adaptation is an inhibition of ag- gression, which stems from early rivalries. Aggression can result in withdrawal from competition and treatment must be geared to the ego-strength of the patient. Often a lowering of his ambition and the use of tranquilizers can be beneficial. 579. OZARIN, L. D. AND HERRIK, L. M. “An Industrial Psychiatric Program in a Government Setting.” Amer ] Psychiat, 105(12) 2904, June 194-9. This is a description of an employee counseling program utilizing the services OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 47 of a consultant psychiatrist in the central office of the Veterans Administration. 580. PAGE, R. C. AND HAWKINS, E. R. “Finding the Problem Drinker: Case Studies in an Industrial Health Problem.” Quart ] Stud Alcohol, 141586—595, December 1953. 581. PALMERTON, L. R. AND PAULSON, G. S. “Vocational Maladjustment and Chronic Fatigue: Typical Case Histories.” S Dak ] Med Pharm, 12 : 46441-70, November 1959. 582. PARNEY, F. S. “A Practical Ap- proach to Supervision of Mental Health in Industry.” Industr .Med, 9: 72—77, 1940. 583. PEARLIN, L. I. “Alienation from Work: A Study of Nursing Person- nel.” Amer Social R, 27(3) 2314— 326, 1962. Alienation, defined as subjectively ex- perienced powerlessness to control one’s own work activities, is examined among the nursing force of a large mental hos- pital. It is found that alienation is in- tensified where authority relations are such as to limit the reciprocal influence of subordinates. This is reflected in situations where authority is exercised in a peremptory fashion and where authority figures are physically inaccessible. 584. PECK, L. “A Study of the Ad- justment Difficulties of a Group of Women Teachers.” ] Educ Psycho], 27:401—416, 1936. 585. PECK, R. F. AND PARSONS, J. W. “Personality Factors in Work Out- put: Four Studies of Factory W ork- ers.” Personnel Psychol, 9(1) :49— 79, 1956. 586. PEDERSON-KRAG, G. Personality Factors in Work and Employment. Funk & Wagnalls, New York, 1955. 587. PEFFER, P. A. “Money: A Re- habilitation Incentive for Mental Patients.” Amer ] Psychiat, 110: 84, 1953. 588. PERLIS, L. “Labor Looks at Mental Health.” M enninger, Q, 9(3) : 21—26, summer 1955. 589. PERLIS, L. “Labor Viewpoint of Alcoholism in Industry.” Industr Med Surg, 27:535—536, October 1958. A general discussion of the estimated 2 million alcoholics in US. industry who cost 61 billion dollars and 13 million man-hours per year. Labor and man- agement seem best able to meet on a com- munity level. With few exception, they have made no concerted attack on the problem. 590. PERRY, J. Human Relations in Small Industry. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1954. 591. PFEFFER, A. Z., ET AL. “A Treat- ment Program for the Alcoholic in Industry.” ] Amer Med Ass, 161 (9) : 827, June 30, 1956. An extensive account of an alcoholic clinic established at New York Univer- sity-Bellevue Medical Center solely for treatment of alcoholics in industry. Con- solidated Edison underwrote most of the program, but 13 other large companies also use the clinic. 592. PINNER, J. 1. “Job Placement of Ex-mental Patients.” Dis N err; S yst, supplement 4-, 22: 122—124, April 1961. Patients dealt with in this article are those just out of a mental hospital with few, if any, skills, and with behavior pat- terns which would make work difficult. The author focused on “the area of the patients need rather than on the em- ployer’s attitudes in job placement.” 48 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 593. PLAG, J. A. “Some Considera- tions of the Value of the Psychiatric Screening Interview.” ] Clin Psychol, 17(1): 3—8, 1961. A study of 1,813 Navy recruits was made to compare the value of the psychi- atric screening interview with psychologi- cal testing. All were examined by both methods and no signficant differences were found. It is suggested that both techniques should be used to improve the predictions concering the adjustment of Navy personnel. 594. PLUMMER, N. AND HINKLE, L. E. “Medical Signficance of Illness and Absence in an Industrial Popula- tion.” Ann Intern Med, 39: 103, July 1953. 595. POINDEXTER, W. R. “Psychiatry in Industry Tomorrow.” Industr Med, 24: 261—263, June 1955. 596. POINDEXTER, W. R. “Screening Ex-Patients for Employability.” [Went Hoxp, 14(8):444, August 1963. This paper describes an experiment where a small company (B.K. Enter- prises, Berkeley, California) , hired ll un- employed men and women with histories of mental illness. The screening process is described. The type, severity and dur- ation of the illness was not related to job performance. Disappearance of symp- toms accompanied the opportunity to perform for an employer who had confi- dence in his employees and whose success in business depended on their work. 597. POKORNEY, A. D. AND MOORE, F. J. “Neuroses and Compensa- tion.” Arch Induxtr Hyg Occup .Med, 8:547, December 1953. 598. Forum, S. A., ZITMAN, I. H., AND LAWRENCE, C. H. “Exhaustion in the Young Business Executives: Di- agnosis and Treatment.” ] Amer Med Axs, 144(14) :1162—1164, De- cember 2, 1950. 599. PORTERFIELD, A. L. AND GIBBS, J. P. “Occupational Prestige and Social Mobility of Suicides in New Zealand.” Amer ] Social, 66:147— 152, September 1960. 600. POST, F. “A Study of Psychi- atric Illness in Coal Miners.” ] [Went Sci, 92:574, 1946. 601. POWELL, E. H. “Occupation, Status and Suicide: Toward a Re- definition of Anomie.” Amer Soc R, 23:131—139, 1958. This is a theoretical and empirical study of suicide, relating the incidence of suicide to occupational status in two different U.S. communities. 602. PRATT, G. K. “The Problem of the Mental Misfit in Industry.” Men! Hug, 6(3):526—538, July 1922. 603. PROCTOR, R. C. “A Part-Time Psychiatric Program for a Moderate Sized Industry.” Dis Nero Syx, 18 (5) :223, June 1957. A modest part-time psychiatric pro- gram in the Hanes Hosiery Co., N.C., paid economic dividends, according to to this study. 604. PROCTOR, R. C. “Psychiatry in an Industrial Setting.” Arch En- viron Health, 3:63—68, July 1961. This paper discusses the need for psy- chiatry in the industrial setting. It esti- mates that 20 percent of all workers ex- hibit some degree of abnormal mental activity. The author discusses the quali- fications for an industrial psychiatrist, his possible functions and benefits to be derived from application of his skills. 605. PRUETTE, L. AND FRYER, D. “Af- fective Factors in Vocational Mal- OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 49 adjustment.” Ment Hyg, 7:102— 118, 1923. 606. PUCH, D. S., GORDON, C., AND LEVY, K. “Sickness Absence Among Railway Clerical Staff.” Brit]InduxtrMed,16(4): 269—273, October 1959. Sickness experience of railway clerical staffs in Scotland was analyzed for three job grades: Chief clerks, senior clerks, and clerks. Statistics are given for prev- alance, type and frequency of sickness. There is considerable evidence that func- tional illness accounted for a major part of the differences among the groups. 607. RAIFMAN, J. “Level of Aspira- tion in a Group of Peptic Ulcer Pa- tients.” ] Consult Psychol, 21 : 229-— 231, 1957. 608. R A M A D E v I , B. “Adjustment Problems of Married and Unmarried Women Teachers.” ] Psychol Res, 4:65—68, 1960. This study revealed no difference on scores of neuroticism between the mar- ried and unmarried women. However, “the study of age groups reveals that 30—39 years is the most perturbed period for the unmarried group. The adjust- ment problems are distinct. Age seems to have no influence either in neurotic scores or attitude scores to the married group in the sample studies.” 609. R A M s E N , H. E. “Industrial Counseling.” Personnel ], 27:304-— 308, January 1947. 610. RAND, H. P. “Mental Condi- tioning of the Soldier for Nuclear War.” Milit Med, 125:116—119, 1960. The psychological influence on soldiers in circumstances of nuclear rather than conventional warfare is discussed. 611. RAPHAEL, W. “A Study of Some Stresses and Strains Within the \Vorking Group.” Group Psychol, 21:92—101, 1947. 612. REES, L. “An Evaluation of the Role of Emotional Factors in Miner’s Nystagmus.” ] Psychosom Res, 3:291—302, May 1959. This article reports a study of northern Welsh miners with nystagmus by a psy- chiatrist and an opthamologist. Experi- mental evidence explained nystagmus as usage of the rods in diminished illumi- nation, occurring with fears of accidents, blindness, or psychiatric disorder. 613. REID, D. D. Industry: Records and Research in Occupational Medicine.” Royal Society Promot Health ], 77:675—- 680, October 1957. A discussion of the different kinds of records used in occupational medicine and their value in comparison with other data. Card data and electronic devices offer new prospects for mass comparisons in the field of neurotic and psychoso- matic illness. 614. REID, D. D. “Precipitating Proxi- mal Factors in the Occurrence of Mental Disorders: Epidemiological Evidence.” Milbank Mem Fund Q, 39(2) 2229—258, April 1961. This review of English language litera— ture concerns the influence of environ- mental factors in the etiology of mental disorders. Little evidence of relation- ship to psychotic illness could be found, but the incidence of neurosis appears re- lated to such stresses as bombing; of de- pression and suicide to economic crisis and of psychosomatic disease to industrial activity. Long hours and boring tasks may be related to the incidence of neu- rosis among factory workers. 615. REISMAN, M. J. and Convalescence from Mental Ill- Performance: The Story of “Absenteeism in “Employment ness.” 50 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES the Handicapped, 12(4) :9, October 1961. 616. RENNIE, T. A. C. AND BOZEMAN, M. M. Vocational Services for Psy- chiatric Clinic Patients. Common- wealth Fund, New York, 1952. 617. RENNIE, T. A. C., BURLING T., AND WOODWARD, L. E. Vocational Rehabilitation of Psychiatric Pa- tients. Commonwealth Fund, New York, 1950. 618. RENNIE, T. A. C., SWACKHAMER, G., AND WOODWARD, L. E. “To- ward Industrial Mental Health: An Historical Review.” Ment Hyg, 31 (1) :66—88, January 194-7. An historical review is presented with careful documentations of several ap- proaches to industrial mental health pro- grams. 619. RENNIE, T. A. C. AND WOOD- WARD, L. E. Mental Health in Modern Society. Commonwealth Fund, New York, 1948. 620. RENNIE, T. A. C., WOODWARD, L. E., AND BURLING, T. “Vocational Rehabilitation of the Psychiatrically Disabled.” Ment Hyg, 33(2) :200— 208, April 1949. 621. ROBBINS, B. S. “Neurotic Dis- turbances in Work.” Amer ]. Pry- chiat, 2:333—342, 1939. 622. ROBBINS, E., SCIIMITT, E. H., AND O’NEAL, P. “Some Interrela- tions of Social Factors and Clinical Diagnosis in Attempted Suicide.” Amer ] Psychiat, 114:22l—~231, 1957. This study found that many patients mentioned job and work problems as con- tributing to their feelings of despondency. None, however, reported work as their biggest single problem. 623. ROBERTS, J. I. AND Russo, E. A. “The Alcoholic in Industry and His Rehabilitation.” Industr Med S urg, 24(6) :269, June 1955. The rehabilitation program for prob- lem drinkers at the New England Electric System Go. is reported. 624. ROBERTSON, L. T. “The Role of the Psychologist in Industry.” Arch Industr Health, 18: 110—112, August 1958. 625. R000, S. G. “Mental Health and Industrial Change.” Arch En- viron Health, 1:265—270, September 1960. 626. R060, S. G. “The Role of Emo- tions in Industrial Accidents.” Arch Environ Health, 3:519—522, November 1961. 627. R000, S. G. AND PELL, S. “Use of Psychotropic Drugs by Employed Persons.” Industr Med Surg, 32 (7) : 255—260, July 1963. A survey of 3,042 white-collar employ- ees of the DuPont Co. is reported. Em- ployees who used psychotropic drugs are described as representing 25 per cent of the population. Reasons for their use of drugs are given. 628. ROSE, H. K. AND GLATT, M. M. “A Study of Alcoholism as an Occu- pational Hazard of Merchant Sea- men.” ] Ment Sci, 107: 18—30, Jan- uary 1961. This is a study of the drinking habits of British seamen. It is concluded that heavy drinking is common among mer- chant seamen and the risk of alcoholism seems greater than with most other oc- cupations. The authors recommend a program directed at education, prophy- laxis, and early diagnosis. Recovery rate is good with treatment. Therapies rec- ommended were hospitalization, group psychotherapy, Alcoholics Anonymous, and drug therapy. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 51 629. ROSENBAUM, M. “Comments and Suggestions on the Psychiatric Aspects of the Vocational Rehabili- tation Program.” Ohio State Med '1, 42 :379, April 1946. 630. ROSENBAUM, M. AND ROMANO, J. “Psychiatric Casualties Among Defense Workers.” Amer ] Psy- chiat, 100:314, November 1943. 631. ROSENFIELD, M. “Industrial Mental Hygiene Clinics.” Industr Welf Personnel Mgmt, 16—18, Feb- ruary 1935. 632. ROSENMAN, R. H. AND FRIED- MAN, M. “The Possible Relation- ship of Occupational Stress to Clin- ical Coronary Heart Disease.” Calif Med, 892169—174, September 1958. Perhaps because of difliculties inherent in quantitation and personality evalua- tion, the possible influence of differences in personality factors and of socioeco- nomic stresses have been largely ignored in epidemiological studies of coronary heart disease. This relationship is ex- plored and it is shown that the major forces contributing to the development of coronary disease are affected by cer- tain types of such stresses. On the basis of considerable clinical experimental evi- . dence cited, it is suggested that the in- creasing occupational stress unique to in- dustrialized society plays a dominant role in the high incidence of clinical coronary heart disease. 633. Ross, D. M. “The Changing Nature of Industrial Health Prob- lems.” Industr Med Surg, 31:257— 259, June 1962. 634. Ross, H. G. “Human Behavior and its Relation to Industry.” In- dustr Med, 13:310—314, April 1944. 635. Ross, H. G. “The Medical De- partment Contributes to Supervi- sion,” chapter 8. Studies in S aper- vision, Cameron, D. E. and Ross, H. G., editors. McGill University, Montreal, Canada, 1945. 636. Ross, H. G. “Medicine in In- dustry,” chapter 1, in Human Be- havior and its Relation to Industry, Cameron, D. E. and Ross, H. G., editors. McGill University, Mon- treal, Canada, 1944. 637. Ross, H. G. “Psychosomatic Disturbances and their Bearing on the Worker’s Efficiency.” Canad Med Ass ], 62: 141-146, 1950. 638. Ross, W. D. “The Emotional Effects of an Atomic Incident.” Cincinnati] Med, 33:38, 1952. 639. Ross, W. D. Investigations of Methods of Testing for Fatigue in Man. The National Research Council of Canada, report C 762, 1942. 640. Ross, W. D. “Mental and Emo- tional Health Problems in the Work- er.” Arch Environ Health, 7:473— 476, October 1963. 641. Ross, W. D. Practical Psychi- atry for Industrial Physicians. Charles C. Thomas, Springfield, Ill., 1956. 642. Ross, W. D. “Preventive Psy- chiatry for Industrial Workers.” Ohio State Med ], 55: 1654—1657, December 1959. 643. Ross, W. D. Psychiatric Aspects of Efi'ort Syndrome. Report No. C6082 to the Associate Committee on Army Medical Research. Re- search Division, D.G.M.S. and N.D.H.Q., National Research Coun- cil, Ottawa, Canada, May 1944. 52 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 644. Ross, W. D. “Some Practical Prognostic Points in Cases of Effort Syndrome.” ] Canad Med Serv, 2: 128, January 1946. 645. Ross, W. D. AND HUGHES, J. “Industrial Uses of Psychiatry.” Personnel Executives Newsletter, 3: 13, July 1953. 646. Ross, W. D. AND LAUER, J. “Seminars in Industrial Psychiatry.” Industr Med Surg, 20(3): 119—120, March 1951. 647. Ross, W. D. AND MAYFIELD, F. H. “The Patient, the Attendants and the Externals in Traffic Haz- ards.” Amer ] Surg, 98: 577—583, October 1959. 648. Ross, W. D., MILLER, L. H., LEET, H. H., AND PRINcr, F. “Emo- tional Aspects of Respiratory Disor- dcrs Among Coal Miners.” ] Amer Med A55, 156: 484, Oct. 2, 1954. 649. Ross, W. D AND MCNAUGHTON, F. L. “Chronic Post-Traumatic Head Symptoms.” Canad Med Ass [,53: 12,1945. 650. Ross, W. D. AND MCNAUGHTON, F. L. “Head Injury: A Study of Patients with Chronic Post-Trau- matic Complaints.” Arch Neurol Prychiat, 52: 255, October 1944-. 651. Ross, W. D. AND POWLEs, W. E. “Research in Industrial Mental Health.” Cincinnati ] Med, 41: 225—227, 1960. 652. Ross, W. D., Poers, W., ASH- MAN, G., AND AGRANOFF, B. “Some Problems in Research in Industrial Mental Health.” Thirteenth Inter- national Congress of Occupational Health, New York, proceedings, July 1960. This reports the first phase of a re- search project to measure the value of early attention to emotional and social probelms of employees by occupational physicians. 653. RUFF, G. E. AND LEVY, E. Z. “Psychiatric Evaluation of Candi- dates for Space Flight.” Amer ] Psychiat, 116:385—391, November 1959. A description of the selection and test- ing procedures used for candidates for the first U.S. manned satellite experi- ment (Project Mercury) is reported. The techniques included 30 hours of psy- chiatric interviews, psychological tests, and observations under stress situations. 654. RUFF, G. E. AND LEVY, E. Z. “Psychiatric Research in Space Medicine.” Amer ] Psychiat, 115: 793—797, March 1959. Exploratory studies of problems of space flight of interest to psychiatrists are discussed. Implications for the qualifi- cations of crewmembers are suggested. 655. RUSALEM, H. AND DILL, S. “Vo- cational Rehabilitation of the Older Disabled Person.” ] Rehabilit, 27 (6) 119—20, 35, 38, 1961. This describes the Federation Employ- ment and Guidance Service program and is illustrated by two case studies. The authors deal with the feasibility of offer- ing vocational rehabilitation to the older disabled client. They point out the im- portant values to be gained from work- shop evaluation, counseling, training, and placement offered through such a pro- gram. 656. RUSSEK, H. “Emotional Stress and Coronary Heart Disease in American Physicians, Dentists, and Lawyers.” Amer ] .Mcd Sci, 243 (6) :716—726, June 1962. Ten thousand medical, dental, and legal practitioners from the age group 40 to 69 were surveyed by asking them to rate themselves on cardiovascular disease. Judges independently ranked four se- lected specialties in the three professions for “stressfullness.” Prevalence of coro- nary heart disease followed the rank order of “stressfullness” but so many problems of evaluation were present that the ver- dict was not proven. 657. RUSSEK, H. L. AND ZOHMAN, B. L. “Relative Significance of Heredity, Diet and Occupational Stress in Coronary Heart Disease of Young Adults.” Amer ] Med Sci, 235:267—277, 1958. 658. SACHS, B. C. “Psychosomatic Aspects of Accidents.” Industr Med Surg, 31 :525—532, December 1962. The author discusses the different psy- chological factors in accident causation; the accident-prone individual (whom she believes will continue to be such) specific factors in auto accidents and finally, her belief that a theory of accident causation may be evolved with special emphasis on the evaluation of the whole person and this can best be carried out by the physi- cian and nurse in the industrial medical department. 659. SALKIND, 1. “Changing Em- ployers Attitudes Toward the Psy- chologically Handicapped.” ] Re- habilit, 28(3) :26, 1962. The use of a staff of trained public relations specialists oriented in the field of vocational rehabilitation is discussed as the basis for a frontal attack on major employers throughout the country to alter unfavorable attitudes to employment of the emotionally disturbed, the mentally retarded, and the ex-mental hospital patient. 660. SCHALLER, W. F. “Psychoneu- roses in Industry.” ] Occup Med, 2:183—189, 1946. 664. SHUSTER, G. 667. SELLING, L. S. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 53 661. SCHULZINGER, M. S. The Acci- dent Syndrome. Charles C. Thomas, Springfield, 111., 1956. An extensive analysis of 35,000 ac- cidents as reported. The author be- lieves accidents are a disease syndrome that is treatable and refutes the concept of a consistent pattern of accident prone- ncss. (Contains a detailed bibliography.) 662. SCHULZINGER,M. S. “The Inci- dence of Accidents in Relation to the Annual Cycle.” Industr Med Surg, 22:49—55, 1953. 663. SCHULZINGER, M. S. “The Pre- Accident Patient: Diagnosis and Treatment.” Industr Med Surg, 25 (10) 1451, October 1956. This article covers all phases of in- dustrial accidents. The author has work- ed extensively in this field and cites ad- ditional research studies both of his own and of others. “Human Rela- tions in Industry.” Brit Med ] 2:505, 1948. 665. SCHWEISHEIMER, W. “Psychia- try Helps Worker in Industry.” I n- dustr Arts V06 Educ, 36:53—54, 1947. 666. SEGAL, S. J. “A Psychoanalytic Analysis of Personality Factors in Vocational Choice.” ] Counsel Prychol, 8 : 202—210, 1961. Projective techniques were used to test 7 hypotheses from psychoanalytic theory to predict personality differences in 30 subjects who chose accounting or creative writing as a vocation. The hypotheses dealt with general adjustment, social con- formity, emotional control, compulsive defenses, hostility, tolerance for am- biguity, and identification. “A Psychiatrist Looks at Industrial Truancy.” Indurtr Med, 12: 189-201, 1943. 54 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 668. SELLING, L. S. “Psychiatry in In- dustrial Accidents.” I ndustr Med, 13:504—512, 1944. Also in Advanc Mgmt, 10:70—75, 1945. 669. SHEPHARD, W. P. Executive: Health Secrets: How to Lick Ten- sions and Pressures. Bobbs-Mer- rell Co., New York, 1961. 670. SHEPHARD, W. P. The Physician in Industry. McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York, 1961. 671. SHERMAN, E. D., GINGRAS, G., AND LEVINSON, E. D. “The Med- ical Aspects in a Sheltered Work- shop.” Arch Phys Med and Rehab, 44(3):139—146, March 1963. The advantages of close and compre- hensive medical supervision in the shel- tered workshop are emphasized in this report based on data from observations of 35 workshop clients over a period of a year. The majority of patients were diagnosed as having cardiovascular dis- ease, and phychiatric or emotional dis- orders of varying degrees of severity. 672. SHERMAN, M. “A Review of Industrial Psychiatry.” A m e r ] Psychiat, 83: 701—710, 1927. 673. SHIPLEY, J. T. The Mentally Disturbed Teacher. Chilton, Phila- delphia, Pa., 1961. Cases of psychiatrically disturbed teachers and recommendations after psychiatric evaluation are discussed. Problems described range from inability to control the class, irritability and ex- cessive strictness, to delusions, depression, anxiety, alcoholism, and sexual deviation. 674. SILVERMAN, B. “Mental Adjust- ments to Industrial Situations.” Canad Med Ass ], 52:26—31, 1945. “Executive Med 675. SINCLAIR, G. Health: A Family Affair.” Bull, 19:9—15, March 1959. The terms executive and health are defined. Stress is shown as a necessary part of our way of life. Executives are conditioned to react to tensions as part of their job and require a degree of ten- sion to react well. A means of conserv- ing the health of the executives by a health program is described. A review of health examinations on an executive group and a control group showed that neither was peculiarly prone to develop diseases related to stress. 676. SINGER, HENRY A. “The Man- agement of Stress.” Advanc Mgmt, 25(9): 11—13, 1960. This is a brief resume of current psy- chological concepts of stress in industry considering its nature, the industrial climate, accidents, alcoholism, and means of reducing stress. 677. SINHA, D. “Social and Behav— ioral Problems in Industry.” Indian ] Soc Work, 21:235—245, December 1960. 678. SKILBECK, 0. “Some Psycho- logical Problems in the Film Indus- try.” Hum Factors, 11: 174—177, 1937. 679. SKINNER, E. F. Stresses in Industry.” 153: 3744,1944. 680. SMILEY, J. A. “The Causes of Absenteeism.” Med Illustr, 10: 494—496, July 1956. 681. SMITH, E. L. “Personality and Job Satisfaction.” Advanc Mgmt, 23:23—27, August 1958. Studies have shown 20 percent of workers are dissatisfied with their jobs. One source of job dissatisfaction is a maladjustment specific to the job; an- other is that indicative of a generally “Psychological Practitioner, OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 55 maladjusted personality. The symptoms may be the same in either case ; a number of them are listed. A mental hygiene department under the direction of a con- sulting psychologist or psychiatrist is ad- vocated. (There are 26 references.) 682. SMITH, H. L. AND HIGHTOWER, N. C. “Incidence of Functional Dis- ease Among Patients of Various Oc- cupations.” ] Occup Med, 5: 182— 185, February 1948. 683. SMITH, M. “The Tempera- mental Factor in Industry.” Hum Factorx, 10:301—314, 1936. 684. SMITH, R. A. “The Executive Crack-up.” Fortune, May 1955. 685. SOLBY, B. “The Mental Hygiene Of Industry and Reconversion: A Theory of Mental Hygiene in Indus- try.” Ment Hyg, 29: 353—371, 1945. 686. SOLEM, A. R. “A Study of Re- actions tO Retirement.” Personnel Admin, 26(3) 28-16, May—June 1963. Twenty-three employees of a large Eastern manufacturing company were interviewed on their reactions to their coming retirement. They were again interviewed after retirement and the fol- lowing conclusions drawn: (1) Due to difference in psychological age, industry should be more selective in retiring peo- ple; (2) since 40 percent had pie and post~retirement problems, industry might consider a program designed to prevent fears relating to this; (3) for those not able to function well after retirement, a reduction in the fear of the unknown is a realistic goal. 687. SOLLEY, C. M. AND MUNDEN, K. J. “Behavior of the Mentally Healthy.” Bull Menninger Clin, 26: 178—188, 1962. Five traits were considered to be char- acteristic of the healthy person: (1) Treats others as individuals, (2) is flexi- ble under internal or external stress, (3) obtains pleasures from many sources, (4) accepts self-limitations, (5) employs his capabilities to fulfill personal needs in doing productive tasks. 688. SOLOFF, A. “The Work Therapy Research Center.” ] jewish Com- munal Service, 38: 171—177, 1961. This article discusses a rehabilitation workshop as a research tool in exploring such problems as the patient’s willingness to participate in work adjustment pro- gram, the establishment of criteria of success in community living, and in com- petitive employment, and in the nature and degree of change brought about as a result of the program. 689. SOLOMON, A. P. “Psychiatric Problems in Rehabilitation.” ] Amer Med Ass, 121(11) :865, March 13, 1943. 690. SOLOMON, D. N. “Professional Persons in Bureaucratic Organiza- tions,” in Symposium on Preventive and Social Psychiatry. Govern- ment Printing Office, Washington, D.C., April 1957. 691. SOLOMON, J. C. “Neuroses of School Teachers: A Colloquy.” Ment Hyg, 44:79—90, 1960. A discussion is presented by a psychi- atrist and two psychologists of the teach- er’s classroom problems which result from her dual role of teacher and substitute parent. Unrealistic demands for her services by school boards, the commu- nity, and parents increase anxiety and are reflected in her attitude toward the pupils. 692. SOUTHARD, E. E. “The Move- ment for a Mental Hygiene Of In- dustry.” Ment Hyg, 4:43—64, Jan- uary 1920. 56 693. SOUTHARD, E. E. “The Modern Specialist in Unrest: A Place for the Psychiatrist in Industry.” .Ment Hyg, 4 : 550, August 1920. From an historical viewpoint this is one of the first comments on industry by a psychiatrist. “Industrial medicine exists, industrial psychiatry ought to exist. It is important for the modern psychiatrist not to hide his light under a bushel; he must step forth to new com- munity duties. It seems to me that as psychiatrists we should be able to help this movement wherever it becomes prac- tically possible. The practical possibili- ties of helping lie in connection with the fact that the majority of our male pa- tients have come out of industry in some capacity. Some investigations of the in- dividual patients with respect to their in- dustrial status and future should be made. I think that we will have a place in the routine of industrial management not as permanent staff member (except in very large firms and business systems) but as consultants. The function of this occasional consultant would be preventa- tive rather than curative of the general conditions of unrest.” Dr. Southard was professor of neuropathology at Harvard University. 694. SOUTHARD, S. “The Mental Health of Ministers.” Pastoral Psy- chol, 11(103) :36—40, 1960. Both research and professional opin- ion suggest that, “There is no reason for believing mental breakdown among min- isters is any greater than that among the other professions. There is some indi- cation that it is considerably less.” 695. SPEROFF, B. J. “Group Psycho- therapy in Industry: A Case of In; tragroup Conflict.” Group Psych- other, 10:3—9, 1957. A report of the use of sociodrama and psychodrama in an industrial setting, Group members learned the “how” of other’s action and not so much the ”why.” OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 696. SPEROFF, B. J. “Group Psycho- therapy and Role Playing in Labor Relations: A Case Study.” Group Psyelzot/zer, 13:87—93, 1960. This is a report of a 6-month train- ing program in a large steel mill. Ten labor relations supervisors participated in a series of after-work meetings to criti- cally examine their skills in handling union grievances. Group therapy and role playing helped them to understand themselves and empathize more effec- tively with the workers, with the result that grievances were reduced in number and the rate of disposition doubled. 697. SROLE, L. AND MCLEAN, A. A. “How to Manage the Psychologi- cally Disturbed Employee.” Bsns Algmt, 23:34—39, 56—58, November 1962. 698. STAGNER, R. “The Gullibility of Personnel Managers.” Personnel Psyc/zol, 2(3) :347—352, 1958. 699. STAGNER, R. “The Psychologist’s Function in Union-Management Relations.” Personnel Admin, 26 (1) :24—29, 26(1) :24—29, January— February 1963. Because a psychologist is trained to deal with the irrational aspects of human behavior he gives executives and super— visors insights into the dynamics of indi‘ viduals and groups. Potential uses also include involvement in: (1) Contract negotiation, (2) grievance handling, (3) policy handling as well as the improve- ment of communications between union and management and how management should picture itself to the union. 700. STAHL, O. G. “The Horizons of Personnel Administration.” Bull World Fed Ment Health, 4:157— 158, 1952 701. STEINER, M. E. “Industrial Em- ployees Counseling,” chapter 3, in CCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 57 Survey of Clinical Practice of Psy- chology, Rubenstein, E., and Lorr, M., editors. International Univer- sities Press, New York, 1954. A brief description is presented of psy- chiatric and psychologic programs at Metropolitan and Prudential Life Insur- ance Companies, DuPont, Caterpillar Macy’s, and Western Electric. Detailed account of author’s program in a Gen- eral Electric plant concludes the chapter. 702. STEINER, M. E. The Psycholo- gist In Industry. Charles C. Thom- as, Springfield, Ill., 1950. 703. STELLNER, H. A. “Occupational Adjustment of Psychoneurotic Vet- erans.” ] Indiana Med Ass, 40:525 527, 1947. 704. STENGEL, E. AND COCK, N. G. “Contrasting Suicide Rates in Indus- trial Communities.” ] Ment Sci, 107: 1011, 1961. Suicide rates of three industrial com- munities are examined and found to be related to differences in the age composi- tion of the population, social disorganiza< tion and social mobility. 705. STERN, E. S. “The Psychiatric Aspect of Miners’ Nystagmus I.” Brit] Opth, 222209, April 1948. 706. STERN, E. S. “The Psychiatric Aspect of Miners’ Nystagmus II.” Brit] Opth, 242385, June 1950. 707. STEVENS, H. \V. “The Psychic Aspect of Industrial Disability.” Bull Massachusetts Dept Ment Dis, 7(1) :1—8, January 1923. 708. STEVENSON, I AND FISHER, T. M. “Techniques in the Vocational Re- habilitation of Chronically Unem- ployed Psychiatric Patients.” Amer ] Psychiat, 111:289, October 1954. TTU—4f50——65—w5 709. STEWART, D. “Psychiatry as Ap- plied to Occupational Health.” Lancet, 1:737—740, May 1948. 710. STREET, R. F. “The Selection and Training of Leaders as a F actor in Industrial Mental Health.” Alent Hrs, 28:41—48, 1944. 711. STRONG, E. B. “Individual Ad- justment in Industrial Society: The Experience of the Navy Employee Counseling Service.” Amer Social R, 14:335—346, 1949. 712. SUPER, D. E. AND CRITES, J. O. Appraising Vocational Fitness. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1962. This comprehensive evaluation of psychological vocational tests describes the mechanics of 150 tests designed to give information in over 100 vocational areas. Introductory chapters discuss purposes, data requirements, data-gather- ing methods, appraisal preferences, evalu- ation, and pitfalls of testing in vocational guidance. Vocational selection may utilize the same tests as in guidance but the purpose here is placement and promo- tion. Test construction, standardization, validation, administration, and scoring are discussed in detail. 713. SUTHERLAND, R. L. “Mental Health in Industrial Relations.” The Hogg Foundation, University of Texas, Austin, Tex., 1961. 714. SUTHERLAND, R. L. “Mental Health in Industrial Relations.” [Went Hyg, 34: 192—195, 1950. 715. TALLMAN, F. “Absenteeism and Doctor: Place of Psychiatry in Re- ducing Absenteeism.” Ohio Med], 40:419—424, May 1944. 716. TALLMAN, F. “Mental and Psy- chological Problems Relative to In- dustrial Employment.” ] Michigan Med Soc, 42:710—715, 1943. 58 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 717. TALLMAN, F. “Organization of Industrial Mental Health,” in Hu- man Behavior and Its Relation to Industry, Cameron, D. E. and Ross, H. G., editors. McGill University, Montreal, Canada, 1944. 718. TALLMAN, F. “Psychosis as a Side Door Out of Industry.” I n- dustr Med Surg, 20(5):212—214, May 1951. 719. TANNENBAUM, A. S. “Control in Organizations: Individual Ad- justment and Organizational Per- formance.” Admin Sci Q, 7(2): 236—257, 1962. This is a review of research concerning control and the effect of control upon the individual who exercises it or is influ- enced by it. Adjustments required and how they affect the performance of an organization are discussed. 720. TANNER, H., editor. “Industry and the Emotionally Disturbed.” Proceedings of a one-day Confer- ence, June 5, 1962, at the North- hampton Veterans Administration Hospital. The Hospital, North- hampton, Mass, 1962. This mimeographed pamphlet out- lines a conference of personnel and em- ployment managers sponsored by the counseling psychology department of the hospital. The purpose of the symposium was to “improve communications between persons in the community who deal with prevention and treatment of the emo- tionally disturbed.” Frame of reference data was provided the conference at- tendees from the point of view of coun- seling psychology, social work, and psy- chiatry against which specific approaches were discussed to the problem of the seri— ous psychiatrieally disturbed employee in industry. 721. TAZARD, J. “The Effects of Dif- ferent Types of Supervision on the Behavior of Mental Defectives in a Sheltered Workshop.” Amer ] Ment Defic, 58(1):14-3—161, July 1953. 722. TAZARD, J., LITT, B‘.., AND O’CON- NER, N. “The Employability of High Grade Mental Defectives.” Amer ] Ment Defic, 542563—576, April 1950. 723. TAZARD, J., LITT, B., AND O’CON- NER, N. “The Employability of High Grade Mental Defectives.” Amer ]. Ment Defic, 55(1):144— 157, July 1950. 724. TERHUNE, W. B. “Brief Psy- chotherapy With Executives in In- dustry: The Emotional Check-Up.” Progress 5: 132—139, 1960. This article concerns the executive who may have emotional problems re- lated to his work. He is described as having a low happiness index, prone to alcoholism, depression, and mental dis- cord. Physically “below par” as a result of insufficient regular exercise, not enough sleep, unwise eating habits, and excessive smoking and drinking. The author describes the executive-type per- sonality, overmobilized, ambitious, driv- ing, dynamic, and overbearing, which is frequently noted at home as well as at work and may manifest itself by impo- tency and marital inadequacy. To meet some of the needs of executives some companies have used the service of psy- chiatrists and provide for “an emotional checkup.” 725. TERHUNE, W. B. “Emotional Problems of Executives: The Pre- lude.” Indurtr Med Surg, 32(5) 167—169, May 1963. Based upon opinion solicited from the medical departments of a few corpora- tions, the author discusses the emotional problems of executives. The most com- Frye/lather, OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 59 mon type of emotional disturbances (in- terpersonal relationships) are thought to be caused by stress, age, competition, marital difficulties, alcoholism, and one’s standing in company. Two approaches to the problem are possible: direct and indirect, and the latter is favored. The article also describes some aspects of the Silver Hill Foundation program. 726. TERHUNE, W. B. “Mental Hy- giene in Industry.” Silver Hill Foundation Publication No. 4, New Canaan, Conn. 727. THIIS—EVENSON, E. “Shift Work and Health.” Industr Med Surg, 27:493—497, October 1958. 728. THOMPSON, G. N. “Alcoholism in Industry.” Industr Med Surg, 20:273—276, 1951. 729. THOMPSON, G. N. “War-En- gendered Psychiatric Problems in In- dustrial Medicine.” Indmtr Med, 13:686—689, 1944. 730. THORPE, J. J. “Attendance Mo- tivations.” Industr .Med Surg, 24: 450—452, 1955. 731. THORPE, J. J. AND PERRET, J. T. “Problem Drinking: A Follow- up Study.” Arch Industr Health, 19:24—32, January 1959. Two hundred seventy-eight problem drinkers known to the Medical Depart- ment of the E350 Standard Oil Co. during the period 1949 to 1956 were reviewed. Correlation of type of treatment with end result revealed that medical, psy- chiatric measures, Alcoholics Anonymous, or a combination of any of these resulted in improvement in from 60 to 65 percent of cases. Alcoholics Anonymous was three times as successful as medical or psychiatric therapy. Continued improve- ment in the management of problem drinkers will require coordinated action by management, employee relations, and medical department staff groups. 732. TILLMANN, W. A. AND HOBBS, G. E. “The Accident-Prone Automo- bile Driver: A Study of the Psychi- atric and Social Background.” Amer ] Psychiat, 106:321—331, No— vember 1949. 733. TREDGOLD, R. F. Human Rela- tions in Alodem Industry. Butter- worth, England, 1945. International University Press, New York, 1947, 1950. 734. TREDGOLD, R. F. “Industrial Psychiatry in Yugoslavia.” World Alent Health, 11:79—85, 1959. The author’s impressions of the cur- rent picture of industrial psychiatric practice in Yugoslavia is increasing neu- rosis, low industrial morale, and a high rate of industrial accidents and alco- holism. 735. TREI)GOLD, R. F. “IMental Health in Industry.” Bull World Fed Ment Health, 2(5) 25—9, 1950. 736. TREDGOLI), R. F. “Mental Hy- giene in Industry,” in .Modern Trends in Psychological Medicine, Harris, H. G., editor. Butterworth, London, England, 1948. 737. TREDGOLI), R. F. “Morale and Mental Health in Modern Society.” Ment Health, 9:58~62, 1950. 738. TREDGOLD, R. F. “Psychiatric Clinics Within Industry.” Trans Ass Industr 3/ch Oflicers, 3:1, 1953. 739. TREI)GOLD, R. F. “The Psychia- trist in Industry,” Bull World Fed Alent Health, 2(3) :3—7, 1950. 740. TRICE, H. M. Alcoholism in In- dustry. Christopher D. Smithers Foundation, New York, 1963. London, 60 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 741. TRICE, H. M. “Identifying the Problem Drinker on the Job.” Am Assn Ind Nurses ], 5:38—41, July 1957. A questionnaire involving 200 alco- holics revealed the following indications of problem drinking: (1) Absenteeism, (2) unlikely excuses for absence, (3) drinking behavior, (4) rejection of asso- ciates, (5) physical indications such as flushed face and tremor, (6) spasmodic work pace, (7) altered personality traits. 742. TRIST, E. L. AND BAMFORTH, V. “Some Social and Psychological Consequences of the Long-Wall Method of Coal Getting.” Human Rel, 4:3—38, 1951. 743. TURFBOER, R. Management’s Problem?” Mgmt, 25(9) :14—15, 1960. Alcoholism is management’s problem. It costs industry more than $1 billion a year. The needs of an alcoholic are sum- marized and a plan proposed for indus- trial centers for psychotherapy. 744. TURFBOER, R. “The Effects of In-Plant Rehabilitation of Alco- holics.” Med Bull, 19:108—128, March 1959. The historic development of the clinic is presented, followed by a detailed phe- nomenological description of the “aver- age“ client. The principles and methods used by the clinic are given and the re- sults are discussed. It is felt that this analysis may be of interest to others who are concerned with the rehabilitation of the alcoholic employee, and the problem of convincing management that an al- coholic rehabilitation service is useful in industry. 745. TYHURST, J. S. “Psychological and Social Aspects of Civilian Dis- aster.” Canad Med Ass ], 76:385, 1957. “Alcoholism: Adv 746. TYHURST, J. S. “Retirement,” in “The Neurologic and Psychiatric Aspects of the Disorders of Aging.” Nerv Ment Dis, 30:237—242, 1956. 747. UDEL, M. M. “Emotional Dis- orders: A Problem in Occupational Medicine.” ] Chron Dis, 9:170— 176, February 1959. 748. UDEL, M. M. “The Work Per- formance of Epileptics in Industry.” Arch Environ Health, 1:257—264, September 1960. 749. USDIN, G. L., ALEXANDER, F., BROSIN, H., MODLIN, H., Ross, W. D. AND WATSON, A. “Neurosis as Trauma.” Round table meeting. American Psychiatric Association proceedings, Washington, D.C., May 1960. 750. US. PRESIDENT’S COMMITTEE ON EMPLOYMENT OF THE HANDICAPPED. “Guide to Job Placement of the Mentally Retarded.” Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 1963. This pamphlet outlines the types of routine, repetitious jobs which mentally retarded persons can perform often more successfully than average workers. The steps for employers to take in hiring such people are outlined. 751. VALDIRIA, 0. AND CARAVEDO, B. “A Study on Mental Health on a Cross Section of Industrial Popula- tion.” Int ] Soc Psychiat, 7(4): 269-282, Autumn 1961. 752. VERNON, H. M., WYATT, 5., AND OGDEN, A. D. “On the Extent and Effects of Variety in Repetitive Work.” Government Publica- tions—Medical Research Council, Industrial Health Research Board. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 61 H. M. Stationery Office, London, England, 1924. 753. VITELES, M. S. Method in Industry.” chol, 1:753—758, 1926. “The Clinical I nduslr Psy- 754. VITELES, M. S. “Psychology and Psychiatry in Industry.” Ment H yg, 13:361—377, 1929. 755. VONACHEN, H. A. “Utilizing the Physically and Emotionally Un- stable Worker.” Industrial Hygiene Conference, Mellon Institute, Pitts- burgh, Pa., November 1945. 756. VONACHEN, H. A., MASON, J., AND KRONENBERG, M. “Study of Five Years of Employee Counseling in an Industrial Medical Program.” Arch Industr Hyg Occup Med, 10 (2): 91, August 1954. Reported here is a statistical analysis of the case records of the counseling pro- gram at Caterpillar Tractor Co. 757. VONACHEN, H. A., MITTLEMAN, 13., KRONENBERG, M. H., W EIDER, A., AND WOLFF, H. G. “A Compre- hensive Mental Hygiene Program at Caterpillar Tractor Company.” Industr Med, 152179—184, March 1946. 758. WAGGONER, R. W. “The Early Recognition of Behavioral Disturb- ances.” Indurtr Med Surg, 29 : 465— 469, October 1960. The author comments that the goal of industrial medicine is to assist in having a healthy worker on the job, and feels that psychiatry and psychology have a part to play in this if properly used and under- stood. He derives his thoughts from ex. pcriences in the military services. 759. WALDMAN, M. AND REISER, M. “Group Psychotherapy and Per- sonality Factors in a Work Adjust- ment Process.” ] jewish Com- munal Service, 38: 167—170, 1961. A discussion of the psychoanalytic as- pects of work adjustments of the emo- tionally disabled as viewed in a program designed to provide vocational rehabilita- tion for such individuals. Particular attention is given the use of group psychotherapy as used in the Jewish Employment Vocational Service program in Philadelphia. 760. WALL, L. R. “A Study of Em- ployer Problems.” Personnel Prac Bull, 15 (4) :33—37, 1959. Mr. Wall reports a study of personal problems of 28,000 employees in 30 dif- ferent companies. Over half the prob- lems originated on the job, such as pay hours, relations with others, and advance- ment. 761. WALLEN, R. “Improving Super- vision by Reducing Anxiety.” Per- sonnel], 3019—13, 1951. 762. WALLMAN, L. “Psychoneurosis in Industry.” Med ] Amt, 1:228— 232, 1950. 763. WALTERS, J. A. “The Clinical Study of Neurotic Disorders in the Plant.” Canad ] Pub Health, 38: 118—123, 1947. 764. WARNER, S. L. “Spotting the Neurotic and Helping the Mal- adjusted.” Personnel 1, 36:136— 139, 1957. This article stresses the importance of matching the job to the person. The mentally ill may turn out reliable and accurate work. Routine work is best for those showing senile indications. 765. WARREN, J. E. “Myocardial In- farction in an Industrial Popula- tion.” Arch Environ Health, 7(2) : 210—216, August 1963. 62 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES The Medical Department of Consoli- dated Edison Co. evaluated factors in myocardial infarction amongst 156 male employees who returned to full-time duty with physical restrictions. A study of absenteeism reveals a disproportionate increase in those cardiacs with psycho- genic difficulties, anxiety, or ulterior eco- nomic motivations regarding retirement. Those returning to work earlier revealed a better general attendance record and the author felt this underscored the im- portance of personal motivation in the ultimate rehabilitation of the cardiac handicapped. Executive or nonexecutive job status did not appear related to myo- cardial infarction incidence and there- fore stress, defined this way, did not appear to be a factor. 766. WARSHAW, L. J., editor. “Hu- man Factors and the Work Environ- ment.” ] Occup Med, 3:288—301, June 1961. Part 1 suggests occupational medicine must consider not only the physical func- tions of health, but the mental and emo- tional aspects as well. (Warshaw.) Part 2 discusses the impact of isolation upon personnel. (Weybrew, B. B.) Part 3 discusses the hazards of working with radioactive material and their op- erational, emotional and legal aspects. (Harris, W. B.) In part 4, the office en- vironment, its planning and the effects it has upon personnel is outlined. (Gad, R. K., J r.) 767. WASATIR, A. V. “Mental Health In Industry: In an Ailing World.” Industr Med, 9:585—588, 1940. 768. WATERS, T. C. “Mental Illness: Is It Compensable.” Arch Environ Health, 5: 178, August 1962. In the Carter v. General Motors case, the Supreme Court of Michigan sustained an order awarding compensation to a claimant for psychotic illness resulting from emotional pressure encountered dur- ing his daily work as a machine operator. This case differs from other precedents in Michigan because there was no evi- dence that the claimant’s disability was caused by a single physical or a single mental shock. The court held that Car- ter’s disability was caused by emotional pressures resulting from the accumulated effect of his concern about the instruc- tions and criticisms that he received from his foreman. In substance, this ruling was to the eflect that it is not necessary to attribute the condition of the plaintiff to a single injury but that the series of events, the pressure of his job, and the pressures from his foreman caused an in- jury of disability under the law. 769. WEBSTER, H. G. “Absenteeism,” in Human Behavior and Its Relation to Industry, Cameron, D. E. and Ross, H. G., editors. McGill Mono- gram Serics No. 3, 141—155, 1944. 770. WEBSTER, H. G. “Contributlons of Community Organizations to In- dustrial Mental Health.” Ment Hyg, 28:49—54, 1944. 771. WEIDER, A. “Mental Hygiene in Industry: A Clinical Psychologist’s Contribution.” ] Clin Psychol, 31308—320, October 1947. 772. WEIDER, A. AND MITTELMANN, B. “Personality and Psychosomatic Dis- turbances Among Industrial Per- sonnel.” Amer ] Orthopsychiat, 16:631—639, 1946. 773. WEIL, E. “Work Block: The Role of Work in Mental Health,” Part 1. Psychoanal Psychol R, 46 (1) :41—64, 1959. A discussion of the infantile nature of “work block,” which may function as de- fense against, or punishment for ego dys- tonic impulses or impulses forbidden by the supercgo. Undertaking of uncon- scious drives may come from study of work habits. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES Lu 774. WEIL, E. “Work Block: The Role of Work in Mental Health,” part 2. Psychoanal Psychol R, 46 (2)199—125, 1959. Inability to work, one of the most serious psychic disorders, has many and varied causes, such as a disturbance in the power to achieve a mature love relation- ship, fixations on infantile stages of de- velopment and modes of relating, and persistence of early self-images of help- lessness and insecurity. 775. WEIL, P. G. AND LEBLANC, A. G. “The Assessment and Rehabilitation of the Psychologically Handi- capped.” Med Serv ], 162765, Oc- tober 1940. This paper discusses the psychological aspects of rehabilitation and a suggested plan for techniques of rehabilitation. 776. WHITAKER, C. A. “Compensa- tion for Psychiatric Disability in In- dustry” Occup Med, 51391—395, April 1948. 777. WHITNEY, E. D. AND LANDAU, D. “Consultation and Guidance Service on Alcoholism for Business and In- dustry in Boston.” Quart ] Stud Alcohol, 14:353, June 1953. 778. WHITNEY, L. H. “Emotional First Aid Station in Industry.” I n- dustr Med, 15:336—338, May 1946. 779. WIESEL, C. AND ARNY, M. “Psy- chiatric Study of Coal Miners in Eastern Kentucky Area.” Amer ] Psychiat, 108:617—624, 1952. 780. WILKINS, G. F. “Industry’s Stake in Rehabilitation of Problem Drinkers.” Industr Med Surg, 22 (1) :29, January 1953. 781. WILKINS, W. L. “The Identi- fication of Character and Behavior Disorder in the Military Life.” U.S. Department of the Navy, Bureau of Medicine and Surgery, Washington, D.C., 1961. The Armed Forces ofl'er a good op- portunity for a scientific study of the psy- chopathic personality. It is clear that a “tight” diagnosis is improbable and even terms like “character” and “be- havior” disorder are inadequate, but the behavior is recognizable. Other recent studies are discussed. (58 item bibli- ography.) 782. WILLIAMS, J. L. Accidents and Ill Health at Work. Staples Press, London, England, 1960. 783. WILSON, A. T. M. “The Man- ager and His World.” I ndustr Mgmt R, 3(1),1961. This is a discussion of the industrial firm as an institution with particular ref- erence to the role and requirements of higher level managers. There is a con- tinous high level Of uncertainty with in- evitable involvement of complex value decisions which have a direct bearing on the personality requirements for top level management. 784. WILSON, A. T. M. Prospects in Psychiatric Research. Oxford Uni- versity Press, London, England, 1953. 785. WILSON, A. T. M. “Some As- pects of Social Process.” ] Soc I:- sues, 5 : 5—23, 1951. 786. WILSON, V. W. “The Import- tance of Selection and Allied Pro- cedures,” chapter 5, in Mental Health and Human Relations in In- dustry, Ling, T.M., editor. Hoeber, New York, 1955. 787. WILSON, V. W. “The Individ- ual and the Group in Industry,” chapter 2, in Mental Health and Human Relations in Industry, Ling, 64 T. M., editor. Hoeber, New York, 1955. 788. WINICK, W., WALSH, F. X., AND FROST, E. S. “Industrial Rehabili- tation of the Mentally Ill.” Indurlr Med Surg, 32(8) :332—336, August 1963. The authors describe the rehabilitation program at the Veterans Administration Hospital in Brockton, Mass., in terms of work with mental illness and monetary incentive. The authors describe ob- stacles of administration to be dealt with before subcontracts were obtained and put on a working basis, to the present level of affiliation with 17 subcontracting companies and a weekly payroll of over $500. Questions of legality of opera- tion, income tax, contact with other Fed- eral and State departments, problems of payment to patients, labor union atti- tudes, selection of patients for project, OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES The results suggested significantly favor— able attitudes on their part. 791. WONG, W. A. AND HOBBS, G. E. “Personal Factors in Industrial Acci- dents: A Study of Accident Prone- ness in an Industrial Group.” In- dustr Med, 18(7): 291, July 194-9. A classic study of high and low acci- dent groups in a small factory bore out previous findings that most accidents are caused by a small number of employees. The accident tendency is a stable char- acteristic while other personal charac- teristics are also noted as accompanying manifestations (aggressiveness and intol- erance to discipline). 792. WOODWARD, L. E. AND RENNIE, T. A. C. jobs and the Man. Charles C. Thomas, Springfield, 111., 194-5. and many other questions are answered. 789. WINICK, W. AND SHERMAN, L. J. “A Program for Employees.” M em: Horp,14(5) : 267—270, May 1963. 793. WOODWARD, W. “Everybody Has Emotions.” Bsns Week, 1077: 50—54, April 22, 1951. 794. WORLD HEALTH ORGANIZATION. This brief article describes a program sponsored by the Veterans Administra- tion Hospital at Brockton, Mass, as part of Mental Health Week. A film “A Pos- itive Approach to Psychiatric Patients,” was shown to groups of hospital em- ployees. Panel discussions were also held. Nine hundred employees took part. A peripheral benefit was consider- able frank expression of feeling and opinion concerning a variety of hospital problems. 790. WOLFE, H. E. “The Attitude of Small Industrial Employers Toward Hiring of Former State Mental Hos- pital Patients.” ] Clin Psychol, 17 (1) : 90—92, 1961. In this followup study of 934 manu- facturing firms employing 1—99 persons, employers were interviewed concerning their attitudes towards the hiring of former State mental hospital patients. Mental Health Problems of Automa- tion Study Group. “Mental Health Problems of Automation.” WHO Technical Report Series 183, 1959. Columbia University Press, Interna- tional Document Series, 2960 Broad- way, New York, NY. This report recommends appropriate orientation and pilot studies so that efforts to mitigate the disadvantages of automa- tion (tensions affecting the worker be- cause of work changes) may be based on information and education. Worker’s living conditions should be improved with respect to housing, leisure, and recrea- tion. 795. WORTIS, S. B. “The Psychologi- cal Aspects of Emotional Problems of Executives: Treatment of Psycho- logical Factors of Emotional Prob- lems.” Industr Med Surg, 32(5): 180—181, May1963. The job of the physician dealing with an executive’s emotional problems is to get him to modify his own behavior, modify environmental stresses, modify his reaction to the behavior of others, or a combination of all of these. The author presents a brief outline of psychotherapy but stresses that forms of psychotherapy should not be engaged in by the industrial physician. 796. WRIGHT, B. A. Physical Dis- ability: A Psychological Approach. Harper Brothers, New York, 1960. 797. WYATT, S. “A Study of Certified Sickness Absence Among Women in Industry.” Government Publica- tions—Medical Research Council, Industrial Health Research Board. H. M. Stationery Oflice, Report No. 86, London, England, 1945. 798. WYATT, S. AND FRASER, J. A. “Studies in Repetitive Work: With Special Reference to Rest Pauses.” Government Publications—Medical Research Council, Industrial Health Research Board. H. M. Stationery Office, Report No. 32, London, Eng- land, 1925. 799. WYATT, S., FRASER, J. A., AND STOCK, F. G. L. “The Effects of Monotony in Work: A Preliminary 801. ZAIDENs, S. H. 802. ZAIDENS, S. H. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: SPECIFIC ENTRIES 65 Inquiry.” Government Publica- tions—Medical Research Council, Industrial Health Research Board. H. M. Stationery Office, Report No. 56, London, England, 1929. 800. YOUNG, A. D. “Psychoneurosis and Industrial Compensation.” Southern filed ], 19(4):266-267, April 1926. “Neuroderma- toses in Industry: A Psychosomatic Approach” Induxtr Med Surg, 32 (4) :127—130, April 1963. The author indicates that neuroderma— toses occur in those who are either un- duly submissive, with resulting sullen resentment, or those who are unusually ambitious but who dare not express it for fear of recriminations. In both situ- ations, repressed frustration and impotent rage are produced. The skin lesions rep- resent the acting out of the repressed frustration and impotent rage that pa— tients fear to express consciously. “Psychiatric Treatment of the Neurodermatoses.” Industr Med Surg, 32(7) :261—265, July 1963. 803. ZAIL, E. J., MILLER, J., AND WASHAK, E., “Starting an Alcohol- ism Program in Industry: A Panel Discussxon. ] Occup Med, 5 (5) :238—242, May 1963. Occupational Mental Health: Non-Specific Entries 1. AANONSEN, A. “Medical Problems of Shift-Work.” Industr Med Surg, 282422—427, September 1959. 2. ABRAMS, H. K. “Motivating Em- ployees for Industrial Health.” Arch Industr Hyg Occup Med, 8: 246—249, September 1954. 3. ACKERMAN, N. W. The Psychody- namies of Family Life. Basic Books, New York, 1958. 4. ADIE, D. C. “Toward the Redis- covery of the Individual in Indus- try.” Family, 8:295—300, 1927. 5. ADORNO, T. W., FRENKEL-BRI:NS- WIK, E., LEVINSON, D. J., AND SAN- FORD, R. N. The Authoritarian Personality. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1950. 6. ALBRECHT, R. E., editor. Aging in a Changing Society. University of Florida. Press, Gainesville, Fla., 1962. This survey of the research literature on medical and vocational rehabilitation of aging people discusses social questions related to employment: if compulsory retirement age is not mandatory, numbers of youth that can be hired are affected. 7. ALBRIGHT, L. E., AND GLENNON, J. R. “Personal History Correlates of Physical Scientists’ Career Aspira- tions.” ] Appl Psychol, 45 : 281—284, 1961. 66 8. ALEXANDER, 9. ALLEN, J. A total of 43 personal history items were found to differentiate employed petroleum research scientists desiring to advance in the laboratory supervisory hierarchy from a similar group aspiring to increase salary and status while re- maining “at the bench”. F. Prychosomatic .lIedicine. Norton, New York, 1950. “Family Physician, In- dustrial Physician, Employee-Pa- tient: A Two-Way Street.” Wis- consin Med], 58 :598, October 1959. 10. ALLERTON, W. 8., AND PETERSON, D. S. “Preventive Psychiatry: The Army’s Mental Hygiene Consulta- tion Service.” Amer fPrychiat, 113 (9) :788—795, March 1957. 11. ALVAREZ, W. C. “Medical Care of Executives.” Illinois Med ], 84 (4) :236—242, April 1943. 12. AMDUR, M. L. “Small Plant Medical Services.” Proceedings of Seventh annual meeting. American Academy Of Occupational Medicine, February 1955. This paper describes the activities of a private clinic in Buffalo, N.Y., which renders service for a fee to small indus- tries and their workers. 13. AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF IN- DUSTRIAL NURSES. “The Profes- sional Nurse in an Industrial Medi- OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 67 cal Service.” Amer Ass Industr Nurses ], p. 13—14, June 1955. This articles sets forth the duties, re- sponsibilities and the recommended quali- fications of nurses working both with and without nursing supervision in an indus- trial medical service. 14. AMERICAN JOURNAL OF PUBLIC HEALTH, editorial. “The Role of Labor in Community Health Educa- tion.” Amer ] Public Health, 47 (7) :877, July 1957. 15. AMERICAN MEDICAL ASSOCIATION, Council of Industrial Health. “Guiding Principles and Procedures for Industrial Nurses.” The Asso- ciation, Chicago, Ill., 1955. 16. AMERICAN MEDICAL ASSOCIATION, Council on Occupational Health. “Medical Relations in Workmen’s Compensations.” The Association, Chicago, 111., December 1955. 17. AMERICAN MEDICAL ASSOCIATION, Committee on Medical Care for In- dustrial Workers. “A Survey of Union Health Centers.” The Asso- ciation, Chicago, Ill., 1953. 18. AMERICAN MEDICAL ASSOCIATION, Council on Occupational Health. “Scope, Objectives and Functions of Occupational Health Programs.” ] Amer Med Ass, 164(10) :1104, July 1957. The American Medical Association House of Delegates approve this state- ment outlining its policy on occupational medicine. Maintenance of health is an individual matter. The employer has responsibility to provide a safe work en- vironment and to protect employee health. Objectives and activities are outlined. 19. AMERICAN NURSES ASSOCIATION. Functions, Standards, and Qualifi- cations for an Industrial Nurse in a One-Nurse Service in Industry or Commerce. Pamphlet, Industrial Nurses Section, American Nurses As- sociation, New York. 20. AMERICAN PSYCHIATRIC ASSOCIA- TION, Committee on Nomenclature and Statistics. Diagnostic and Sta- tistical Manual: Mental Disorders. The Association, Washington, D.C., 1952. 21. ANDERSON, M. Work and Leisure. Free Press of Glencoe, New York, 1962. This book on nonwork activities con- trasts “obligatory” work with “leisure” and outlines workers’ attitudes toward the job when it is considered as a “sale” of time. “The worker sells his time and skill, a business transaction; the transac- tion complete, at quitting time he puts work out of his mind. He is no longer the slave of a routine job but has worked out a sensible relationship with it.” 22. ANDREWS, M. F. Creativity and Psychological Health. Syracuse University Press, Syracuse, N.Y., 1961. This volume includes symposia pro- ceedings from the 1960—61 Conferences on Creative Arts Education held at Syra- cuse University. Contributors conceive creativity to be a “positive self-integrat- ing force, a process of self-actualization, an expression of being.” They present their interpretations of the relationships between creativity and psychological health. 23. ARCHIBALD, H. C., BELL, D., MIL- LER, C., AND THOMPSON, C. W. “Psychosomatic V.” ] Psychol, 52: 281—285, 1961. Sixty-six patients with psychosomatic V patterns on the Minnesota Multiphasic Personality Inventory were compared with a general clinic population on sev- 68 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES eral nontest variables. Patients with the psychosomatic patterns were more apt to be employed, were more often engaged in white-collar as opposed to blue-collar oc— cupations, and complained or exhibited more physical symptoms than the general population. 24. ARENSBERG, C. “Behavior and Organization: Industrial Studies,” in Social Psychology at the Cross- roads, Rohrer, J. H. and Sherif, M., editors. Harper, New York, 1951. 25. ARENSBERG, C., BARKIN, S., CHALMERS, W. E., WILENSKY, H., WORTHY, AND DENNIS, B., editors. Research in Industrial Human Rela- tions. Harper, New York, 1957. 26. ARGYRIS, C. Diagnosing Human Relations in Organization: A Case Study of a Hospital. Yale Univer- sity, Labor Management Center, New Haven, Conn, 1956. This is a research study of a. nursing service in a large hospital which presents a hypothesis, analysis, and a formulation of principles leading to support of a. sys- tematic theory of organization. 27. ARGYRIS, C. “Exploration in Client Consulting Relationships.” Hum Org, 20(3) :121—133, fall 1961. This article explores the rationale for sensitivity training of industrial execu- tives. The goal of such training is “self- change” through increased awareness. 28. ARGYRIS, C. “Individual Actual- ization in Complex Organizations.” Ment Hyg, 44:226—237, May 1960. Thirty-four high-skilled and 90 low- skilled workers, in an industrial plant characterized by low absenteeism, lack of pressure and favorable human climate were interviewed in a study exploring situational predispositions and degree of self-actualization. A high degree of alienation was found in relationships with coworkers and in involvement with man- agement goals. Long-term effects upon both individual and industrial health are discussed. 29. ARGYRIS, C. Integrating the Indi- vidual and the Organization. John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1964. 30. ARGYRIS, C. “The Integration of the Individual and the Organiza- tion,” in Social Science Approaches to Business Behavior. Dorsey Press, Homewood, 111., 1962. Because “the lower one goes down the chain of command, the more the job and the work environment control the indi- vidual behavior, the more important it becomes to change the psychosociotech- nical environment”. Argyris develops his theory of individual-organization rela- tionships based on research in organiza- tions and the physical sciences. 31. ARGYRIS, C. Interpersonal Com- petence and Organizational Effec- tiveness, Dorsey Press, Homewood, 111., 1962. 32. ARGYRIS, C. Understanding Or- ganizational Behavior, Dorsey Press, Homewood, 111., 1960. 33. ARIEFF, A. J. “Post-Traumatic Personality Disorders Including Neuroses and Encephalopathy.” Industr Med Surg, 29(1) :8—15, Jan- uary 1960. 34. ARMSTRONG, R. D. “Behavioral Changes in the Pigeon Following Inhalation of Mercury Vapor,” Amer Hyg Ass ], 242366—375, July— August 1963. 35. ASHE, W. F. “Education for In- dustrial (Occupational) Medical Practice.” ] Occup Med, 2:305— 311, July 1960. 36. ATKINSON, J. W. “Motivational Determinants of Risk«Taking Be- OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRlES 69 havior” Prychol R, 642359—372, November 1957. A large body of research indicates that persons showing some evidence of mal- adjustment also tend to select experi- mentally created tasks that have either a very high or very low probability of being successfully completed, compared to more normal subjects. 37. BACK, K. “The Exertion of In- fluence Through Social Communi- cation.” ] Abnorm Soc Psychol, 46:9—23, 1951. 38. BACK, W., BOGDANOFF, M. D., SHAW, D. M., AND KLEIN, R. F. “An Interpretation of Experimental C o n f o r m i t y Thru Physiological Measures.” Behau Sci., 8(1) :34— 40, January 1963. 39. BAILEY, S. B. “Automation in North America.” H. M. Stationery Office, London, England, 1958. 40. BAKKE, E. W. Citizens Without Work. Yale University Press, New Haven, Conn., 1940. 41, BAKKE, E. W. The Fusion Proc- ess. Yale University, Labor and Management Center, New Haven, Conn., 1953. 42. BAKKE, E. W. The Unemployed Man. Nisbet & Company, London, England, 1933. 43. BALCHIN, N. “Satisfactions in Work.” Occup Psychol, 21:125— 134,1947. 44. BANCROFT, G. “Older Persons in the Labor Force.” Ann Amer Acad Pol Soc Sci, 279252—61, January 1952. Opportunities for older women work- ers are explored, number employed full and part time are given, and future prob- able trends discussed. 45. BAND, R. I. AND BRODY, E. B. “Human Elements of the Thera- peutic Community: A Study of the Attitudes of People Upon Whom Patients Must be Dependent.” Arch Gen Psychiat, 6(4) :307—314, 1962. Psychiatric residents, psychiatric nurses, and aids in a university hospital were given a questionnaire regarding attitudes toward wards, patients, staff functions, and treatment. Seven residents, eight nurses, and eight aids were interviewed concerning ten patient-staff situations. Results showed that professional atti- tudes, values and response tendencies of the three group differ significantly and persist despite intensive efforts at inter- professional communication. 46. BARCIIAK, E. Today’s Industrial Nurse on Her job. York, 1957. Putnam, New 47. BARITZ, L. The Power. Wesleyan University Press, Middletown, Conn., 1960. 48. BARKIN S. “Management Per- sonnel Philosophy and Activities in a Collective Bargaining Era.” Indus- trial Relations Research Association, Annual Proceedings, 1955. Servants of A union oflicial attacks the logic and ideology of personnel administration as selling the autocratic attitudes of man- agement to the unsuspecting by the cur- rent use of humanistic language and the incorporation of a number of psychologi- cal techniques aimed at implanting a deep feeling of enterprise consciousness among employees. 49. BARNARD, C. I. “Functions and Pathology of Status Systems in For- mal Organizations, in Industry and Society, Whyte, \N. F., editor. Mc- Graw-Hill, New York, 1946. 70 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH; NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 50. BARNES, A. “The Problem of Oc- cupational Health.” Industr Med Surg, 28: 551, December 1959. 51. BARNES, A. “Medical Care: A Fringe Benefit.” Industr Med Surg, 29 2 78—81, February 1960. 52. BARRETT, R. S. “Guide to Using Psychological Tests.” Harv Bsns R, 41 (5) : 138—146, September—Octo- ber 1963. Various tests and their value are re- viewed and three basic patterns of use are presented: (1) Good tests misapplied, (2) tests adapted empirically to specific organization needs, (3) ongoing research to check test predictions. The author answers concerns such as: (a) tests will result in built-in conformity, (b) will lead to the loss of qualified people, (c) serve only the interests of management. 53. BARTIMEIER, L. H. “Eating and Working.” Amer ] Orthopsyehiat, 20:634—640, 1950. 54. BASS, B. M. “Mood Changes During a Management Training Laboratory.” ] Appl Psychol, 46 (5) :361—364, October 1962. The mood of 30 trainees in a 10-day sensitivity training laboratory was sam- pled at various points. It was found that concentration rose and declined signifi. cantly at various points during the course, skepticism declined steadily, and energy and depression fluctuated during the course. There were no appreciable fluc- tuations found in egotism, social affec- tion, and anxiety. 55. BASSETT, C. Mental Hygiene in the Community. MacMilIan, New York, 1934. 56. BATHURST, J. E. Hidden Causes.” 31—32, May 1932. “Getting at the Nat Safety News, 57. BEARD, R. R. “The Role of the In- dustrial Physician in Maintaining the Workers’ Health.” I ndustr Med, 152522, September 1946. 58. BEARDS, F. H. C. “Recording of Sickness Absence: System With Ob- ject of Determining Occupational Factors of Causation.” Brit ] Phys Med, 11:14—19, February 1948. 59. BECKER, H. J. AND CARPER J. W. “The Development of Identification With an Occupation.” Amer ] Social, 61 : 289—298, 1956. 60. BECKER, H. G. “Industry’s Role in Civilian Defense.” ] Occup Med, 5(6) :297_300, June 1963. The author reviews the behavioral model of disaster response in terms of five time periods: Preimpact, warning, im- pact, recoil, and postimpact. Industry’s role is related to the time periods in terms of training, physical preparation, orga- nization of medical departments and shelter areas, and involvement of person- nel who meet regularly to plan in the previously mentioned areas. 61. BECKMAN, R. 0. “Let’s Give Age 2. Break.” Advanc Mgmt, 19:18, December 1954. 62. BEHREND, B. “Planning for Women in Industry.” Arch Environ Health, 31108—110, July 1961. 63. BELCHER, D. W. “Toward a Be- havioral Science Theory of Wages.” _] Acad Mgmt, 5(2) :102—116, Au- gust 1962. The author urges the development of a behavioral science theory of wages and outlines in detail the many variables which must be considered. 64. BELKNAP, I. Human Problems of a State Mental Hospital. McGraw- Hill, New York, 1956. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 71 65. BELL, D. Factory Life.” Commentary, page 86, Janu- ary 1947. 66. BELLAK, L., BEAVERS, A., LEHINE, D., AND SCHUSDEX, A. “Psychiatric Training Program for Non-Psychi- atric Physicians.” ] Amer Med Ass, 184(6) :470—472, May 11, 1963. Experience is summarized in this paper of 4 years of teaching a year-long seminar to 20 physicians at a time. Lectures, seminars, supervised psychotherapeutic experience, consultations, and participa- tion in the activities of psychiatric division of a large general hospital have all con- tributed to a useful training program, adaptable for industrial physicians. 67. BELLows, R. M. Psychology of Personnel in Business and Industry. Prentice-Hall, New York, 1949. 68. BENDIx, R. Work and Authority in Industry: Ideologies of Manage- ment in the Course of Industrializa- tion. John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1956. 69. BENGE, E. J. “How to Learn What Workers Think of Job and Boss.” Factory Mgmt Maint, 102 (5) :101—104, May 1944. 70. BENNIs, W. G., BENNE, K. D., AND CHIN, R., editors. The Planning of Change: Readings in the Applied Behavioral Sciences. Holt, Rine- hart & Winston, New York, 1961. The authors of these collected papers draw largely from sociology and social psychology in their cumulative efforts to apply behavioral science concepts to planning for change. Applications are suggested for social work, nursing, psy- chiatric treatment, industrial relations, and education. 71. BENNIS, W. G. “Toward a‘Truly’ Scientific Management: The Con- “Exploring cept of Organization Health.” In- dustr Mgmt, 4(1) 21—28, fall 1962. This article demonstrates that the usual criteria for evaluating organizational ef- fectiveness are inadequate and incorrect as valid indicators of organizational health. The author proposes similarity of effective organizational behavior and mental health. Thus, he finds Jahoda’s definition of a healthy personality an ac- ceptable criterion for organizational as well as individual health. (Bibliography of 77 items.) 72. BERGLER, E. “Psychoanalysis of Writers and of Literary Production,” in Psychoanalysis and the Social Sci- ences, Roheim, G., editor. Interna- tional University Press, New York, 1947. 73. BERGLER, E. The Writer and Psy- choanalysis. Doubleday & Com- pany, New York, 1950. 74. BETTIs, M. G., MALAMUD, J. D., AND MALAMUD, R. F. “Deepening a Group’s Insight Into Human Rela- tions: A Compilation of Aids.” J Clin Psychiat, 5: 114, April 1949. 75. BIERWAGER, W. J. “Medical Care Under the Transit Employees’ Health and Welfare Plan.” Amer ] Public Health, 51:18—22, Janu- ary 1961. 76. BINGER, C. The Doctor’s job. Norton, New York, 1945. 77. BIRK, R. E. “A Clinical Survey of a Cross-Section of an Industrial Worker Group.” Arch Environ Health, 12291—296, October 1960. 78. BIRMINGHAM, D. J. “Occupa- tional Health Programs of Official Agencies.” South Dakota ] Med Phar, 9:237, 1956. 72 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 79. BIRMINGHAM, D. J. AND CAMP- BELL, P. C. Occupational and Re— lated Dermatoses: Abstracts from the Literature, july 1943, to Decem- ber 1953. Public Health Service Publication No. 364; Public Health Bibliography Series No. 12. Gov- ernment Printing Office, Washing- ton, D.C., 1954. 80. BLACHER, R. S. “The Creative Drive: A Case History.” ] Nerv Alent Dis, 120:106—107, 1954. 81. BLAKE, R. AND MOUTON, J S. Developing and .Maintaining Cor/)0- rate Health Through Organic .Man- agement Training. University of Texas, Austin, Tex. The emphasis here is on training for understanding and dealing with inter- group conflicts within organizations. 82. BLAKE, R. AND MOUTON, J. S. Training for Decision Making in Groups. University of Texas, Austin, Tex., 1958. This concerns “T-groups” for sensi- tivity training, which are termed here as “development groups.” 83. BLAU, P. M. The Dynamics of Bureaucracy: A Study of Interper- sonal Relations in Two Government Agencies. University of Chicago Press, Chicago, Ill., 1955. 84-. BLAU, P. M. In Inter—Personal Relations.” Soc R, 27:41—55,1962. Using data on 60 caseworkers in a pub- lic welfare agency for illustrative pur- poses, four types of interpersonal choices were distinguished in relationships with colleagues. How individual attributes influence these interpersonal choices is discussed. Workers tended to respect a colleague not because he was oriented toward service or because he was oriented “Patterns of Choice Amer toward procedures but because he shared their orientation, whatever it was. 85. BLAU, P. M., EDITOR. “Studies on Formal Organizations.” Amer J Social, 68:3, November 1962. The entire issue is concerned with formal organizations. Factors, particu- larly external ones influencing develop- ment, form, or change are discussed. Comparisons are made among a number of organizations. Articles by seven au- thors are included. 86. BLAU, P. M. AND SCOTT, W. R. Formal Organizations: A Compara- tive Approach. Chandler Publish- ing 00., San Francisco, Calif., 1962. 87. BLOOM, S. W. “The Process of Becoming a Physician.” Ann Amer Acad Pol Soc Sci, 346: 77—87, March 1963. 88. BLOOMFIELD, J. J. “Occupa- tional Medicine South of the Rio Grande.” Arch Industr Health, 15:79, 1957. 89. BLOOMFIELD, J. J. “Present Status of Occupational Health in Korea, the Philippines, and Taiwan.” ] Occup Med, 33374—379, August 1961. 90. BLUM, F. H. Toward A Demo- cratic Work Process. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1953. 91. BLUM, M. L. “Group Dynamics in Industry.” Int] Group Psycho- ther, 4(2): 172, April 1954. A psychologist in a. plant works with groups of executives in continuing ses- sions, using group dynamics methods profitably. 92. BLUM, M., editor. Readings in Experimental Industrial Psychology. Prentice-Hall, New York, 1952. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON—SPECIFIC ENTRIES 73 93. BLUMBERG, M. S. “The Costs of Employee Sickness and Health Serv- Arch Industr Health, 12:472, ices,” 1955. 94. BLUMBERG, M. S. AND COFFIN, J. C. “A Syllabus on Work Ab- sence.” Arch Industr Health, 13: 55—70, January 1956. 95. BORDUA, D. J. “Authoritarianism and Intolerance of Nonconformists.” Sociometry, 24(2) :198—216, June 1961. 96. BOWEN, H. R. Social Responsibil- ities of the Businessman. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1953. 97. BOVVERS, D. C. “Self—Esteem and the Diffusion of Leadership Style.” ] Appl Psychol, 47(2) : 135—140, 1963. 98. BRADFORD, F. K. “Ruptured In- tervertebral Disk in the Industrial Patient: Diagnosis, Surgical Man- agement, and Prognosis.” Texas ] Med, 56: 274—277, April 1960. 99. BRADFORD, L. P. AND CARTWRIGHT, D. Training Laboratory on Group Development. National Education Association and Research Center for Group Dynamics. Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Cambridge, Mass, 1947. 100. BRADY, J. B. “Ulcers in ‘Execu- tive’ Monkeys.” SciAmer, 199: 95— 103, 1958. 101. BRADY, R. Business as a System of Power. Columbia University Press, New York, 1943. 102. BRADY, R. A. Organization, Au- tomation, and Society: The Scientific Revolution in Industry. University 776—430—054—_6 of California Press, Berkeley, Calif, 1961. The all encompassing effects of the scientific revolution increasingly domi- nate many lives. This book presents ob- servations and explanations of the way in which economic activity has been or- ganized and the frames of reference which guide decisions on the exploitation of re- sources. 103. BRAND, M. “What Labor Ex- pects from Medicine.” Dis Colon Rectum, 2:473—480, September— October 1959. 104. BRAYFIELD, A. H. AND CROCKETT, W. H. “Employee Attitudes and Employee Performance.” Psychol Bull, 52(5) :396—424, 1955. 105. BRECKINRIDGE, E. L. Efiective Use of Older Workers. Wilcox & Follet Co., Chicago, 111., 1953. 106. BRENT, F. D. “Some Aspects of Placement Systems in Industry.” Canad Med Ass ], 82:1022—1030, May 1960. 107. BRESLOW, L. AND BUELL, P. “Mortality from Coronary Heart Disease and Physical Activity of Work in California.” ] Chron Dis, 11:421—444, April 1960. 108. BREWER, J M. “Causes for Dis- charge.” Personnel], 6:171~172, 1927. 109. BRIDGES, C. D. job Placement of the Physically Handicapped. Mc- Graw-Hill, New York, 1946. 110. BRIM, O. G., GLAss, D. C., LAVIN, D. E., AND GOODMAN, N. Person- ality and Decision Processes: Studies in the Social Psychology of Thinking. Stanford University Press, Palo Alto, Calif., 1962. 74 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES These studies, designed and carried out from the point of view of the sociolo- gist, present new concepts and general- izations on relations between decision making, personality and social structure. 111. BRITISH OCCUPATIONAL HYGIENE SOCIETY. “The British Occupa- tional Hygiene Society’s Recom- mendations Regarding the Establish- ment Of an Occupational Hygiene Service on a National Basis.” Ann Occup Hyg, 2:85—91, December 1959. 112. BRODY, L. Human Factors Re- search in Occupational Accident Prevention: Its Status and Needs. Center for Safety Education, New York University, New York, 1962. Reported research and experience is assessed under five headings: (1) Man and work, (2) workers and their physical environment, (3) workers and their social-psychological environment, (4) ac- cident investigation, (5) safety program- ing. Under each heading there is a re- view of the problems, a. list of provocative questions for research workers and a selective bibliography. 113. BRONFENBRENNER, U. “Freud- ian Theories of Identification and Their Derivatives.” Child Develop, 31:15—40, 1960. 114-. BROWHFAIN, J. J. “Stability of the Self-Concept as a Dimension of Personality.” ] Abnorm Soc Psy- chol, 47 : 597—606, 1952. This article indicates that “lower self- esteemed persons” are more dependent upon feedback from their social environ- ment than are those higher in self-esteem. As one application, the foreman often feels he can enhance his temporary image of himself by calling subordinates to- gether more often as a group than he would otherwise. 115. BROUHA, L. “Fatigue: Measure- ment and Reduction.” Industr Med Surg, 22(12) :547, December 1953. This study of industrial fatigue con- cludes that fatigue can be reduced by improving environmental conditions, by proper machine design and by careful selection of workers. 116. Brown, G. “Improving Medical Services Through Labor-Manage- ment Relations Legislation, Training and Education.” I ndustr Med S urg, 29290—2, February 1960. 117. Brown, M. L. “Occupational Health Problems in Small Employee Groups.” Arch Environ Health, 3: 79-83, July 1961. 118. BROWN, P. “Bureaucracy in a Government Laboratory.” Soc Forces, 32:264, 1954. 119. BROWN, W. Exploration in Management. John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1960. While subtitled “A Description of the Glacier Metal Company’s Concepts and and Methods of Organization and Man- agement,” this presents top management’s observations of one psychiatric approach in an organization. Mr. Brown is Chair- man of the Board of Glacier Metal Co. The company has been the object of both study and program based on psychiatric concepts and reported in the volumes of Jaques, e.g. The Changing Culture of a Factory. 120. BROWNE, R. C. Health in Indus- try: A Guide for Engineers, Execu- tives and Doctors. E. Arnold, Lon- don, England, 1961. 121. BRUNER, J. S. “Factors Influenc- ing the Cognitive Process,” in Crea- tive Engineering Notes. Massachu- setts Institute of Technology, Cam- bridge, Mass., 1954-. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 75 122. BUCK, R. L. “Behavioral Sci- entists in Schools of Medicine.” ] Health Hum Behav, 2(1): 59—64, spring 1961. 123. BUCKINGHAM, W. Automation. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1961. 124-. BULLARD, T. H. “Ten Finger Safety.” Safety News, 80:34—35, 75—78, December 1959. This article gives statistics on hand in- juries which represent 30 percent of all industrial accidents. Safety measures are discussed, a five-point list of ways such injuries can be prevented is given. 125. BUNDY, M. “The Private Prac- titioner’s Role in Occupational Health.” Pennsylvania Med ], 64-: 45—48, January 1961. 126. BURGER, G. C. AND FRANT, R. “Occupational Health in the Netherlands.” Ann Oceup Hyg, 2: 280—282, November 1960. 127. BURLING, T. Essays on Human Aspects of Administration. New York State School of Industrial and Labor Relations, Cornell University, Ithaca, N.Y. 128. BURLING, T. You Can’t Hire a Hand and Other Essays. New York State School of Industrial and Labor Relations, Cornell University, Ithaca, N.Y., February 1950. 129. BURLING, T., LENTZ, E. M., AND WILSON, R. N. The Give and Take in Hospitals. G. P. Putnam’s Sons, New York, 1956. 130. BURNS, R. K. “Economic As- pects of Aging and Retirement.” Amer ] Sociol, 59:384, January 1954. 131. BURNS, R. K. “Management and Employee Motivation.” Public Personnel R, 202122—127, April 1959. An executive discusses the process of motivation in the American economy, with emphasis on sociocultural factors, needs, and management problems. 132. BURNSTEIN, E. “Fear of Failure, Achievement Motivation, and Aspir- ing to Prestigeful Occupations.” ] Abnorm Soc Psychol, 2323, 1963. 133. BUROS, O. K., editor. Tests in Print: A Comprehensive Bibliog- raphy of Tests for Use in Education, Psychology and Industry. Gryphon, Highland Park, N.J., 1961. Here is a bibliography of all current achievement, aptitude intelligence, per- sonality and sensory-motor tests. A sec- tion on out-of-print tests is also included. The book could serve as an index to “Mental Measurement Yearbook.” 134. BURR, H. “Westinghouse Man- agement Health Examinations: Their Investment Value.” ] Occup Med, 2:80—91, February 1960. This article emphasizes the usefulness of preventive medical examinations at company expense. Eighty-three percent of major disease findings were expected to benefit from future care. Results of Westinghouse experiences in 1958 are reported and economic justification for executive health examinations is pro- vided. 135. BURR, H. “Industry’s Need and Utilization of Health Personnel and its Role in their Future Education and Training.” Industr Med Surg, 28:552—554, December 1959. 136. BURRIS, C. F. “The Place of the Foreman in Maintaining a Healthful Plant,” Industrial Hygiene Con- ference, Mellon Institute, Pitts- burgh, Pa., November 14—15, 1945. 76 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 137. CAMPBELL, D. T. Leadership and Its Eflects Upon the Group. Ohio Leadership Studies, Bureau of Business Research, Ohio State Uni- versity, Columbus, Ohio, 1956. This monograph, based on the study of a squadron of submarines, is concerned with the effects of leadership upon group performance and morale. A wide vari- ety of criterion scores are analyzed and related to measures of leadership. The criterion scores include objective meas- ures as well as reputational data and evaluative ratings. 138. CANTOR, N. Employee Counsel- ing. McGraw—Hill, New York, 1945. 139. CARR-SAUNDERS, A. M., AND WILSON, P. A. The Professions. Oxford University Press, London, England, 1963. 140. CARSON, H. Common Annoy- ances: A Psychological Study of Everyday Aversions and Irritations. Psychological Review Company, Princeton, N.]., 1930. 141. CARTWRIGHT, D. “Achieving Change in People: Some Applica- tions of Group Dynamics Theory.” Hum Relat, 4: 381—382, 1951. 142. CARTWRIGHT, D. AND ZANDER, A. Group Dynamics: Research and Theory. Row & Peterson, Evan- ston, Ill., 1953. 143. CASSEL, J. “The Use of Med- ical Records: Opportunity for Epi- demiological Studies.” ] Occup Med, 5(4) 2 185—190, April 1963. The author discusses the epidemiolog- ical approach and suggests the use of medical records to further contributions to an understanding of the role of social and cultural processes in the onset of diseases. Two studies are outlined. One deals with the incongruity between an individual’s cultural characteristics and the demands of the social situation (specifically a change from rural, agri- cultural to urban, industrial). The sec- ond tests the hypothesis that individuals with few opportunities of adequate group support will have poorer states of health than will those who are afforded such opportunities. 144. CASTLE, P. F. C. “The Evalua- tion of Human Relations Training for Supervisors” Occup Psychol, 26: 191—205, 1952. 145. CATHCART, E. P. The Human Factor in Industry. Oxford Univer- sity Press, London, England, 1923. 146. CATTELL, R. B. AND DREVDAHL, J. E. “A Comparison of the Per- sonality Profile of Eminent Re- searchers With That of Eminent Teachers and Administrators, and of the General Population.” Brit ] Psychol, 46(4): 248—261, 1955. 147. CATTELL, R. B. AND STICE, G. P. “Four Formulae for Selecting Lead- ers on the Basis of Personality.” Hum Relat, 7: 493, 1954. 148. CENTERS, R. AND CANTRIL, H. “Income Satisfaction and Income Aspiration.” ] Abnorm Soc Psychol, 41: 64—69, January 1946. 149. CHAFETZ, M. E. AND DEMONE, H. W. Alcoholism and Society. Oxford University Press, New York, 1962. Definitions of alcoholism and theories of its origin and development are pre- sented. Contemporary governmental programs here and abroad are reviewed. In discussing prevention, early diagnosis and treatment are noted to be the key to secondary prevention, and it is here that industrial physicians are urged to play an important role. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 77 150. CHAPPLE, E. D. “Applied An- thropology in Industry,” chapter 46, in Anthropology Today, Kroeber, A. L., editor. Chicago University Press, Chicago, Ill., 1953. 151. CHAPPLE, E. D. “Contributions of Anthropology to Institutional Psy- chiatry.” Hum Org, 13 : 11, summer 1954. 152. CIIAPPLE, E. D. “Measuring Human Relations: An Introduction to the Study of the Interaction of Individuals.” Genet Psychol Monogr, 2223—147, 1940. 153. CHASE, S. Democracy Under Pressure. The Twentieth Century Fund, New York, 1945. 154. CHASE, S. .Men at Work. Har- court, Brace & Company, New York, 1945. 155. CHATTERJEE, R. “Job Satisfac- tion.” Industr Relat, 122262—264, 1960. The author feels that the importance of job satisfaction is recognized by society because the job is seen as a symbol of adulthood, a means of fulfilling the need for self-esteem and esteem from others. 156. CHEEK, G. Economic and Social Implications of Automation: A bib- liographic Review. Vol. I, Litera- ture Before 1957, School of Labor and Industrial Relations, Michigan State University, East Lansing, Mich, 1958. 157. CHILES, \V. D. Psychological Stress as a Theoretical Concept. WADC Technical Report 57-437. ASTIA Document No. AD 130942. VVright-Patterson Air Force Base, Ohio, July 1957. 158. CHRISTENSEN, W. N. AND HIN- KLE, L. E. “Differences in Illness and Prognosis in Two Groups of Young Men.” ] Amer [Med Ass, 177:247—253, 1961. The managerial employees of a cor- poration who earned between $6,000 and $12,000 annually were divided into high school or college graduates. The former had considerably more illnesses of many types. 159. CHRISTIE, R. V. “Some Types of Respiration in the Neuroses.” Quart] Med,4:427, 1935. 160. CLARK, F. L., AND DUNNE, A. C. New jobs for Old Workers. The Nufiield Foundation, London, Eng- land, 1955. 161. CLARK, F. L. The Working Fit. ness of Older Men: A Study of Men Over Sixty in the Building Industry. The Nuflield Foundation, London, England, 1955. 162. CLARK, R. E. “Psychoses, In- come and Occupational Prestige.” Amer ] Sociol, 54:433—440, 1949. 163. CLARK, R. A., TEEVAN, R., AND RICCIUTI, H. W. “Hope of Success and Fear of Failure as Aspects of Need for Achievement.” ] Abnorm Soc Psychol, 53: 182—186, 1956. 164. CLARKE, C. A. “The Health of Executives: A Plea for the Best As- sessment.” Practitioner, 1852203— 204, August 1960. 165. CLAUSEN, J. A. AND KOHN, M. L. “The Ecological Approach in Social Psychiatry.” Amer Sociol R, 20:265—273, 1955. 166. CLAUSEN, J. A. AND KOHN, M. L. “The Ecological Approach in 78 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH; NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES Social Psychiatry.” Amer ] Sociol, 60:140—151, 1954. 167. CLAUSEN, J. A. Sociology and the Field of Mental Health. Russell Sage Foundation, New York, 1956. 168. CLEVELAND, S. E. “Personality Patterns Associated with the Profes- sions of Dietitian and Nurse.” ] Health Hum Behav, 2(2) :113-124, summer 1961. An exploration of the personality pat- terns characteristic of nurses and dieti- tians at both the student and staff level reported. Conscious motivations for oc- cupational choice were compared with the results of the T.A.T. 169. CLOUD, A. D. “Profiles in Occu- pational Health.” Industr Med Surg, 28:586—591, December 1959. 170. COHEN, A. P., THOMAS, E. J., STOTLAND, E., AND ZANDER, A. “Effects of Public and Private Fail- ure on Self-Evaluation.” ] Abnorm Soc Psychol, 56: 223—229, 1958. 171. COHEN, J. “The Ideas Of Work and Play.” Brit jSociol, 4:312—322, 1953. 172. COHEN, L. D. “Level of Aspira- tion Behavior and Feelings of Ade- quacy and Self-Acceptance.” ] Ab- norm Soc Psychol, 49:84—86, Janu- ary 1954. In a group of 50 neurotic patients, the author attempted to determine the rela- tionship between goal-setting behavior and feelings of self-rejection, as deter- mined by Rorschach. He found that both very high and very low goal settings were significantly related to a high de- gree of self-rejection. 173. COHEN, L. “To Test or Not To Test.” Personnel, 25:20, June 1946. An article citing factors to be consid- ered in determining the needs for a psy- chological testing program in industry is directed to a management audience. 174. COHEN, M. B. AND COHEN, R. A. “Personality as a Factor in Adminis- trative Decisions.” Psychiatry, 14: 47—53, 1951. 175. COLLINS, 0. “Ethnic Behavior in Industry.” Amer ] Social, 51 (4) :293—298, 1946. 176. COLLISSON, N. H. “Manage- ment and an Occupational Health Program.” Arch Environ Health, 2:116—123, February 1961. 177. COLWELL, M. O. “The Role of the Employer in the Health of the Worker.” Physical Ther R, 40: 802—4, November 1960. 178. COREY, L. G. “Psychological Adjustment and the Worker Role: An Analysis of Occupational Differ- ences.” ] Appl Psychol, 43:253— 255, August 1959. This is a study of manual and non- manual workers at a Midwestern oil rc- finery to determine the relationship be- tween worker role and personal adjust- ment, social adjustment, and job satis- faction. It was suggested that there is some relationship of these variables to occupational status. 179. CORSINI, R., SHAW, M., AND BLAKE, R. Role-Playing7 in Business and Industry. The Free Press of Glencoe, Homewood, Ill., 1961. Role-playing can be used to train, to inform, and to test. It is a training de- vice when used to improve performance, change behavior, and informational in dramatizing the importance of a prin- ciple involving interaction between peo- ple. The authors explore in detail these applications as well as the planning and techniques to be used for successful role- playing sessions. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 79 180. CORWIN, R. G. “The Profes- sional Employee: A Study of Con- flict in Nursing Role.” Amer ] Sociol, 66:604—615, May 1961. This work deals with conflict between the administrative and the professional roles of nurses. 181. COTTRELL, W. F. The Rail- roader, Stanford University Press, Palo Alto, Calif., 1939. 182. COUNCIL OF INDUSTRIAL ORGA- NIZATIONS. Union Counseling Pro- gram. Training Course Manual. CIO Community Service Commit- tee, 1776 Broadway, NCW York, No- vember 19. This manual outlines a course given union members who in turn advise work- ers where they may receive aid with specific “outplant” problems. 183. COUNTS, G. S. “Social Status of Occupations.” School R, pages 16— 17, January 1925. 184. COURTENAY, I. D. “Occupa- tional Health Problems in Small Em- ployee Groups.” Arch Health, 3:84—85, July 1961. 185. CoerLE, W. J. “A Psychologist Views Industry.” Factory Algmt Maint, 102(3, 4, 5) :260—274, 210— 222, 248—260, 1944. 186. COVNER, B. J. “Management Factors Affecting Absenteeism.” Harv Bsns R, 28 (5) 242—48, Septem- ber 1950. 187. COVNER, B. J. “Principles for Psychological Consulting with Client Organizations.” ] Consult Psychol, 11(5) :227—244, September 1947. 188. CRAIG, H. F. “Administering a Conversion to Electronic Equip- ment: A Case Study of a Large Environ Ofiice.” Harvard University Grad- uate School of Business Administra- tion, Division of Research, Cam- bridge, Mass, 1955. 189. CRAIN, R. B. “Management of the Older Employee with Medical Problems.” Arch Induxtr Hyg Occup filed, 5:71—81, January 1952. 190. CRAMPTON, M. W'. AND AN- DEREGG, G.F. “Educational Weak- ness and Occupational Stress.” Amer ] Occup Ther, 15:233—241, 1961. A discussion of some of the basic psy- chosocial problems of the occupational therapist based upon a survey of all the members of the occupational therapy de- partments in Massachusetts’ 12 State hospitals for the adult mentally ill. Ninetyvfour therapists were interviewed and reported on the stresses of their job which are summarized in this report. 191. CRESSEY, P. The Taxi Dance Hall. University of Chicago Press, Chicago, 111., 1932. 192. CROMWELL, H. A. “Pros and Cons of Company-Sponsored Execu- tive Health Programs.” Med Rec Ann, 56:5, January 1963. 193. CURETON, E. E. AND KATZELL, R. A. “A Further Analysis of the Re- lations Among Job Performance and Situational Variables.” ] A ppl Psy- chol, 462230, 1961. 194. DALE, E. “Executives Who Can’t Manage.” Atlantic, 210258—62, July 1962. 195. DALE, E. Planning and Develop- ing the Company Organization Structure. American Management Association, New York, 1952. 80 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 196. DALE, E. “The Social and Moral Murchison, (3., editor. Clark Uni- Responsibilities of the Executive in versity Press, Worcester, Mass, 1935. the Large Corporation.” Amer “ 202. DAVID, W. D. The Usefulness Econ R’ 51(2) :540_548’ May 1961' of Periodic Health Examinations.” Among the responsibilities discussed, Arch Environ Health 2.33942 the trend toward “absolutism” (the re- ’ i ’ March 1961. fusal to attend to diflering views) is de< plored, and the need to encourage inter- 203 DAVIS F AND OLESEN V L . , . , . . “Initiation Into a Women’s Profes- change of ideas is strongly encouraged. 197- DALTON, M- “Conflicts Between sion: Identity Problems in the Status Transition of Coed to Student Staff and Line Managerial Officers.” Amer Social R, 15:344, 1950. Nurse.” Sociomglry, 25(1); 89— 101, March 1963. 198. DALTON, M. .Men Who Aldridge. John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1959. 199. DANKERT, C. E. “Shorter Hours in Theory and Practice.” Industr Labor Relat R, 15(3):307, April 1962. Because shorter work weeks are pro- posed, the author considers the possible objectives of decisions about the “hour policy”,- maximization of production, of worker satisfactions, or of employer prof- its. He concludes that present under- standings, not “past arguments,” should be basic and favors enhancement of worker satisfactions as the predominant consideration. 200. D’ANTONIO, W. V. AND SAMORA, J. “Occupational Stratifications in Four Southwestern Communities: A Study of Ethnic Diflerential Em- ployment in Hospitals.” Soc Forces, 41(1): 17—25, October 1962. Using the Warner-Srole conceptual scheme of predicting variables related to assimilation into American life, the au- thors studied occupational attainment of “Spanish-name personnel” within a hos- pital stratification. 201. DASHIELL, J. F. “Experimental Studies of the Influence of Social Situations on the Behavior of Indi- vidual Human Adults,” chapter 23 in A Handbook of Social Prychology, 205. DAVIs, K. 206. DAVIS, L. E. This paper is concerned with what happens when aspirants to a profession lack one or more “commitment-generat- ing” attributes. It was found that the nursing students experience considerable identity stress because of the difficulty they have in psychologically integrating the student nurse role with a concurrently emerging identity of adult womanhood. Specific sources, manifestations, and adaptations to this kind of identity stress are described. 204. DAVIS, K. “Industrial Medicine and the General Practitioner.” Med Timex, 87: 1288—1291, October 1959. “Mental Hygiene and the Class Structure.” Psychi- atry, 1 :55—65, February 1939. The author believes the mental hygien- ist defines normality as conformity. The hygienist is blind to mental disorders re- sulting from social elements or “the ver- tical society” and “the invidious status element.” A study of 70 hospitalized patients is cited. “Job Design and Productivity: A New Approach.” Personnel, 33:418—430, 1957. The author questions the industrial engineering assumption that the content of each job is fixed by the requirements of the production process and the orga- nization structure and therefore cannot be altered without jeopardizing economic efficiency. He summarizes current criti- cisms of this concept of job design and describes studies which “maximate worker satisfactions while still achieving organizational goals.” 207. DAVIS, W. G. “Organization and Functions of Industrial Health Departments.” Rocky Mountain Med ], 58:40—42, March 1961. 208. DEARBORN, D. C. AND SIMON, H. A. “Selective Perception: A Note on the Departmental Identifi- cation of Executives.” Sociometry, 21(2) :140—144, June 1958. Executives in a company training pro- gram read a standard case study. Each was requested to write a brief statement of what they considered to be the most important problem in the case. An analysis of these “important problems” indicated that, although the subjects were motivated to look at the problem from a companywide, rather than a de- partmental viewpoint, they did, in fact, primarily perceive problems related to their own special areas of concern. 209. DELANEY,J. B. “Tests: Psychol- ogy Sifts Out Misfits.” Iron Age, 171261—62, February 19, 1953. This article discusses work done at Armco Steel Corp., by staff psychologist George Hill, and says Armco is sold on industrial psychology. Armco has used psychological testing to screen out mis- fits, to assign persons to work which best suited, to promote on the basis of ability, to select employees for further training, and to keep a running inventory of per- formance. 210. DEVEREAUX, G. “Maladjustment and Social Neuroses.” Amer Soc R, 63 :84-4—851, December 1939. 211. DEVERELL, J. D. “Industrial Ac- cidents: The Human Factor.” Roy OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH; NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 81 Soc Health ], pages 36—40, January— February 1960. This article discusses theories of causa- tion of accidents. It concludes that the employee must be motivated for safety. Under the heading of “human failing” accidents, the author feels the main fail- ure is management‘s. In not properly training, not using propaganda or in- centives effectively or not making em- ployees obey self-discipline, management is responsible for many accidents. 212. DICK, H. R. “The Office VVork- er.” Social Q, 3(1) :45—56, Janu- ary 1962. Validity of the traditional white-collar stereotype was investigated in the con- text of modern-day conditions of “job rationalization.” The stereotype suggests that white-collar workers occupy an in- termediate position in the U.S. hierarchy, below the managerial class but above the industrial workers. From a study of 141 office girls in a Midwestern city, it is concluded that while old notions about white-collar attitudes and orientations are disturbed under modern industrial con- ditions, “job rationalization” does not re- sult in a complete or even drastic change in white-collar self-concepts and identi- fications. 213. DILL, W. R. “Environment as an Influence on Managerial Auton- omy.” Admin Sci Q, 2:409—443, 1958. 214-. DILL, W. R., HILTON, T. L., AND REITMAN, W. R. The New Manag- ers: Patterns of Behavior and Devel- opment. Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 1962. Thirty recent graduate school alumni were asked what makes a successful man- ager in American industry. They con- cluded that the aspirant should be in the top 10 percent of population intellectu- ally, be well trained, maintain an inde- pendent and somewhat skeptical attitude toward job demands, and accept ambi- 82 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES guity and uncertainty as a natural condi- tion of work. He should also be precep- tive about what his superior wants and expect variation in evaluation of his per- formance; should select an environment which permits him to test his interest, gives feedback on performance, and docs not block opportunity. 215. DIZON, G. D. “Occupational Health Services: The Philippines.” World Med ], 7: 192—193, May 1960. 216. DOHRENWEND, B. P. “The Stir- ling County Study: A Research Pro- gram on Relations Between Socio- cultural Factors and Mental Illness.” Amer Psychologist, 12:78—85, 1957. 217. DONHAM, P. “Is Management a Profession?” Harv Bsns R, 40(5) : 60—68, October 1962. A business owner, consultant, and teacher discuss the emergent “image” demands made on business leaders in various terms, including Maslow’s hier- archy-of-needs, and concludes that unless our economic system is changed, the con- flicting demands on business leaders will result in insoluble problems. 218. DOWNING, D. “Economic and Human Values as Recognized by Management.” ] Occup .Med, 5: 197—199, April 1963. 219. DOYLE, H. N. “Emerging Indus- trial Health Problems.” Industr Med Surg, 26:1 1957. West Vir- ginia Med ], 53:1, 1957. 220. DOYLE, H. N. “Management Aspects of Employee Health.” Arch Industr Health, 14:303, 1956. 221. DOYLE, H. N. Health on Farms.” Rept72:145, 1957. “Occupational Public Health 222. DRAYER, C. S., CAMERON, D. C., WOODWARD, W. D., AND GLAss, A. J. Psychological First Aid In Com- munity Disasters.” American Psy- chiatric Association, Committee on Civil Defense, Washington, D.C., 1954. 223. DRUCKER, P. F. “Human Rela- tions: How Far Do We Have To Go?” Mgmt Record, March 1959. 224. DUBLIN, L. I. Suicide: A Socio- logical and Statixtical Study. Ron- ald Press, New York, 1963. 22.5. DUBIN, R. “Business Behavior Behaviorally Viewed,” in Social Science Approacher to Businesx Be- havior, Strother, G. B., editor. Dor- sey Press, Homewood, Ill., 1962. This is a comprehensive and provoca- tive review of behavioral science re- search studies of management behavior. 226. DUBNO, P. “The Role of the Psychologist in Labor Unions.” Amer Psychologist, 12(4) :212, April 1957. 227. DULLES, F. R. Labor in Amer- ica. Thomas Y. Crowell Co., New York, 1949. 228. DUNCAN, O. D. AND HODGE, R. W. “Education and Occupa- tional Mobility: A Regression Anal- ysis.” Amer ] Social, 68(6) :629— 644, May 1963. 229. DUNHAM, H. W. Sociological Theory and Mental Dixorder. Wayne State University Press, De- troit, Mich., 1959. 230. DUNNETTE, M. D. AND BAss B. M. “Behavioral Scientists and Personnel Management.” Industr. Relat, 2: 115—130, 1963. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 83 231. DUNNETTE, M. D. “Personnel Management.” Ann R Psychol, 13: 285—314, 1962. This review assesses the current scene in personnel management and evaluates psychology’s contributions. Summaries of research and relevant comments are presented in the areas of job analysis, se- lection, training and personnel develop- ment, compensation, and integration of the individual into the organization. (Extensive bibliography.) 232. DUNNING, P. M. “Occupational Health: An Executive Philosophy.” Arch Environ Health, 3: 105—7, July 1961. 233. DYSINGER, R. H., editor. .Mental Health in the U.S. American Acad- emy of Political and Social Science, Philadelphia, Pa., 1953. 234. EATON, J. AND WEIL, R. Culture and Mental Disorders. The Free Press, Glencoe, 111., 1955. 235. EATON, W. H. “Hypotheses Related to Worker Frustration.” ] Soc Psychol, 35 : 59—68, 1952. 236. ECKFORD, L. W. “An Occupa- tional Health Survey.” Canad ] Public Health, 512417, October 1960. 237. EIUDSON, B. T. Scientists: Their Psychological World. Basic Books, New York, 1962. In clinical studies of 40 male scientists engaged in academic research, personality factors were found to have common di- mensions and behavioral characteristics. The author believes that the findings of this research may aid in recruitment of scientists. 238. EMERY, F. E. AND HAREK, J. “Some Socio-Technical Aspects of Automation.” Hum Relat, 15(1) : 17—25, 1962. Some preliminary indications of the efTect of the automation of a powerplant are discussed. The changeover was com- pleted smoothly and without labor- management conflict. The technical improvements were achieved through: (1) Increased complexity of the total process, (2) decreased tolerance for dis- turbances in the process, and, (3) in- creased separation of operators from the process. Increased complexity places new demands on operators and changes the pattern of operator-supervisor rela- tions. 239. EMPLOYEE RELATIONS BULLETIN. “Ruling Could Make Cardiacs Un- employable.” The Bulletin, Report No. 83626, Dec. 12, 1962. A recent New Jersey court ruling in- creases industry’s Iiability for coronary occlusion. Formerly, the employee had to prove that the strain which led up to a heart attack was unusual. In the Dwyer v. Ford Motor Company case, the court said that the “totality of effort” on the day or week of the heart attack in question was enough to satisfy the con- cept of “accident.” Thus, by passive presence on the job, both a clerk on sedentary duties or laborer who does heavy lifting can collect compensation for a heart attack if they have no prior coronary history. 240. EMPLOYEE RELATIONS BULLETIN. “Slips and Falls.” The Bulletin, Re- port No. 794: 7—1 1, Jan. 24, 1962. The safety programs for office workers in two companies, American Telephone & Telegraph Co. and the Equitable Life Assurance Society, are described. These companies have initiated campaigns to reduce off-the-job accidents as well as those on the job. 241. ENGLAND, G. W. AND STEIN, C. I. “The Occupational Reference Group: Neglected Concept in Em- ployee Attitude Studies.” Personnel Psychol, 142299—304, autumn 1961. 84 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 242. ENTERLINE, P. E. “Work Loss Due to Illness in Selected Occupa- tions and Industries.” ] Occup .Med 32405—411, September 1961. 243. EVANS, W. N. “The Cultural significance of the Changed Attitude Toward Work in Great Britain.” Bull Menninger Clin, 13:1-8, 1949. 244. Factory Doctor “Some Problems of the War \Nork- er.” Occup Psychol, 17:34-38, 1943. 245. FARNSWORTH, D. L. .Mental Health in College and University. Harvard University Press, Cam- bridge, Mass, 1957. 246. FARSON, R. E. “Praise Reap- praised.” Han; Bsns R, 41 (a) : 61— 66, September—October 1963. The author reviews the concept of praise and asks if it really motivates and stimulates people. It is suggested that praise may be experienced as a threat, serve to establish distance between peo- ple, establish the superiority of the praiser, constrict creativity or terminate further contact. 247. FEIBLEMAN, J. K. BiosocialFac- tors in Mental Illness. Charles C Thomas, Springfield, 111., 1962. 248. FIEDLER, F. E. Leader Attitudes and E fiectiveness. University of Illi- nois, Urbana, Ill., 1958. 249. FIELDER, F. E., DODGE, J. S., JONES, R. E., AND HUTCHINS, E. B. “Interrelations Among Measures of Personality Adjustment in Non- Clinical Populations.” ] Abnorm Soc Psychol, 56:345—351, 1958. 250. FEIN, R. Economics of Mental Illness. Basic Books, New York, 1958. 251. FEINBERG, M. R. “The Contro- versial Role of the Industrial Psy- chologist.” Dan’s R, 80(4) :66, Oe- tober 1962. Much controversy about this role has arisen from the areas industrial psychol- ogists have been “pushed into.” Their most useful, and intended function has been to “replace some risk and guesswork with insight and knowledge.” Their role should be to “discover and predict” rather than “solve.” 252. FEINBERG, M. R. AND LEFKO- WITz, J. “Image of Industrial Psy— chology Among Corporate Execu- tives.” Amer Psychologist, 17: 109— 111, 1962. Executives attending a 1960 execu- tive seminar of the American Manage- ment Association completed a 13-item questionnaire. Twice as many execu- tives stated that they would hire an in- dustrial psychologist as would not. Many executives were unconvinced that psy- chology has any real worth at its present stage of development. Areas of compe- tence in which the industrial psychologist was judged to be most useful were in assisting with problems of morale, selec- tion, and training. 253. FELIX, R. H. Epidemiology of Mental Disorder. Milbank Memo- rial Fund, New York, 1950. 254. FELIX, R. H. AND Bowens, R. V. “Mental Hygiene and Socio-Envir- onmental Factors.” M ilbank Mem Fund Q, 26: 125—147, 1948. 255. FELTON, J. S. “British Industrial Medical Personalities: A Decury in Vignette.” ] Occup Med, 2:540« 548, November 1960. 256. FELTON, J. S. “Contemporary Techniques in Teaching Occupa- tional Medicine: The Field Trip OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 85 Revitalized.” Industr Med Surg, 30:77—82, February 1961. 257. FELTON, J. S. “Integration of the Worker in Industry,” in Social Work in the Current Scene. Na- tional Conference on Social Work, Proceedings 76th Annual Meeting. Columbia University Press, New York, 1950. 258. FELTON, J. S. AND SPENCER, C. “Morale of Workers Exposed to High Levels of Occupational Noise.” Amer Industr Hyg Ass ], 22:136— 147, April 1961. 259. FELTON, J S. “Oil for the Lamps of Learning: Promoting Oc- cupational Medicine as a Career.” ] Occup Med, 533—9, January 1963. 260. FELTON, J. S. “The Teaching of Occupational Medicine in the United States and Canada.” ] Oe- cup Med, 2:315—320, July 1960. 261. FENCHEL, G. E., MONDERS, J. H., AND HARTLEY, E. J. “Subjective Status and the Equilibrium Hypoth- esis.” ] Abnorm Soc Psychol, 46: 476—479, 1951. This hypothesis implies that stress is minimal when status indices are in bal- ance or subjectively perceived to be sim- ilar. Status indicators include educa- tion, income, and occupation. 262. FINLEY, W. VV., SARTAIN, A. (2., AND TATE, W. M. Human Behav- ior in Industry. lVchraw-Hill, New York, 1954. 263. FIRTH, R. “Anthropological Background to Work.” Occup Psychol, 2294—102, 1948. 264-. FISHBEIN, M. AND WHITE, W. A., editors. Why .Men Fail. New York, 1928. Century, 265. FLAHERTY, B., editor. Psycho- physiological Arpects of Space Flight. Columbia University Press, New York, 1961. These collected papers were presented at a symposium sponsored by the School of Aviation Medicine, U.S. Air Force Medical Center. They constitute a broad evaluation of our scientific and technical capabilities to place a man in space. 266. FLEISHMAN, E. A. “Leadership Climate: Human Relations Train- ing and Supervisory Behavior.” Personnel Psychol, 6 : 205—222, 1955. This is a study of 122 foremen at In- ternational Harvester Co. Ninety re- ceived a 2-week training course; 32 did not. All subjects filled out three ques- tionnaires: A leadership opinion survey, a supervisory behavior descriptive ques- tionnaire, and a "what your boss ex- pects of you” form. Each foreman’s subordinates and supervisors also filled out two questionnaires concerning the actual and desired behavior of the fore- man. Results suggest that situational variables are more important than training. 267. FLEISIIMAN, E. A., HARRIS, E. E, AND BURTT, H. E. Leadership and Supervision in Industry: An Evalua- tion of a Supervisory Training Pro- gram. Ohio Leadership Studies, Bureau of Business Research. Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio, 1955. This monograph describes a study de- signed to evaluate the results of a train- ing program for foreman. Subjects were three matched groups of foremen who had completed the human relations train- ing course at different times, and a matched group of untrained foremen. The analysis compares the behavior, at- titudes, and eHectiveness of foremen who operate under different patterns of leadership. 86 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 268. FLEISHMAN, E. A., editor. Studies in Personnel and Industrial Psychology. Dorsey Press, Home- wood, 111., 1961. This basic text includes 66 articles. F ifty-five were originally published since 1950. Major sections include personnel selection, performance appraisal, training of employees and managers, motivation, attitudes, morale, leadership and super- vision, communication and organizational behavior, fatigue, monotony and working conditions, accidents and safety, and engi- neering psychology. 269. FOGARTY, M. The just Wage. Geoffrey Chapman, Ltd., London, England, 1961. Wages are considered within the frame- work of “human and ethical considera- tions,” rather than traditional economic theory in which wages are the result of impersonal market forces. The author tests and approves the current British system in these terms. 270. FOLSAM, M. W. “Occupational Health: A World Perspective.” In- dustry Med Surg, 292504—510, No- vember 1960. 271. FORCE, R. C. “Development of a Covert Test for the Detection of Al- coholism by a Keying of the Kuder Preference Record.” Q ] Stud Al- cohol, 19: 72—78, March 1958. 272. FORSSMAN, S. “Occupational Health: Recent Trends and Future Problems.” Indurtr Med Surg, 29: 511—514, November 1960. 273. FORTUIN, G. J. “Sickness Ab- senteeism.” WHO Bull, 13(4): 513,1955. “A Good Man is Fortune, 33 : 92—95, 274. FORTUNE. Hard to Find.” hlarch 1946. 275. FOSTER, G. M. Traditional Cul- tures: The Impact of Technological Change. Harper & Brothers, New York 1962. Psychosomatic symptoms are likely to be experienced by persons sent to work in alien cultures (such as Peace Corps volunteers). The author suggests the areas in which professional social scien- tists can aid these individuals in gaining insight into their own behavior and into their impact on the host people. 276. Fox, J. B. AND SCOTT, J. F. Ab- senteeism: Management’s Problem. Harvard Business School, Business Research Studies, Cambridge, Mass, November 1943. 277. FRANCO, S. C. “Periodic Health Examination of Executives.” In- dustr Med Surg, 19:213, May 1950. 278. FRANCO, S. C., GERL, A. J., AND MURPHY, G. T. “Periodic Health Examinations: A Long Term Study, 1949—1959.” ] 050.11] Med, 3:13— 20, January 1961. 279. FRANK, L. K. “Inter Profes- sional Communication.” Amer ] Public Health, 51:1798—1804, De- cember 1961. 280. FRANK, L. K. “Psycho-Cultural Approaches to IVIedical Care.” ] Soc Issues, 8(4) :45—55, 1952. 281. FREDERICK, W. G. “Health De- partment Services to Small Plants.” Industr Med Surg, 28:568—569, De- cember 1959. 282. FREEDMAN, L. Z. AND HOLLINGS- HEAD, A. B. “Neurosis and Social Class: Social Interaction.” Amer ] Psythiat, 113 : 769—775, 1957. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 87 283. FRENCH, J. R. P. The Behavior of Groups Under Conditions of Frus- trations and Fear: Studies in Topo- logical and Vector Psychology III. University of Iowa, Ames, Iowa, 1944. 284. FRENCH, J. R. P. “Field Experi- ments: Changing Group Produc- tivity,” in Experiments in Social Process, Miller, J. S., editor. Mc- Graw-Hill, New York, 1950. 285. FRENCH, J. R. P. “Organized and Unorganized Groups Under Fear and Frustration.” University of Iowa: Studies in Child Welfare, 20 (409) :231—308, 1944. 286. FRENCH, J. R. P. “The Social Environment and Mental Health.” ] Soc Issues, 10(4) 2 39—56, October 1963. Evidence indicates that job status is inversely related to mental and physical illness. This paper seeks to provide a conceptual linkage between status and health and to review a series of studies which test the relevance of the interven- ing variables. The concept of self-esteem and self—evaluation organized around dif- fering subidentities of the self is proposed as a. major intervening variable. Loss of self-esteem and/or status incongruence can lead to the development of symptoms. 287. FRENCH, J. R. P. AND RAVEN, B. “The Bases of Social Power,” in Studies in Social Power, Cartwright, D., editor. Research Center for Group Dynamics, Ann Arbor, Mich. , 1959. 288. FRENCH, J. R. P., Ross, I. C., KIRBY, S., NELSON, J. R., AND SMITH, P. “Employee Participation in a Program of Industrial Change.” Personnel, 35:16—29, 1958. In a company where management be- lieved that workers’ attitudes and feelings about change were of prime concern, it was decided to encourage their participa- tion in the change process as much as possible. Positive and tangible benefits were noted in addition to benefits in morale and labor-management relations, e.g., more rapid development of the tech- nical program through workers’ catching “snags” and heading off obstructions. Specific steps in the change introduction are described, as well as statistical re- sults. 289. FRENCH, J. R. P., ISRAEL, J., AND DAGFINN, A. “An Experiment on Participation in a Norwegian Fac- tory: Interpersonal Dimensions of Decision Making.” Hum Relat, 13 (1)13—19, February 1960. In a. study of nine four-man groups in a southern Norwegian factory employ- ing 1,600 workers it was hypothesized that a positive relationship obtains be‘ tween participation and production, man- ager-worker relations and job satisfaction provided four variables are present: (1) The decisions are important, (2) the con- tent of the decisions is relevant to the dependent variable, (3) the participa- tion is considered legitimate, (4) there is no resistance to change. Results indi- cated that there was no difference be- tween the experimental and control groups in the level of production. The hypothesis about worker-manager rela- tions was supported: The effects of participation held only for subjects who experienced as much participa- tion as they consider legitimate. There was equal support for the hypothesis that the eFfects of participation increase with decreasing resistance to the participation methods. 290. FRENCH, J. R. P. AND KAHN, R. L. “A Programmatic Approach to Studying the Industrial Environment and Mental Health.” ] Soc Issues, 18(3): 1—47, July 1962. 88 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES In this introduction to reports of re- search at the University of Michigan’s Institute of Social Research, the authors describe the theoretical framework which has evolved and underlies the current field research in terms of “bridging the theoretical gaps between the objective social environment (primarily industrial) and mental health.” Marie Jahoda’s criteria of mental health and Miller’s theory of self-identity are utilized in stud- ies of work environment effects on em- ployees which “compliment the more usual approach” to study of individuals and add a focus on mental health to the study of organizations. 291. FRENCH, J. R. P., KAHN, R., AND MANN, F ., editors. “Work, Health, and Satisfaction.” ] Soc Issues, 18: 3, July 1962. 292. FREUD, S. “The Relation of the Poet to Day Dreaming,” in Collected Papers, Freud, S. Hogarth Press, London, England, 1922. 293. FREUD, S. Civilization and its Discontent. Norton, New York, 1930. 294. FREUD, S. Leonardo da Vinci. Dodd, Mead, New York, 1932. 295. FRIEDMANN, G. The Anatomy of Work. The Free Press, Glencoe, 111., 1961. The effects of increasing specialization and division of labor are explored and a a correlation is drawn between job dis- satisfaction and the use of leisure. Work rotation and job enlargement are shown to increase both output and satisfaction in a majority of cases. 296. FRIEDMAN, G. Industrial So- ciety: The Emergence of Human Problems of Automation. The Free Press, Glcncoe, 111., 1956. 297. FRIEDMAN, M. AND ROSEMAN, R. H. “Association of Specific Overt Behavior Patterns with Blood and Cardiovascular Findings.” ] Amer [Med Ass, 169(12) :1286— 1296, Mar. 21, 1959. 298. FRIEDMAN, M., ROSEMAN, R. H., AND CARROLL, B. “Changes in the Serum Cholesterol and Blood Clot- ting Time in Men Subjected to Cyclic Variations of Occupational Stress.” Circulation, 17:852—861, 1958. 299. FRIEND, J. C. AND HAGGARD, E. A. Work Adjustment in Relation to Family Background. Stanford Uni- versity Press, Palo Alto, Calif, 1948. 300. FRIESEN, E. P. “Fitting the Worker to the Job.” Occup Health R, 12(2) 218—20, 1960. The author points out the usefulness of an industrial psychologist in the selec- tion and placement of workers. He sug- gests that remarkable changes can be made in productive capacity and human satisfaction if the worker “fits” his job. 301. FROEHLICH, H. P. AND WOLINS, L. “Job Satisfaction as Need Satis- faction.” Personnel Psychol, 13: 407—420, 1960. A 61-item attitude survey administered to engineers in an oil company showed that items with low satisfaction means and high importance means made the best indices for the measurement of over- all satisfaction. The best attitudes were held by men who were supervisors, rela- tively well paid, relatively well educated and experienced. 302. FROMM, E. The Sane Society. Rinchart, New York, 1955. Fromm, within his more extensive anal- ysis of the individual and society, main- tains that the individual loses a sense of mastery and personal control through in- strumentalizing himself in an intense mobility commitment. Since mobility OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 89 often requires a sacrifice of personal autonomy, the status-striver tends to ob- jectify himself into a marketable com- modity. 303. FROMM, E. Man for Himself. Rinehart, New York, 1947. 304. FRUMKIN, R. M. “Social Factors in Involutional Psychosis.” Ohio State Med ], 50:243—244, 1954. 305. FRUMKIN, R. M. “Social Factors in Schizophrenia.” Social Soc Res, 38:383—386, 1954. 306. FRUMKIN, R. M. “Economic Security and Major Mental Dis- orders.” Alpha Kappa Deltan, 25: 15—17, 1955. 307. FRUMKIN, R. M. “Marital Sta- tus and Mental Illness.” Sociol Soc Res, 39:237—239, 1955. 308. FULTON, W. J. “Records—The ‘Seeing Eye’ of Industrial Medi- cine.” Industr Med, 13:1, 1944. 309. FULTON, W. J “Industrial Medical Potentials: A Time and Job Analysis of Medicine in In- dustry.” Industr Med Surg, 18: 270—282, July 1949. 310. GAFAFER, W. M. “Absence From Work Due to Non-Occupa- tional Illness and Injury.” Pro- ceedings 16th Annual Congress on Industrial Health, Detroit, Mich., Jan. 24, 1956. American Medical Association, Chicago, Illinois, pages 37—38, 41—48, 1956. 311. GAFAFER, W. M. “Criteria for Retirement” University of Michigan Conference on Aging: Workshops and Seminars. Public Health Rept, 71:1204, 1956. 77674 30»--G5—~—7 312. GAFAFER, W. M. “Industrial Sickness Absenteeism, Rates for Spe- cific Causes in 1952.” Public Health Rept, 68(11) :152—155, No- vember 1953. 313. GAFAFER, W. M. Program of Study for Determining the Work Capacities of Persons in the Older Age Groups. Public Health Serv- ice, Washington, D.C., 1954. 314. GAFAFER, W. M. Sick Absentee- ism Among a Sample of Member Companies of I—H—F, 1952 and 1951. Transport Bulletin No. 26. Industrial Hygiene Foundation, Pittsburgh, Pa., 1954. 315. GAGE, R. M. AND WOLFSON, I. N. “Four Years of Experience with Day Work Program at Letchworth Vil- lage.” Amer ] Alental Defic, 67: 563—568, January 1963. A dnywork program initiated in June 1957, offered patients part-time work experience before permanent placement outside the institution. This article gives data resulting from a 4-year fol- lowup study of 376 patients who par- ticipated in the program. About 50 per- cent were placed successfully on perma- nent work under social service super- vision or returned to their families. 316. GALLo, P. S. AND MCCLINTOCK, C. G. “Behavioral, Attitudinal, and Perceptual Differences Between Leaders and Non-Leaders in Situa- tions of Group Support and Non- Support.” ] Soc Psychol, 56:1214 133, 1962. A naive subject, either a leader or a nonleader was placed in a group with three paid participants. These accom- plices supported the subject in the first session, and withdrew this support in the second. The results indicated leaders were more accurate in perceiving their 90 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES status as leaders, initiate more task-ori- ented directive responses, and show more hostility when their position is threatened than do nonleaders. 317. GARDINER, G. When Foreman and Steward Bargain. McGraw- Hill, New York, 1945. 318. GARDNER, B. B. Human Rela- tions in Industry. Richard D. Irwin, Inc., Chicago, 111., 1945. 319. GARDNER, B. B. AND MOORE, D. G. Human Relations in Industry. Richard D. Irwin, Inc., Chicago, 111., 1950. 320. GARDNER, B. B. AND WHYTE, W. F. “Methods for the Study of Hu- man Relations in Industry.” Amer Sociol R, 11(5) :506—512, October 1946. 321. GARLAND, T. O. “The Doctor’s Point of View. 2. Always Ill and Never Ill.” Hum Factors, 19:66« 71, 1936. 322. GARLAND, T. O. “The Doctor’s Point of View. 3. Home Environ- ment as a Factor in Absenteeism of the Factory Girl.” Hum Factors, 10:99—105, 1936. 323. GANGULY, M. M. “Function of a Medical Officer in an Industrial Organization.” ] Indian Med Ass, 36: 103—5, February 1961. 324. GASQUE, M. R. AND PLUMB, C. S. “Economic Influences of an In- dustrial Medical Program on a County Medical Society.” North Carolina Med ], 21:361—365, Sep- tember 1960. 325. GATES, A. B. “A Management Approach to the Problems of Indi- vidual Adjustment” American Man- agement Association, Personnel Se- ries No. 132. The Association, New York, 1950. 326. GAUDET, F. J. The Literature on Labor Turnover: A Classified Bibli- ography. Industrial Relations News, New York, 1960. 327. GAUDET, F. J. “Solving the Problems of Employee Absence.” American Management Association, Research Study No. 57. The Asso- ciation, New York, 1963. Information on steps companies have taken to achieve success in absence con- trol is presented. Recommendations are made for record systems and for analysis by incompany study groups. 328. GEHRMANN, G. H., NORRIS, J. L., DAVIS, C. N., BELL, G., AND BREIGES, H. “Alcoholism in Industry,” Sym- posium. 34th Annual Meeting. American Association of Industrial Physicians and Surgeons. Industr Med Surg, 18(8) :315—325, August 1949. 329. GELFAND, D., LEWIS, D. H. MONHEIT, R. S., SHAPIRO, S., THOMPSON, H., LEVINE, M., AND HAGAN, J. “Factors Relating to Un- successful Vocational Adjustment of Cardiac Patients.” ] Occup Med, 2(2) : 62—70, February 1960. Of 117 cardiacs, 79 were successfully adjusted vocationally; 38 were not. All were studied in a cardiac work classifica- tion unit. The unsuccessful ones were individuals with passive dependent per- sonalities; the successful were generally obessive compulsive. 330. GEMELLI, P. A. “The Human Factor in Work Accidents in Indus- try.” WHO Bull, 13(4) 1649, 1955. This is a general discussion of social and psychological aspects of industrial ac- OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 91 cidents. It contains an extensive bibli- ography. 331. GERSTLE, W. J. “Health Serv- ices for Government Employees.” Public Health Rept, 76:185—188, March 1961. 332. GHESELLI, E. E. AND BROWN, C. W. Personnel and Industrial Psy- chology. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1948. 333. G133, J. R. AND LIPPrr, R. editors. “Consulting with Groups and Or- ganizations.” I Soc Issues, 15 (2) : 142, 1959. 334. GIBBS, A. G. “Some General Comments on the Introduction of an Industrial Medical Plan.” Med ] Australia, 46(2) :753—755, Novem- ber 1959. 335. GIGLIO, A. L. “Medically Based Job Changes—A Panel: Employer- Union Medical Contracts.” I ndustr Med Surg, 29: 84—85, February 1960. 336. GILL, M., NEWMAN, R., AND REDLICH, F. C. The Initial Inter- view in Psychiatric Practice. Inter- national University Press, New York, 1954. 337. GILLESPIE, J. J. Free Expression in Industry. Pilot Press, London, England, 1948. 338. GINGRAS, G. AND GAGNON, G. “Rehabilitation in Industry.” Canad Med Ass ], 83:217—221, July 1960. 339. GINSBURG, S. W. “Values and the Psychiatrist.” Amer ] Ortho- psychiat, 20: 466—478, 1951. 340. GINZBERG, E. “Man and His Work.” Personnel M gmt Abstracts, 9(1) 22—9, spring 1963. Observations drawn from the 20-year, interdisciplinary project “Conservation of Human Resources,” at Columbia Uni- versity Graduate School of Business re- garding the relation of individual, employer, and society in many countries, suggest the “centrality of work in human life” as a basis for understanding the be- havior of both individuals and groups. 341. GINZBERG, E., editor. What Makes an Executive? Report of a Round Table on Executive Potential and Performance. Columbia Uni- versity Press, New York, 1955. 342. GINZBERG, E. AND CARWELL, J. The Labor Leader. MacMillan, New York, 1948. 343. GINZBERG, E., GINZBERG, S., ALEXRAD, 5., AND HERMA, J. Occu- pational Choice: An Approach to a General Theory. Columbia Univer- sity Press, New York, 1951. A study of the determinants of occu- pational choice is reported with sugges- tions to counselors for guidance of stu- dents toward sound choices. 344. GLASS, J. AND LLOYD-DAVIES, T. A. “An Investigation of Ab- senteeism in Selected Groups of Em- ployees of H. M. Dockyard, Singa- pore.” MedIMalaya, 13:331—334, June 1959. 345. GLENN, N. D. “Changes in the American Occupational Structure and Occupational Gains of Negroes During the 1940’s.” Soc Forces, 41 (2) :188—195, December 1962. Occupational gains of American Negroes in the 1940’s were studied. The greatest gains took place in rapidly ex- panding occupations, in those of inter- mediate and declining desirability and in occupations more desirable to Negroes than to whites. 92 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 346. GLOVER, K. Mental Health: Everybody’s Business. Public Af- fairs Pamphlet No. 196, lVIay 1953. 347. GODARD, J. “Human Factors and \Vorker Safety.” WHO Bull, 13 (4) :661, 1955. The author states that the “human factor” is responsible for 50—90 percent of all accidents. Investigations show that there is unequal susceptibility to acci- dents, but that this becomes less evident as an occupation becomes more dan- gerous. Absence after accident may not reflect extent of injury. Psychological and social measures can contribute to the creation of a more human atmosphere to adapt man to his work. 348. GOLDHAMMER, H. AND MAR- SHALL, A. Psychosis and Civiliza- The Free Press, Glencoe, 111., tion. 1953. 349. GOLDSTEIN, B., NORTHWOOD, G., AND GOLDSTEIN, R. “Medicine in Industry: Problems of Administra- tors and Practitioners.” ] Health Hum Behav, 1(4) :259—268, 1960. One hundred interviews were con- ducted with industrial physicians and nurses, members of management, em- ployees, and union officials in four New Jersey plants. Medicine comes to the industrial setting with its own social sys- tem which must be fitted into the larger social system of the industrial firm. This creates a status problem and has conse- quences for the physician-patient rela- tionship (the physician is both physician and fellow employee). The conclusions drawn are intended to point up the utility for medical sociology of the analy- sis of medicine in other than the usual context. 350. GOLDSTEIN, D. H. “Medical Problems in Employment Continuity for Senior Citizens: From the View- point of the Industrial Physician.” New York ] Med, 61(17): 2894— 2897, September 1961. 351. GOODE, W. J. “A Theory of Role Strain.” Amer Social R, 25: 483, August 1960. 352. GOODMAN, B. W. “Why a Part- Time Physician in Industry?” N 07th Carolina Med ], 22:268—270, June 1961. 353. GORDON, 0., EMERSON, A. R., AND PUGH, D. S. “Patterns of Sick- ness Absence in a Railway Popula- tion.” Brit ] Industr Med, 16:230—- 243, July 1959. 354. GORDON, E. E. “Chronic Low Back Pain.” Industr Med Surg, 28: 26—33, January 1959. Experiences of a large rehabilitation cen- ter which evaluated 100 chronic cases of low back pain are reported. Of 90 cases treated, 22 were “successes,” 68 “fail- ures” (return to work rather than com- plete absolution of pain, was the cri- terion of success). 355. GORDON, R. E. “Counseling for Modern Environmental Stress.” Consultant, 4—6, October 1962. Acute situational maladjustments are common, especially during the major transition periods of life, and are pre- ventable or curable without intensive treatment. There are usually “sensi- tizing factors” in the patient that pre- dispose to emotional breakdown at these times of crisis. 356. GORDON, R. E. Your Patient and You.” ant, 3 :42, January 1963. Upward climbing, socially mobile persons show a great tendency toward physical and emotional illness. The nature of the response to stress is innate and individualized but social and environmental stress are the important mechanisms. “Stress and Consult- 357. GOTTLIEB, STANLEY AND KRAM- MER, H. “Compliance with Rec- ommendations Following Executive Health Examinations.” f Occup Med, A:(12): 709—717, December 1962. Five hundred and seventy-four male executives were studied for the purpose of evaluating the degree of compliance with recommendations received at ex- ecutive health examinations and the factors operative in success or failure in obtaining compliance. After single ex- amination, compliance was 72 percent. Although disease severity increased with age, compliance decreased and was greater for newly detected disease than for disease previously detected. 358. GOTTLIEB, SYLVIA. “Automa- tion Issues and Arbitration: A Labor View.” I ndustr Labor Relat R, 8(2) :6—9, 1962. This article suggests mental health problems increase as a result of decreas— ing work satisfaction in working with automated equipment. It concludes that arbitration may play a role in hu- manizing decisions so that they take in- to account what is happening to people in our changing social, as well as indus- trial society. 359. GOULDNER, A. W. Patterns of Industrial Bureaucracy. The Free Press, Glencoe, Ill., 1954-. The appointment of a production- oriented, rules-enforcing manager to succeed the lenient, “neighborly” prede- cessor in a gypsum plant resulted in resistance, hostility, and eventually a strike on the part of employees, and anxiety and demotion for the successor. 360. GOULDNER, A. W. Wildcat Strike. The Antioch Press, Yellow Springs, Ohio, 1954. Gouldner examines the background and motivations which culminated in a spontaneous wildcat strike at a gypsum OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 93 plant where management succession was being studied. He concluded that hostility could not be directly ex- pressed. Employee dissatisfaction was channeled into the only legitimate ave- nue for grievance, the wage issue. Since this was not the real issue, an increase did not restore the equilibrium. This is a case study of the wide and deep reverberations resulting from dis— ruption of patterns and values. 361. GRANDJEAN, F. “The Eflects of Short Exposure to Trichlorethylene on Swimming Performance and Motor Activities of Rats.” Amer Industr Hyg Ass ], 24(4) :376—379, July—August 1963. 362. GREAT BRITAIN MINISTRY or LA- BOUR. Health at Work: A Descrip- tion of Medical Services in 14 British Factories. Prepared by the Ministry of Labour and the Central Oflice of Information, London, England, 1961. 363. GREENI—IILL, S. “The Relation— ship Between Occupational and Public Health Services.” Canad ] Public Health, 52:55—60, February 1961. 364-. GREENWOOD, M. “A Report on the Cause of Wastage of Labour in Munition Factories.” Govem— ment Publications—Medical Re- search Council. H. M. Stationery Office, London, England, 1918. 365. GREER, F. L. “Leader Indul- gence and Group Performance.” Psychol Monogr, 75( 12, Whole No. 516) 21—35, 196l. The prime concern of this investiga- tion is the effectiveness of the hypothesis that “the more a leader satisfies the needs of his men, the more effective group performance” will be. Tested in a series of four field research studies 94 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES were 272 Army infantry rifle squads and Air Force crews. The results support the hypothesis. 366. GROEN, J. J., ARAN, L., AND CAMRASS, I. “Medicine, Manage- ment and the Worker: A Case Re- port.” Israel Med ], 182283—90, November—December 1959. 367. GROUP FOR THE ADVANCEMENT or PSYCHIATRY. Committee on Psychiatry in Industry, “Person with Epilepsy at Work.” Report No. 36, February 1957. 368. GUEST, R. “Managerial Suc- cession in Complex Organizations.” Amer ] Social, 68(1) 247—56, July 1962. The author compares Gouldner’s study of managerial succession in a gypsum plant with his own study of succession in a large auto plant. The comparison delineates the organizational pressures in the two social systems that led the first manager to adopt “punishment- centered” bureaucratic measures and the second to adopt “representative" measures. The action of the first resulted in increased tension and organizational dissatisfaction. The actions of the sec- ond manager had precisely the opposite effects. 369. GUEST, R. Organizational Change: The Efiect of Successful Leadership. The Dorsey Press, Homewood, 111., 1962. This is a research report following up one facet of the Yale technology project conducted in many automobile as- sembly plants in the early 1950’s. It studies the transformation of a plant from low efficiency, poor quality, high indirect labor costs, with numerous acci- dents, high grievance rate, high turnover, and high absenteeism, to the best po- sition among the six plants in the division. This was in apparent response to the introduction of a new plant manager. 370. GUETZKow, H. Groups, Lead- ership and Men .' Research in Hu- man Relations. Carnegie Press, Pittsburgh, Pa., 1951 371. GUIDOTTI, F. P. “Medical Care and Welfare Program for Hotel Workers in New York City.” ] Oc- cup Med, 2:480—484, October 1960. 372. GUNN, C. G. “Health Exami- nations in a Textile Industry.” Arch Environ Health, 32100—104, July 1961. 373. GURIN, G. “Work Satisfac- tion.” Industr Med Surg, 32(6): 212—214, June 1963. In a nationwide survey, the author ex- amined the concept of job satisfaction. Distinction is drawn between ego satis- factions and extrinsic satisfactions. Ego satisfaction in the job is reported by 80 percent of professionals and technicians, as opposed to 30 to 40 percent of clerks, semi and unskilled workers. Those re- porting the greatest ego satisfaction also report the greatest amount of ego dissat- isfaction. This is not found in the lower status worker at the conscious level lead- ing to the conclusion that when expecta- tions are low, ego frustrations are not likely to occur. 374. GURSSLIN, O. R., HUNT, R. G., AND ROACH, J. L. “Social Class and the Mental Health Move- ment.” Soc Probl, 7(3) :210—218, winter 1959—60. The authors analyzed 27 pamphlets from the New York State Department of Mental Hygiene and the National Asso- ciation for Mental Health. He found that 60 percent of the text was middle- class orientated. Thirty percent con- sisted of platitudes and value-laden words, while 10 percent was free of middle-class themes. He concludes that there is a paradox in the mental health OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 95 movement that by providing authorita- tive “scientific” support to middle-class values (such as the value of work, plan- ning ahead, striving to attain goals, etc.), it may be helping to support a social system which in itself is produc- ing a high incidence of mental illness and advancing unrealistic prototypes for lower class people. 375. GUTHRIE, D. I. “An Experi- ment in Industrial Rehabilitation.” South Africa .Med ], 35:305—310, April 1961. 376. GUZE, S. B. “Theory and Ob- servation in Psychiatric Research.” Hum Org, 16(4) :4—6, 1958. Increasing collaboration between so- cial scientists and psychiatrists is pre- dicted and discussed. The psychiatric research orientation is described as pri- marily “explanation,” instead of pre- diction and control; therefore, social sci- entists are urged to maintain scientific methodology and maintain independ- ence of speculative psychiatric and psy- cological theory. “What psychiatrists need from social scientists are reliable observations of social phenomena which will present us with new problems.” 377. HAIRE, M. “Industrial Social Psychology,” in Handbook of Social Psychology, Lindzey, G., editor. Addison Wesley Publishing Co., Cambridge, Mass, 1954. 378. HAIRE, M., editor. Modern 0r- ganization Theory. John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1959. Eleven papers presented at a sym- posium sponsored by the Foundation for Research on Human Behavior, at Ann Arbor, Mich., in February 1959, in- cluded: “Understanding Human Be- havior in Organizations: One View- point” (C. Argyris), “An Interaction Approach to the Theory of Organiza- tion” (W. F. Whyte), and “Stability of Human Organizations” (R. Dubin). 379. HAIRE, M. “Psychological Prob- lems Relevant to Business and In- dustry” Psychol Bull, 56(3):169— 194, May 1959. 380. HAIRE, M. Psychology in Man- agement. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1957. 381. HAIRE, M. “Role Perceptions in Labor-Management Relations: An Experimental Approach.” Industr Labor Relat R, 8:204—216, 1955. 382. HAIRE, M., GHISELLI, E. W., AND PORTER, L. “Cultural Pat- terns in the Role of the Executive.” Institute of Industrial Relations, University of California, Berkeley, Calif., February 1963. 383. HALL, P. AND LOCKE, H. W. Incentives and Contentment: A Study Made in a British Factory. Pitman, London, England, 1938. 384. HALLIDAY, J. L. Psychosocial Medicine. Norton, New York, 1948. 385. HALPIN, A. W. “The Leader- ship Behavior and Combat Per- formance of Airplane Comman- ders.” ]. Abnorm Soc Psychol, 49: 19—22, 1954. 386. HAMILTON, A. AND HARDY, H. L. Industrial Toxicology. Paul B. Hoeber, New York, 1949. 387. HARDIN, E., EDDY, B., AND DEUTSCH, S. E. Economic and Social Implications of Automation: An Annotated Bibliography. Michi- gan State University, Labor and Industrial Relations Center. East Lansing, Mich., 1961. The entries are classified according to principal topics and into 10 cate- 96 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES gories. They are cross-referenced by number according to studies of white- collar, blue-collar, or agriculture em- ployer. The coverage is from 1957 to 1960. 388. HARER, W. B. “What Medicine Wants From Labor Unions.” Dis Colon Rectum, 2:481—485, Sep— tember—October 1959. 389. HARROWER, G. AND Cox, K. “The Results Obtained From a Number of Occupational Group- ings on the Professional Level With the Rorschach Group Method.” Bull Canad Psychol Ass, 3:31—33, 1943. 390. HARTMANN, G. W. “Prestige of Occupations.” Personnel ], 13 (3) 2144—152, October 1934. 391. HATCH, T. “Changing Objec- tives in Occupational Health.” Amer Industr Hyg Ass ], 23: 1—7, January—February 1962. 392. HATCH, T. “Human Factors Engineering and Safety Research.” ] Oecup Med, 4:1—5, January 1962. 393. HEALEY, J. H. “Coordination and Control of Executive Func- tions.” Personnel, 33(2) 2106—117, September 1956. 394. HELFRICH, M. L. “The Gen- eralized Role of the Executive’s Wife.” Marriage Fam Liv, 23:- 384—387, 1961. Questionnaire study among 63 and interviews with 25 executives’ wives confirmed the theory that the role of the executive’s wife is associated with basic duties and with norms of expec- tation. 395. HELLEBRANDT, F. A. “Disabil- ity, Rehabilitation and the Law of Damages.” Industr Med, 221558, 1953. 396. HELLER, F. A. “Studies in Or- ganization: The Effect of Structure on Industrial Relations.” ] Industr R, 2: 1—19, April 1960. 397. HELLER, R. E. “Occupational Medicine: A New Frontier.” Chi- cago Med, 63:5, June 1961. 398. HELLMAN, L. P. AND BRODMAN, K. “Minor Illness, Short Medical Absenteeism, Lateness, and Separa- tion in Mail Order Firm.” Industr .Med, 16: 14—17, January 1947. 399. HEMPHILL, J. K. “Relations Between the Size of the Group and the Behavior of ‘Superior’ Lead- ers.” ] Soc Psychol, 32:11—22, 1950. 400. HENRY, W. E. “Executive Per- sonality and Job Success.” Ameri- can Management Association, Per- sonnel Series, 12023—13, 1948. 401. HENRY, W. E. “The Business Executive: Psycho-Dynamics of a Social Role.” Amer J Social, 54: 286—291, 1949. 402. HEPNER, H. W. Psychology Applied to Life and Work. Pren- tice-Hall, New York, 1957. 403. HERFORD, M. E. “The Adoles- cent in Industry.” Practitioner, 184:331—337, March 1960. 404. HERON, A. “The Establishment for Research Purposes of Two Cri- teria of Occupational Adjustment.” Occup Psychol, 26:78—85, 1952. 405. HERON, A. “A Psychological Study of Occupational Adjust- ment.” ] Appl Psychol, 36:385— 387, December 1952. 406. HERTZMAN, J. “Dynamic Group Experiences for Teachers and Stu- dents in the Classroom.” Int ] Group Psychother, 9199—109, Janu- ary 1959. Group methods, used for 15 years in the Cincinnati schools help teachers im- prove their teaching by becoming aware of their own self-concepts and personal problems. 407. HERZBERG, F. “Basic Needs and Satisfaction of Individuals.” Industrial Relations Research Counselors Symposium on Ad- vanced Research in Industrial Re- lations. Industrial Relations Mon- ograph 21, New York, 1962. 408. HERZBERG, F. AND HAMLIN, R. M. “A Motivation-Hygiene Con- cept of Mental Health.” Ment Hyg, 45(3) :394—401, July 1961. 409. HERZBERG, F. AND HAMLIN, R. M. “The Blotivation-Hygiene Con- cept of Psycl‘iotlicrapy.” .Ment Hyg, 47(3) : 384—397, July 1963. Drawing upon previous research and publications which evolve the motiva- tion-hygiene concept of incentives for work in the industrial organization, the authors develop a tentative model for psychotherapy based on the same prin~ ciples. The objective of such therapy should be the reorientation of the indi- vidual’s motivation to seek satisfaction from psychological growth which can only arise when there is opportunity to achieve on some task. Alleviation of psychological distress (hygiene-therapy) does not, itself, foster mental health. 410. HERZBERG, F., MAUSNER, B. AND SNYDERMAN, B. The Motiva- 411. HICKISH, D. E. 412. HIMLER, L. 413. HINKLE, L. E. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 97 tion to Work. John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1959. “Sensations of Warmth and Freshness of Workers in Light Industry in Summer.” Ann Occup Hyg, 12271—279, April 1960. “Basic Principles and Techniques of Interviewing and Counselling.” Industr Med, 16 2 529—534, November 1947. “Ecological Ob- servations of the Relation of Physi- cal Illness, Mental Illness, and the Social Environment.” Psychosom Med, 23:289—297, 1961. A study of 68 Hungarian refugees in- dicates that clusters of illness occur when subjects experience unsatisfactory relationships to the social environment. Moreover, individuals have different re- actions to the same stresses with higher incidence of illness when personal goals seem unattainable. Less than one- fourth of the population experiences one-half of all illnesses. 414. HINKLE, L. 13., CHRISTENSON, W. N., BENJAMIN, B., KANE, F. D., WOLFF, H. G. “Observations on the Role of Nasal Adaptive Reac- tions, Emotions and Life Situations in the Genesis of Minor Respiratory Illnesses.” Psychosom Med, 24:5, 1962. Subjects, 24 women, aged 22—30, chosen at random from a work popula- tion of 737 women, were intensively studied for 6 months by means of phy- sicians’ examinations and interviews each week, and continuous observation of the daily events and situations en- countered by each. Clinical evaluations, test scores on the MMPI and the Mooney problem checklist were related to subjects’ manifestations of illness dur- 98 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES ing two epidemics of acute respiratory disease during the study period; wide differences were found both in type and severity of illness experienced. 415. HINKLE, L. E., PLUMMER, N., AND WHITNEY, L. H. “The Con- tinuity of Patterns of Illness and the Prediction of Future Health.” ] Occup Med, 3:417—423, September 1961. 416. HODGE, R. W. “The Status Consistency of Occupational Groups.” Amer Soc R, 27(3) : 336— 343, June 1962. 417. HOGGER, D. “Occupational Health Services: Switzerland.” World Med ], 7: 193, May 1960. 418. HOLLAND, E. D. “Occupational Health Services: A Challenge to the World Medical Association.” World Med ], 72187—188, May 1960. 419. HOKANSON, J. E. AND BURGESS, M. “The Effects of Status: Type of Frustration and Aggression on Vascular Processes.” ] Abnorm Soc Psychol, 65: 232, April 1962. Experimental frustration conditions followed by either opportunity or no op- portunity to express verbal aggression to the frustrator, (introduced in some sit— uations as a high status person and, in others, as low status) were variables for 84 college student subjects. It was found that increase in vascular indices resulted from frustrations, but that these returned to normal after aggressive ex- pressions to a low-status frustrator. Both lack of opportunity to express ag- gression and expression to a high status frustrator failed to reduce the eleva- tions. 420. HOLLINGSHEAD, A. B., ELLIS, R., AND KIRBY, E. “Social Mobility and Mental Illness.” Amer Social R, 19:577—584, October 1954. A study of mentally ill persons in both lower and middle classes indicated large discrepancies between subjects’ oc- cupational and educational achieve- ments and their aspirations. The relation of these frustrations to schizophrenia and neurosis were found to be significant factors. See entry No. 421. 421. HOLLINGSHEAD, A. B., AND RED- LICH, F. C. Social Class and Men- tal Illness. John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1958. 422. HOLLINGSHEAD, A. B., AND RED- LICH, F. C. “Social Mobility and Mental Illness.” Amer ] Prychiat, 112: 179—185, September 1955. 423. HOLLINGSHEAD, A. B., AND RED- LICH, F. C. “Social Stratification and Psychiatric Disorders.” Amer Sociol R, 18: 163—169, April 1953. 424. HOLLIS, M. D. “Dynamic Im- pact of Advancing Technology on Environment and Health.” Public Health Rept, 712436, 1956 425. HOMANs, G. C. “The Strategy of Industrial Sociology.” Amer ] Social, 542330-337, January 1949. 426. Hosaurz, B. F., AND MOORE, W. E., editors. “Industrialization and Society.” Proceedings of the Chicago Conference on Social Im- plications of Industrialization and Technical Change, September 1960. International Social Science Coun- cil, UNESCO, 1963. 427. HOSLETT, S. D., editor. Human Factors in Management. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1946. This volume is a selected anthology of articles and excerpts from books by OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 99 authors with varying experience and background. 428. HUGHES, E. C. “Institutions in Process,” in Principles of Sociology, Lee, A. M., editor. Barnes & No- ble, New York, 1946 (revised 1951). 429. HUGHES, E. C. Men and Their Work. The Free Press, Glencoe, Ill., 1958. 430. HUMBER, W. J. “Psychologists in Administration: Major Factors Affecting Organizational Health.” Personnel Psychol, 13:263—275, 1960. In our society, the primary source of satisfaction is one’s job, and job satis- faction requires identification with an organization of some kind. The author outlines what is needed in order to have a healthy organization, and what em- ployees need to obtain adequate job satisfaction. 431. HUSE, E. F. AND TAYLOR, E. K. “Reliability of Absence Measures.” ] Appl Psychol, 462159—160, 1962. 432. HUTTE, H. A. “Experiences in Studying Social-Psychological Structures in Industry.” Hum Re- lat, 2: 185—192, April 1949. 433. HYDE, R. W. AND KINGSLEY, L. V. “Studies in Medical Sociology: The Relations of Mental Disorders to the Community Socio-Economic Level.” New England ] Med, 231: 5434548, 1944. 434. HYSLOP, F. L. AND GAFAGER, W. M. Bibliography of Occupational Health—19094953. Public Health Bibliography Series No. 9. Public Health Service Publication NO. 300. US Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 1954. 435. ICHHEISER, G. “On Certain Conflicts in Occupational Life.” Occup Psychol, 142107—111, 1940. 436. INDUSTRIAL MEDICINE AND SUR- GERY. “Expanding Facilities for Occupational Health: University of Michigan.” Industr Med Surg, 28:450—452, October 1959. 437. INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS News. The Dollars and Sense of Human Relations in Industry, With 101 Check Point: for Manpower Man- agement. Industrial Relations News, New York, 1960. 438. INKELES, A. “Industrial Man: The Relation of Status to Experi- ence, Perception and Value.” Amer ] Social, 66:1—31, 1960. In a review of studies of different na- tions, negative relationship between status and mental illness is found. However, in the study of Italian man- agers and “free professionals” (two high status groups), the lowest percentage of “happy people,” but also lowest per- centage of persons reporting life to be full Of pain and disillusionment were reported. 439. INKELES, A. AND LEVINSON, D. J. “The Personal System and the Sociocultural System in Large Scale Organizations.” Sociometry, 26 (2) :217—229, June 1963. The author discusses the need for a comprehensive, integrated theoretical framework as a basis for analyzing the individual personality, the organization and their interrelations, and proposed variables for analysis. 440. INTERNATIONAL ERGONOMICS ASSOCIATION. “Proceedings of First International Congress on Er- gonomics.” Ergonomics, 5(1):l— 328, 1961. 100 Fifty-one papers are presented in four general sections on speed of work and its relation to physiological reaction to work and environment for older people, evaluation of work in ergonomic terms, including job analysis, manpower man- agement and computer design, and 21 miscellaneous group of papers dealing with vibration, earnings and social fac— tors. 441. IRVING, J. G. AND ORMROD, J. K. “The Value of a Health Service to the Insurance Company.” Pro- ceedings of Medical Section, Amer- ican Life Convention, 47:44—57. Chicago, 111., 1959. 442. IRWIN, D. A. “The Role of the Employer in the Health of the Worker.” Phys Theo R, 40:799— 801, November 1960. 443. ISMAIL, S. F. “The Handi- capped in the Nation’s Economy.” Indian I Soc Work, 20(4): 102— 103, March 1960. 444. JACKSON, E. F. “Status Con- sistency and Symptoms of Stress.” Amer Sociol R, 27:269—480, August 1962. 445. JACO, E. G. Social Epidemi- ology of Mental Disorders. Russell Sage Foundation, New York, 1960. Presents data on mental disorders, in- cluding age, sex, subcultural differen- tials, migration, marital status, and oc- cupation. Compiled from the files of psychiatrists in private practice, this monograph reports the results of a comprehensive research study. 446. JAconsoN, E. “Some Effects of Automation on Industrial and Cler- ical Workers.” Industr Med Surg, 32(6): 216—217, June 1963. Two studies are reviewed, dealing with automation in an automobile en- OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH; NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES gine plant and an insurance company. Workers were interviewed who had re- quested a change to the automated work situation in the automobile engine plant, and insurance company employees com- pleted questionnaires. It was noted that the reaction perceived was not to the change itself, but the cf‘ICCts the change had on the employees’ welfare. 447. JACOBY, G. A. “Challenges Ahead in Industrial Health.” Arch Indurtr Health, 21 :282—286, March 1960. 448. JAI—IODA, M. Current Concepts of Positive Mental Health. Basic Books, New York, 1958. 449. JAHODA, M. “The Meaning of Psychological Health.” Soc Case— work, 34:349—354, 1953. 450. Laws, I. L. “Decisional Con- flicts: A Theoretical Analysis.” ] Conflict Resolut, 3(1) 26—27, March 1959. As a basis for analyzing the psycho- logical causes and consequences of de- cisional conflicts (“opposing tenden- cies within an individual which inter— fere with a decision”), the roles of Pres- ident Wilson and Count Bernstorfl prior to the United States entering World War I are examined. A scheme is de- veloped to represent the main factors: Variations in anticipated consequences and sources of motivation, as well as factors determining resolution. Re- search questions arising from the an- alysis are cited. 451. JANNEY, E. “Company Presi- dents Look at Their Successors.” Harv Bms R, 32 :45—53, 1954. 452. JANNEY, E. dents Look at Themselves.” 3312: R, 30:59—70, 1952. “Company Presi- Harv OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 453. JACQUES, E. Equitable Payment. John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1961. Arising from extensive work with the Glacier Metal Co., as well as data from five different types of businesses, Dr. Jacques, a psychiatrist, has observed the behavior of individuals and groups be- fore, during, and after employment. He has developed a theory about the condi- tions, psychological and economic, sur- rounding the allocation of work to indi- viduals and the distribution of economic rewards for that work, which will pro- vide dynamic equilibrium within the in- dividual and society. The symptoms of disequilibrium (among individuals) and social malaise and instability in society are also discussed, as are instruments for measurement which he has devel- oped. 454. JACQUES, E. Measurement of Responsibility. Harvard University Press, Cambridge, Mass, 1956. 455. JACQUES, E. “Some Principles of Organization of a Social Therapeu- tic Institution.” ] Soc Issues, 3:4— 10, spring 1947. 456. JACQUES, E. “Standard Earning Progression Curves.” Hum Relat, 11:167—190, May 1958. A number of standard earning pro- gression curves were used as a technique to examine individual progress in work. Job satisfaction or failure was related to the curve and correlation between per- cent of deviation from the curve and subsequent feelings or actions were re- corded. 457. JARRARD, L. E. “Empathy: The Concept and Industrial Applica- tions.” Personnel Psych, 9(2): 157—168, 1956. 458. JASINSKI, F. J. of Organizational Behavior.” sonnel, 36 : 60—67, 1959. “The Dynamics Per- 101 The various and often conflicting fac- tors influencing the interactions of peo- ple in a common work setting are dis- cussed from an anthropologist’s view- point. Roles and expectations are outlined in addition to the organiza- tional framework. Implications for management are cited. 459. JEFFRYS, 31., BROTHERSTON, J. H., AND CARTWRIGHT, A. “Con- sumption of Medicines on a Work- ing-Class Housing Estate.” Brit ] Prev Soc Med, 14:64—76, April 1960. 460. JEFFRYS, M. AND Woon, C. H. “A Survey of Small Factories.” Brit ] Industr Med, 17: 10—24, Jan- uary 1960. 461. JENKINS, I. D. “Management Looks at Industrial Medicine.” Harrison Radiator Division, General Motors Corp, Jan. 16, 1951. 462. JENKINS, W. O. “A Review of Leadership Studies with Particular Reference to Military Problems.” Psychol Bull, 44: 54—79, 1947. 463. JENNINGS, E. E. The Execu- tive: Autocrat, Bureaucrat, Demo- crat. Harper and Row, New York, 1962. 464. JEPHCOTT, P., SEEAR, N., AND SMITH, J. H. Married Women Working. George Allen and Un- win, London, England, 1962. The Humanities Press, New York. A study of an English biscuit factory which attempted to recruit workers, mainly married women, through estab- lishing four part-time shifts, found high costs in turnover, absenteeism, and training. The motivations of the wom- en employees, and effects on their chil- dren were investigated. 102 465. JOHNSON, A. N. “Occupa- tional Health in North Carolina: History and Problems.” Arch En- viron Health, 2:139—143, February 1961. 466. JOHNSON, H. L. “The Occupa- tional Health Program in North Carolina: Role of the State Med- ical Society.” Arch Environ Health, 3: 11—13, July 1961. 467. JOHNSON, O. J. “Public Health and Medical Relationship in In- dustrial Health.” Amer ] Public Health, 32:1157, 1942. 468. JOHNSON, R. A. AND HILL, W. A. “Management’s Dilemma: The Professional Employee.” Cali- fornia Mgmt R, 5(3) :37—45, spring 1963. Professional employees are the fastest growing group of workers in the labor force, as well as a “scarce commodity.” Despite their relatively higher education and status, research indicates that, in general, they are frustrated and dis- satisfied. Thus, management must un- derstand their special needs, primarily for love, esteem, and self-actualization, and establish a cooperative, professional work environment to maximize their needed contributions. 469. JOHNSON, R. W. “Human Re- lations in Modern Business.” Harv Bsns R, 27:521—541, September 1949. 470. JOHNSON, W. G. “Adapting for the Handicapped.” Supervis- ion, 25(1) :10—11, January 1963. In the early days so many of the in- dustrial operations called for strength and stamina that employers formed the habit of thinking in terms of “able bodied” when recruiting factory per- sonnel. Many employers employing the OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES handicapped now report their safety record is superior to that of so-called unimpaired workers, possibly because the necessity to put forth extra effort to compensate for physical deficiencies has developed the attitude of positive thinking which is the key to accident prevention. 471. JOHNSTONE, R. T. “Occupa- tional Medicine: The Captive Spe- cialty.” ] Occup Med, 32283—287, June 1961. 472. JONES, D. Arbitration and In- dustrial Ditcipline. ] Occup Med, 3 : 283—287, June 1961. This research report answers the question “What happens when an em- ployee is returned to his job by an arbitrator?” Nineteen cases of dis- charge-reinstatement were examined to discover the effect of the return on work group morale, union strategy, company disciplinary policy, supervisory authority, and individual performance. Findings show that none of the unsatis- factory workers reinstated developed into a satisfactory employee. Thus, careful examination should be made of the offender’s background before the penalty is assessed. 473. JONES, E. S. “The Employee’s Responsibility for Personal Health.” Industr Med Surg, 25(10) :477, October 1956. 474. JONES, J. A. “The General Practitioner and Industrial Health.” Practitioner, 184: 93— 102, January 1960. 475. JONES, M. Social Psychiatry. Tavistock, London, England, 1952. 476. JONES, M. R., editor. “Ne- braska Symposium on Motivation, 1955.” University of Nebraska Press, Lincoln, Nebr., 1955. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 477. JOURNAL OF THE AMERICAN MEDICAL ASSOCIATION. “Is There a Doctor in the Plant?” ] Amer Med Ass, 163(13) :1139, March 1957. 478. JOURNAL OF THE AMERICAN MEDICAL ASSOCIATION. “Occupa- tional Health Programs, Scope, Ob- jectives, and Functions.” ] Amer Med Ass, 174(5), October 1960. The editorial cites the trend toward occupational health programs in more and more industries and the need for continued expansion of such programs. 479. KAHN, R. L. Leadership Pat- terns and Organizational Efi‘ective- ness. McGill University, Montreal, Canada, 1955. 480. KAHN, R. L. “Human Rela- tions on the Shop Floor,” in Hu- man Relations and Modern Man- agement, Hugh-Jones, E. M., editor. North Holland Publishing Co., Amsterdam, Holland, 1958. 481. KAHN, R. L AND CANNELL, C. F. The Dynamics of Interview- ing. John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1957. 482. KAHN, R. L. “The Meaning of Work.” Industr Med Surg, 32(6) 2 210—211, June 1963. Examination of a nationwide sample indicates that 80 percent of men would continue work, despite absence of need, to avoid boredom and lack of occupa- tion. Both management and unions de- fine work negatively as something people would not do unless they have to; little effort is thus devoted to positive facts in job satisfaction. Fifty percent of the respondents defined work negatively, 20 percent defined it as productive or im- 103 portant, eight percent as exertion, and others as scheduled, routinized activity. 483. KAHN, R. L. AND FRENCH, J. R. P. “A Summary and Some Tentative Conclusions.” ] Soc Is- sues, 18(3) :122—127, July 1962. Findings from the Institute for Social Research (University of Michigan) studies consistently show relationships between industrial environmental stresses and individual mental health. Such stresses studied were: low status, man- agement responsibility, technological change, role conflict, role ambiguity, temporal requirements of shift work, threats to self-esteem in the appraisal system, and others. The authors em- phasize the need to develop a theory of personality in terms congruent with the “language” of organization and to study the processes which intervene be- tween industrial environment and in- dividual health. 484. KAHN, R. L., WOLFE, D. M., SNOEK, J. D., AND QUINN, R. P. Organizational Stress: Studies in Role Conflict and Ambiguity. John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1964. 485. KAHN, R. L., WOLFE, D. M., SNOEK, J. D., AND QUINN, R. P. “Adjustment to Role Conflict and Ambiguity in Organizations: Fac- tors Involved in Role Conflict and Ambiguity,” in Social Role: Read- ings in Theory and Application, Thomas, E. J. & Biddle, B. J., edi- tors. John ‘ Wiley & Sons, New York, 1964. 486. KAHNE, H. R., RYDER, C. M., SNEGIREFF, L. 5., AND WYSHAK, G. “Age and Absenteeism.” Arch In- dustr Health, 15: 134—137, February 1957. 104 487. KAMMER, A. G. “Manpower: An Introduction.” Industr Med Surg, 28:547, December 1959. 488. KARN, H. W. AND VON HALLER, G. B. Readings in Industrial and Business Psychology. McGraw- Hill, New York, 1962. Eleven major areas of personnel man- agement are covered in this collection of 58 articles drawn primarily from psychology and management journals. Among the authors represented are William Foote Whyte, Mason Haire, Norman Maier, Chris Argyris, Douglas McGregor, and Dalton McFarland. The personnel subjects given attention are: motivation and morale, attitudes and perceptions, personnel selection training, evaluation of job performance, worker efficiency and working condi- tions, accidents and safety, engineering psychology, industrial leadership, or- ganizational behavior, and labor-man- agement relations. In addition five articles concerning marketing and consumer research and an introductory article on the psychologist in industry are included. 489. KARSON, M. “The Psychology of Trade Union Membership.” Ment Hyg, 41(1) :87—93, January 1957. 490. KARVONEN, M. J. AND RAUTA- HARJU, P. M. “Cardiovascular Studies of Lumberjacks.” ] Occup Med, 3:49-53, 1961. 491. KASK, S. V. AND FRENCH, J. R. P. “The Effects of Occupational Status on Physical and Mental Health.” ] Soc Issues, 18(3) :67— 89, July 1962. An attempt to “fill in the causal gaps between the objective social en- vironment and the health of the indi— vidual” is based on a survey of the re- search relating to indices of mental and OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES physical health or illness with a psycho- logical rclated etiology. Findings are interpreted in terms of the intervening variable of psychological meaning to the individual. To test this theory an on- going study of two large manufacturing companies is reported. (Subjects are 4,171 blue-collar workers, 612 super- visory employees, and 385 second level nonsupervisors in one company; 198 supervisors at various levels, foreman and below, and 527 nonsupervisors within 32 skill levels in the second com- pany.) Health is measured through diagnoses and number of dispensary visits. Relationships between skill level (and pay) and indices of health have been found, and an early conclusion is that the “index of health is multiply determined.” 492. KATES, S. L. “Rorschach Re- sponses Related to Vocational In- terests and Job Satisfaction.” Psy- chol Monogr, 64(3) :1—34, 1950. 493. KATz, D. “Employee Groups: What Motivates Them and How They Perform.” Advanc Mgmt, 14: 119—124, September 1949. 494. KATZ, D. AND KAHN, R. L. “Some Recent Findings in Human- Relations Research in Industry.” Readings in Social Psychology, Swanson, Newcomb & Hartley, edi- tors. Holt, New York, 1952. 495. KATz, D. Productivity, Super- vision and Morale Among Railroad Workers. Institute for Social Re- search, Ann Arbor, Mich., 1951. 496. KATz, F. E. AND MARTIN, H. W. “Career Choice Processes.” Soc Forces, 41(2) :149—154, December 1962. It is postulated that there exist pat- terns of career choice which are based on a series of situational decisions which, individually, have no rational connec- OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH; NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES tion with the choice of a particular occupation, but, nonetheless, comprise the process of embarkation upon a career. 497. KATz, R. L. “Toward a More Effective Enterprise.” Harv Bms R, 38(5) 180—102, 1960. Many weaknesses underlie the con- ventional assumption under which most administrators of industrial organiza- tions operate. The result is human problems within the organization. Greater insight into individual motiva- tion, group behavior and leadership is needed for increased productivity and work satisfaction. Insight on the part of the administrator into his own mo- tivation is of equal importance. 498. KATZELL, R. A. “Industrial Psychology.” Ann R Psychol, 8: 237—268, 1957. The author reviews current theory and studies in the area, pointing out major emphases and trends as well as research needs. “Organizational effec- tiveness,” as one research area, is seen to have been studied mainly through measures of performance and satisfac- tion, to the neglect of other influencing variables. 499. KEATINGE, G. F. “The Psysi- cian in Industry.” Trans Ass In- dustr Med Oflicerr, 11:4—14, July 1961. 500. KEHOE, R. A. “Occupational Medicine and Public Health.” Public Health R, 762645—649, August 1961. 501. KEHOE, R. A. “A New Look at Preventive Medicine in Ameri- can Industry.” ] Amer Med Arr, 175(5) :435—438, Jan. 30, 1960. Medical knowledge and practice has made great advances in development and status but needs to keep abreast of fast-changing social conditions, includ- f776—430~—Gfi——S 105 ing the “potentialities for harm that lie in the impact of technology and in- dustry on man.” Education in occupa- tional medicine needs greater emphasis. Trends and needs are outlined. 502. KELLER, M. AND EFRON, V. “The Prevalence of Alcoholism.” Quart ] Stud Alcohol, 16(4) :619, December 1955. Statistics on alcoholism and a de- scription of the typical alcoholic in industry are presented. 503. KEMP, W. M. “Human Haz- ards in Industrial Employment.” Occup Med, 5:729—738, June 1948. 504. KENNEDY, J. R., WILLIAMS, D., AND KATZELL, R. A. “Understand- ing the Employee as an Individ- ual.” Public Personnel Associa- tion, Personnel Report No. 614, Chicago, Ill., 1961. 505. KERHOF, A. C. “Some of the Problems of Employment of the Cardiac in Industry.” Industr Med Surg, 29:484—489, October 1960. 506. KERR, C., DUNLOP, J. T. HAR- BISON, F. H., AND MYERS, C. A. Industrialism and Industrial Man: The Problems of Labor and Man- agement Growth. Harvard University Press, Cam- bridge, Mass., 1960. Four labor economists attempt to find “social consistencies” in evidence from many international researches on which to build predications for the fu- ture, based on a survey of process of industrialization from 18th century Britain to the present. 507. KERR, L. E. “A Labor Health Program: Its Development and in Economic 106 Services.” Physical Ther R, 4-0: 805—9, November 1960. 508. KESSLER, H. AND MANNING, G. C. “The Effect of Personal Opinion on Disability Evaluation.” ] Occup Med, 5(9) :411—417, Sep- tember 1963. The authors investigated ratings of extent of disability on workmen as evaluated by a panel of physicians and lawyers, and by an audience of 20 doc- tors and lawyers. Extremely wide dis- parity of opinion of percent disability is noted, in some cases as large as 85 percent difference of opinion. The au- thors feel that people working in a group do not become more accurate in their evaluations, but become mutually influenced in terms of expediency and personality factors, which may have no relation to physical injury. 509. KESTER, J. M., BECKETT, D. E., AND SCOGGIN, M. G. “Turnover, Absence, and Transfer Rates as In- dicators of Employee Dissatisfac- tion with Repetitive Work.” In- dustr Ca” Labor Relat R, 15:21—32, October 1961. This empirical study was conducted in two large midwestern manufacturing companies to determine if such rates can be used as indicators of employee dissatisfaction with specialized, repeti- tive work. No correlation (as measured by above three factors) was found. Other factors seem to influence satisfac- tion more strongly but it was impossible to sort these out. 510. KING, S. H. Perceptions of Ill- ness and Medical Practice. Russell Sage Foundation, New York, 1962. This is a textbook for students and workers in the health professions con- cerned with social science thought and research. Part I is a short course in the behavioral sciences. Parts II to IV present an overview of behavioral sci- OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES ence theory and research results in the study of illness and medical practice. 511. KINNANE, J. AND PABLE, M. “Family Background and Work Value Orientation.” ] Counsel Psychol, 9(4):320—325, Winter 1962. Self-evaluation questionnaires cover- ing biographical data and work values were administered to 121 high school juniors between the ages of 16 and 18. Scores from each inventory were corre- lated in an attempt to verify six hypoth- eses, with success in five of the six. Parental emphases on materialism, or social and cultural activities, and/or artistic and scientific activities seem to develop similar values in offspring which affect their values in later work ex- periences. 512. KIRK, F. J., FARMER, E., AND CHAMBERS, E. G. “Tests for Ac- cident Proneness.” Government Publications—Medical Research Council, Industrial Health Research Board. H. M. Stationery Office, London, England, 1933. 513. KLEIN, M. “Our Adult World and its Roots in Infancy.” Hum Relat, 12(4) :291—303, 1959. The influence of infantile develop- ment on adult personality is described, with examples of the reenactment of relationship to parent or sibling within the superior subordinate relationship. 514. KLEM, M. C., MCKIEVER, M. E, AND LEAR, W. J. Industrial Health and Medical Programs. U.S. Gov- ernment Printing Office, Washing- ton, D.C., 1950. 515. KLEM, M. C. AND MCKIEVER, M. F. Small Plant Health and Medical Programs. U.S. Govern- ment Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 1952. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 516. KLEM, M. C. AND MCKrEVER, M. F. Management and Union Health and Medical Programs. Public Health Service Publication No. 329. US Government Print- ing Office, Washington, D.C., 1953. 517. KLUCKHOHN, C., MURRAY, H., AND SCHNEIDER, D. M., editors. Personality in Nature, Society, and Culture. Alfred A. Knopf, New York, 1953. The editors have included papers to “illustrate the range and variety of work” in the area of the individual’s relation to his society as an attempt to discover relationships between incidence of mental illnesses, particular personality patterns, standards Of normality, and re- sponse to change, etc., and particular social norms or particular biological facts. Contributors are primarily psy- chiatrists, psychologists, and anthro- pologists. 518. KLUOMAN, S. F. “Emotional Stability and Level of Aspiration.” ] Gen Psychol, 381101—118, Jan- uary 194-8. The relationship between attainment and aspiration and emotional stability was investigated in a group of 30 sub- jects. Findings indicated the more emotionally stable tended to be flexible, to shift goals in response to previous attainments, and to have closer approxi- mation of attainment and aspiration on contrived tasks. 519. KNOTT, L. W. AND DOYLE, H. N. “World Health and Industrial Medicine.” ] Occup Med, 3:1—6, January 1961. 520. KNOWLES, W. H. Human Re- lations in Industry: Research and Concepts. Institute of Industrial Relations, University of California, 107 Berkeley, Calif. Series 6, No. 117, 1958. 521. KOEKBAKKER, J. “Mental Health and Group Tensions.” WHO Bull, 13(4) :543, 1955. 522. KORNHAUSER, A., DUBIN, R., AND Ross, A., editors. Industrial Conflict. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1954. Chapters by 39 authors include dis- cussions of the organization and leader- ship of groups in conflict, social and economic influences, and social control of industrial conflicts. 523. KORNHAUSER, W. Scientists in Industry: Conflict and Accommo- dation. Institute of Industrial Re- lations, University of California, Berkeley, Calif., 1962. 524. KORTE, E. M. A Handbook of Mental Health for Teachers and Prospective Teachers. Pan Press, Hollywood, Calif., 1957. 525. KOTINSKY, R. AND WITMER, H., editors. Community Programs for Mental Health: Theory, Practice, Evaluation. Harvard University Press, Cambridge, Mass, 1955. 526. KRAMER, M. “A Discussion of the Concepts of Incidence and Pre- valence as Related to Epidemic Studies of Mental Disorders.” Amer ] Public Health, 47:826—840, July 1957. 527. KRONENBERG, M. H. “Progress in the Teaching of Industrial Med- icine in American Medical Col- leges.” Industr Med, 16:387—389, August 194-7. 528. KRONENBERG, MORSE, K. M. H. AND “Women in Industry,” 108 in Principles and Practices of In- dustrial Medicine, Wampler, F. J., editor. William Wood, Baltimore, Md., 1943. 529. KROUT, M. H. “A Note on Dunham’s Contribution to the Ecology of the Functional Psycho- ses.” Amer Sociol R, 3:209—212, 1938. 530. KRUSE, H. D., editor. Integrat- ing the Ap/Jroaches to [Mental Dis- ease. Two Conferences Held Un- der the Auspices of the Committee on Public Health of the New York Academy of Medicine. Hoeber- Harper, New York, 1957. 531. KUBIE, L. S. “Some Unsolved Problems of the Scientific Career, Part 1.” Amer Sci, 41(4):596— 613, 1953. 532. KUBIE, L. S. “Some Unsolved Problems of the Scientific Career, Part 2.” Amer Sci, 42(1):104-— 112, 1954. 533. KYTE, A. L. “Management In— fluence: Is it Legitimate?” Mgmt Record, 24(12) :21—24, December 1962. This article tabulates a survey of 812 respondents from the School of Indus- trial Management of MIT including la- bor leaders, students, MIT executives and company executives, designed to re- veal their impression of the degree to which a company may legitimately in- fluence its employees. A 55-item ques- tionnaire describing behavior and atti- tudes ranging from highly job-related to highly personal was utilized. 534:. KYTE, A. L. “What Personnel Directors Think Employees Think.” Mgmt Record, 23(12) :8—16, De- cember 1961. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES A mail questionnaire to 40 top per- sonnel directors from the National In- dustrial Conference Board asked the respondents to rate their company and other companies. While answers of the 30 who filled out the questionnaire varied widely, all reflected at least some concern about employee apathy and non- involvcment and most attributed this to management methods. 535. LAMME, L. “Labor’s Loud Voice in the Health Care Field.” Gen Pract, 232125—139, June 1961. 536. LANDSBERGER, H. A. Haw- thorne Revisited. Cornell Univer— sity Press, Ithaca, N.Y., 1958. 537. LANGE, C., CAMPBELL, V., KAT- TER, R., AND SHANLEY, F. J. “A Study of Leadership in Army In- fantry Platoons.” Hum Resources Res Ofiice Res Rept., 1:64, 1958. 538. LAROCHE, L. P. “The Missile Nurses at Cape Canaveral.” Amer ] Nurs, 63:54—58, January 1963. 539. LAUER, D. J. “Today’s Indus- trial Physician and In-Plant Health Programs.” Arch Industr Health, 21 : 296—300, March 1960. 540. LAWRENCE, P. R., BAILEY, J. C., KA'rz, R. L., SEILER, J. A., ORTH, C. D., CLARK, J. V., BARNES, L. B., AND TURNER, A. N. Organiza- tional Behavior and Administra- tion: Cases, Concepts, and Research Findings. Dorsey Press, Home- wood, Ill., 1961. The book of material used in the ad- ministrative practice course at Harvard Business School is centered on the be- havior of people as members of groups and organizations, rather than on their unique individual characteristics. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 541. LAWSHE, C. H. Industrial Relations. Hill, New York, 1953. 542. LAWSON, J. J. “Rehabilitation of the Industrial Patient.” ] Ten- nessee Med A53, 53:49—54, Feb- ruary 1960. 543. LEAKE, W. H., GUYMER, R. F., BIDSTRUP, P. L., AND PINSENT, R. .l- “Discussion on the Contribu- tion of the General Practitioner and the Industrial Medical Officer to the Health of the Community.” Proc Royal Society Med, 52:627— 636, August 1959. 544. LEAVITT, H. I. Psychology. University of Chicago Press, Chicago, Ill., 1964. 545. LEAVITT, H. I. The Social Sci- ence of Organizations: Four Per- Prentice-Hall, New Psychology of McGraw- Managerial spectives. York, 1963. 546. LEAVITT, H. _I. “Some Effects of Certain Communication Pat- terns on Group Performance. ] Abnorm Soc Psychol, 46:38—50, 1951. 547. LEAVITT, H. J. “Unhuman Or- ganizations.” Harv 85115 R, 40 (4) :90—98, August 1962. The author advocates viewing large organizations as differentiated sets of subsystems rather than as unified wholes with the recognition that many subjects of the organization may perform many different kinds of tasks, and therefore may call for many different kinds of managerial practices. 548. LEAVITT, H. I. AND BASS, B. M. “Organizational Psychology.” Ann R Psychol, 15:371—398, 1964. 109 Although the trend in the past dec- ade has been interdisciplinary, few “speak the same language” or “read the same journals.” Yet the static correlational surveys are being replaced with dynamic, systems-oriented ap- proaches to psychological problems in industry, focusing on interaction be- tween organizational and human be- havior. Publications reflect a strong, affective interpersonal slant. Recent writings in the relevant fields are re- viewed. (Extensive bibliography.) 549. LEBO, D. “Setting and Main- taining an Effective Emotional At- mosphere.” Adult Lead, 11(2) : 34—36, 60—62, June 1962. A behavioral definition of “mentally healthy persons” and, conversely, the symptomatic roles adopted by persons which might hinder work of a group are presented to aid discussion leaders. Suggestions are given for leaders’ be- havior to implement a “healthy” group. 550. LEGGETT, I. C. “Uprootedness and Working-Class Consciousness.” Amer ] Sociol, 68(6) :682—692, May 1963. Interviews with 375 blue-collar work- ers in Detroit, Mich., representative of several particular ethnic districts, indi- cated a high level of class conscious- ness “partially because they bring with them few skills and experiences that might help them to deal effectively with their new environment.” They are thus subject to exploitation and blocked up- ward mobility, which can create solidi- fication of grievances and class con- sciousness. Bibliography items from many countries are described. 551. LEHMAN, H. C. “The Age De- crement in Outstanding Scientific Creativity.” Amer Psychol, 15(2) : 128—134, February 1960. 552. LEHMAN, H. C. AND WITTY, P. A. “Further Study of the Social 110 Status of Occupations.” ] Educ Social, 5(1) :101—112, September 1931. 553. LEIGHTON, A. Human Rela- tions in a Changing World. Dut- ton, New York, 1949. 554. LEIGHTON, A. My Name is Legion. Basic Books, New York, 1959. 555. LEIGHTON, A. H. AND HUGHES, J. M. “Cultures as a Causative of Mental Disorder.” Milbank Mem Fund Q, 39(3) :446—448, July 1961. 556. LEIGHTON, D. C. “The Distri- bution of Psychiatric Symptoms in a Small Town.” Amer ] Psychiat, 112: 716, March 1956. 557. LEMKAU, P. V. AND PASAMA- NICK, B. “Problems in Evaluation of Mental Health Programs.” Amer ] Orthopsychiat, 27:55—58, 1957. 558. LEMKAU, P., TIETZE, C., AND COOPER, M. Mental Hygiene in Public Health. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1955. 559. LEMKAU, P., TIETzE, C., AND COOPER, M. “Mental Health Tasks in General Health Programs.” Amer ] Public Health, 47: 797—801, July 1959. 560. LEMKAU, P., TIETzE, C., AND COOPER, M. “A Survey of Statis- tical Studies on the Prevalance and Incidence of Mental Disorders in Sample Populations.” Public Health Rept, 58: 1909—1927, Dec. 31, 1943. 561. LEONE, L. P. AND JOHNSTON, H. L. “Agricultural Migrants and Public Health.” Public Health Rept, 69: 1, 1954. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 562. LEPPER, M. H. AND OSTFELD, A. “Preventive Medicine and Mental Health.” Arch Environ Health, 7(3) :331—336, September 1963. Studies of hypertension in patients with different diseases indicates major sociopsychological factors in etiology and point up the need for relating the field of mental health with preventive medi- cine, in order to implement control of chronic and acute physical disease. 563. LESIEUR, F. G. The Scanlon Plan. John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1958. 564. LEVINE, M. Psychotherapy in Afea'ical Practice. MacMillan, New York, 1949. 565. LEVINE, S. AND WHITE, P. E. “Exchange as a Conceptual Frame- work for the Study of Interorganiza- tional Relationships.” Admin Sci Q, 5(4) :583—601, March 1961. Relationships among community health and welfare agencies are de- scribed as a voluntary exchange system, in order to obtain scarce elements. Fac- tors related to these interdependencies are formulated. 566. LEWIN, K. Dynamic Theory of Personality. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1935. 567. LEWIN, K. Field Theory in S0- cial Science. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1951. 568. LEWIN, Conflicts. York, 1948. 569. LEWIN, K., DEMBo, T., FES- TINGER, L. AND SEARS, P. “Level of Aspiration,” in Personality and the Behavior Disorders. The Ron- ald Press, New York, 1944. K. Resolving Social Harper & Brothers, New OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 570. LEWIS, A. “Health as a Social Concept.” Brit ] Social, 4:109— 124, 1953. 571. LEWIS, A. “Social Aspects of Psychiatry.” Edinburgh Med ], 58: 214—230, 231—247, 1951. 572. LEWIS, C. E. “The Epidemio- logy of Nutritional Problems: Study of an Industrial Population.” ] Occup Med, 5(4):175—181, April 1963. Case histories of 1,892 employees seeking weight control help in the medical department of a large industry are reviewed. Psychosocial factors which involve the employee in his ther- apeutic program are seen to have high relative importance with physical and nutritional factors, and therefore med- ical and psychiatric evaluations are needed. 573. LEWIS, C. E. “Get the Message Through.” ] Occup Med, 5:58, January 1963. 574. LEWISOHN, S. A. Human Leadership in Industry. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1945. 575. LIEF, A. The Common Sense Psychiatry of Dr. Adolf Meyer. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1948. 576. LXFSON, S. “The Role of Labor in Community Health Education.” Amer ] Public Health, 47:877, July 1957. 577. LIKERT, R. “Developing Pat- terns in Management.” American Management Association, Inc., New York, 1955. General Man- agement Series No. 178. The “scientific management” move- ment, the “human relations trend,” and studies conducted by Institute for Social Research, University of Michi- 111 gan, are described. An approach inte- grating the human relations view of motivation with concern for produc~ tion is proposed. 578. LIKERT, R. “Motivational Di- mentions of Administration,” in America’s Manpower Crisis. Pub- lic Administration Service, Chi- cago, Ill., 1952. 579. LIKERT, R. New Patterns of Alanagement. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1961. Social science research has revealed that high-producing managers use different leadership principles and practices from those whose perform- ance is poor. The book presents a theory of organization based on these findings, and recommends considering “social costs and audits,” within the total organizational context. 580. LIKERT, R. AND HAYES, S. P., editors. Some Applications of Be- havioural Research. The UNES- CO Publication Center, U.S.A., New York, 1957. 581. LIND, A. R. “Determination of Environmental Limits for Every- day Industrial Work.” Industr Med Surg, 29:515—518, November 1960. 582. LINDEMANN, E. “The Wellesley Project for the Study of Certain Problems in Community Mental Health,” in Interrelation Between the Social Environment and Psy- chiatric Disorders. Millbank Me- morial Fund, New York, 1953. 583. LINDGREN, H. C. Aflective Leadership in Human Relations. Hermitage House, New York, 1954-. 584. LINE, W. “Human Relations in Industry: A Systematic Challenge.” 112 Brit ] Med Psychol, 24:42-48, 1951. 585. LINN, E. L. “Patients’ Socio- economic Characteristics and Re- lease From a Mental Hospital.” Amer ] Sociol, 65(3):280—286, November 1959. 586. LIPPITT, R. “An Experimental Study of the Effects of Democratic and Authoritarian Group Atmos- pheres,” Studies in Child Welfare. University of Iowa, Ames, Iowa, 1940. 587. LIPSCOMP, W. R. “Epidemi- ological Methods in the Study of Alcoholism.” Amer ] Public Health, 49:327—333, March 1959. 588. LIPSET, S. M. “The Value Patterns of Democracy: A Case Study in Comparative Analysis.” Amer Social R, 28:4, 515—531, Au- gust 1963. The author sees national values as strong influences in the structure and function of organizations, as well as in- dividual perceptions of them, based on similarity of differences among values. Specific values serve as adaptive mecha- nisms for low status persons, while others motivate mobility. The effects are described. 589. LIPSON, S. S. “Health Educa- tion in Industry: Practical Consid- erations for Actual Programs in In- dustry.” Amer ] Public Health, 49:1357—1363, October 1959. 590. LLOY‘D, G. AND MILES, P. M. “Industrial Relations Theses and Dissertations Accepted at Thirty- Eight Universities, July 1, 1955—— June 30, 1956.” Institute of Indus- trial Relations, University of Cali- OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES fornia, Berkeley and Los Angeles, Calif., June 1957. 591. LOCKHART, L. P. “Indus- trialized Man and His Back- ground.” Lancet, 226 : 825—829, 1934. 592. LOTT, G. M. “Emotional First Aid Stations in Industry.” Industr Med, 15:419—422, July 1946. 593. LOWE, C. R. “Smoking Habits Related to Injury and Absenteeism in Industry.” Brit ] Prev Soc Med, 14:57—63, April 1960. Frequency of attendance at first aid room for minor injuries was higher among smokers than for nonsmokers and in- creased fairly regularly with the amount smoked. Absenteeism for medical rea— sons was higher for smokers and in- creased with amount smoked. This was not correlated with nonmedical absen- teeism. These may indicate relation- ships between smoking and chronic bronchitis, peptic ulcer, etc.; and that persons prone to accidents also may be inclined to smoke more heavily for emo- tional reasons. 594. LUONGO, E. P. “Analysis of Ab- senteeism in Industry.” California Med, 91 :348—354, December 1959. 595. Low, E. F. “Health Examina- tion of Industrial Executives.” In- dustr Med, 17:65, February 1948. 596. LYNI), R. S. Knowledge for What? Princeton University Press, 19415. The author describes the differing emphases, goals, and time perspectives of businessmen and workingmen, as in- fluenced by their personal control over their resources and experiences and how it feels psychologically to them. 597. MACDONALD, A. D. “The Ex- ecutive Health Plan of the Royal OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES Victoria Hospital.” Canad Med Ass ], 822593—597, March 1960. 598. MACDIARMID, R. AND HUGS, P. J. “Review of One Month’s Disability Cases in Domestic Refinery.” Med Bull, 11:490—495, October 1957. 599. MACEK, O. “The Responsi- bility of the Doctor to Industry.” World Med ], 8:211—213, May 1961. 600. MACGREGOR, W. B. “Medically Based Job Changes: A Survey of Company-Union Agreements.” In- dustr Med Surg, 29:82—84, Feb- ruary 1960. 601. MACIVER, J. AND REDLICK, F. C. “Pattern of Psychiatric Practice.” Amer ] Psychiat, 115(8) :692—697, February 1959. 602. MACMILLAN, R. H. Automa- tion, Friend or Foe? Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, Eng- land, 1956. 603. MACKWORTH, N. H. “Re- searches on the Measurement of Human Performance.” Govern- Publications—Medical Re- search Council, Industrial Health Research Board, Report No. 268. H. M. Stationery Office, London, England, 1950. 604. MADDEN, J. M. Work Difficult?” (7) :341—344, 1962. A study of reasons given by 37 Air Force noncommissioned officers for dif- ficulty in performing three tasks, resulted in the majority attributing such prob- lems to interpersonal relationships, rather than physical effort. ment “What Makes Personnel J, 41 113 605. MAGNUSON, H. J. “Industrial Health Promotes Family Health.” Personnel Admin, 20(1) 218—22, January—February 1957. 606. MAIER, N. R. F. Psychology in Industry. Houghton, Boston, Mass, 1955. 607. MAIER, N. R. F. AND HAYES, J. J. Creative Management. John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1962. In a discussion of human problems that arise from the interaction of man and organizations, the authors conclude that authority, direction, power, con- flict, disagreement, are necessary factors in organizations, to be used construc- tively, not repressed. Although mana- gers must make the decisions, employees need to be involved. Problem solving and informational conferences are ex- plored as methods. 608. MALINOWSKY, B. “Career Counseling for Retarded Children.” Amer ] Ment Defic, 67(3): 503, November 1962. Findings of six followup studies of mentally retarded Israeli pupils show 60—70 percent gainfully employed. Re- tarded children are not sufficiently ma- ture to make career choice at the time they leave school. Counseling methods and techniques are discussed. 609. MALZBERG, B. Social and Bio- logical Aspeets of Mental Disease. State Hospital Press, Utica, N.Y., 1940. 610. MANCUSO, T. F. “The Rela- tionship of the Occupational En- vironment to Chronic Diseases.” Industr Med Surg, 29(3) :169—172, April 1960. The need for determined, coordinated effort and long-term studies of indus- trial groups exposed to different chem- icals and occupations is discussed. 114 611. MANCUSO, T. F. “Where is the Manpower to Come From?” In- durtr Med Surg, 29: 130—132, March 1950. 612. MANDELBAUM, D. G. “Psychia- try in Military Society.” Hum Org, 13(3) :5—15, fall 1954. 613. MANIs, J. G., BRAWER, M. J., HUNT, C. L., AND KERCHER, L. C. “Validating a Mental Health Scale.” Amer Social R, 28(1): 108—116, February 1963. A study evaluating the question scale used in the midtown Manhattan study concludes that the instrument was valid as a “measure of group differences,” but less accurate in individual diagnosis. They recommend its value to “permit survey studies of random samples of communities, social classes, ethnic groups, and other social units.” 614. MANN, F. AND LIKERT, R. “The Need for Research on the Communication of Research Re- sults.” Hum Org, 11(4):15—19, winter 1952. 615. MANN, F. C. AND NEFF, F. W. Managing Major Change in Orga- nizations. Foundation for Research on Human Behavior, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich., 1961. Four case histories, which emphasize phases in the evolution of a change, in- clude discussions about principles and procedures associated with organiza- tional change. The report stresses the importance of satisfying the needs of the individuals involved. 616. MANN, F. C. AND PELZ, D. C. A Comparison of High and Low Morale Work Groups. Survey Re- search Center, University of Mich- igan, Ann Arbor, Mich., 1948. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH; NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 617. MANN, F. C. AND WILLIAMS, L. K. “Some EHects of the Chang- ing Work Environment in the Ofi‘ice.” ] Soc Issuer, 18(3):90— 101, July 1962. 618. MANN, R. D. “A Review of the Relationships Between Personality and Performance in Small Groups.” Psychol Bull, 5624, July 1959. 619. MARCSON, S. “Organization and Authority in Industrial Re- search.” Soc Forces, 40(1) :72—80, October 1961. 620. MARE, G. D. AND SERGEAN, R. “Two Methods of Studying Changes in Absence with Age.” Occup Prychol, 35(4) :245—253, 1961. Personnel records were analyzed cross- sectionally and longitudinally for absence history of 300 men over the last decade. The objective was to check the assump- tion of the cross-sectional method that age differences contribute to the absen- teeism. An aging effect was found for certified sickness. High absence fre- quency, however, was not age—related. 621. MARX, F. M., editor. Element: of Public Administration. Pren- tice-Hall, New York, 1946. 622. MARROW, A. Making Manage- McGraw-Hill, New ment Human. York, 1958. 623. MATHEWS, B. P. ency: A Complex Problem in Ad- ministration.” Hosp Admin, 7(4) : 21—25, fall 1962. Two theories of administration were analyzed in terms of different assump- tions about human behavior. Consist- ency (either technological or social) lessens an individual’s frustration be- cause he can more adequately choose be- havior patterns. “Inconsist- OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 624. MAULE, H. C. “The Working Environment,” chapter 4, in Mental Health and Human Relations in Industry, Ling, T. M. and Rennie, T. A. C., editors. Paul B. Hoeber, New York, 1955. 625. MASLOW, A. H. “Deficiency Motivation and Growth Motiva- tion,” in Nebraska Symposium on Motivation, Jones, M., editor. Uni- versity of Nebraska, Lincoln, Nebr., 1955. 626. MATARAZZO, J. D. “Comprehen- sive Medicine: A New Era in Med- ical Education.” Hum Org, 14 (1) 24—9, spring 1955. 627. MAYO, E. The Human Prob- lems of an Industrial Civilization. MacMillan Co., New York, 1934. A classic in the field, this is an ac- count of the beginnings of human rela- tions studies in industry, the Western Electric-Hawthorne studies and some conclusions that were drawn from them. 628. MAYO, E. Political Problems of an Industrial Civiliazation. Rout- Iedge and Kegan Paul, London, England, 1949. 629. MAYO, E. The Social Problems of an Industrial Civilization. Harv- ard University Graduate School of Business Administration, Boston, Mass, 1945. 630. MCARDLE, G. P. “Industry and Medicine.” ] Iowa Med Soc, 50: 299—302, June 1960. 631. MCBAIN, W. N. “Noise, the ‘Arousal Hypothesis,’ and Monoto- nous Work.” ] Appl Psychol, 45: 309—317, 1961. 115 Thirty Royal Canadian Air Force per- sonnel were given three basic conditions in four sessions. Susceptibility to hyp- nosis seemed important but findings con- cerning the effects of noise were contra- dictory. “The implications of these findings are discussed in terms of their relation to ‘vigilance’ tasks, and their applicability to personnel selection prac- tice.” 632. MCCAHAN, J. F. “Sickness Ab- senteeism Can be Controlled.” Arch Environ Health, 22203—208, Liarch 1961. 633. McCLELLAND, D. The Achiev- ing Society. Van Nostrand C0,, Princeton, N.J., 1961. A high correlation between high moti- vation toward achievement and eco- nomic success was found in a study of motivational orientations of American college students. Further relationships were seen between child rearing prac- tices (emphasis on self-reliance and self- mastery), a high need to achieve and economic success. On the basis of this and comparisons with historical and other cultural data the author develops a theory in which personal motivational factors are determinants of economic development and growth, unlike the more usual external explanations in the area of economics. 634. MCCORD, C. P. Industrial Hy- giene for Engineers and Managers. Harper Brothers, New York, 1931. 635. MCCORMICK, E. J. “The Use of Research in Personnel Decision Making.” Personnel Admin, 24: 23—32, 1961. 636. MCDOUGALL, W. AND SMITH, M. “The Effects of Alcohol and Some Other Drugs During Normal and F atigued Conditions.” Government Publications-Medical Research Council. Industrial Health Re- 116 search Board, Report No. 56. H. M. Stationery Oflice, London, Eng- land, 1920. 637. MCFARLAND, D. E. Cooperation and Conflict in Personnel Admin- istration. American Foundation for Management Research, New York, 1962. Interviews with 76 top personnel ex- ecutives and 20 Chief executives, with the inclusion of findings from some other studies and theories, form the basis for discussing the role of personnel practi- tioners within the organizational struc- ture. Through certain strategies, adap- tations, and “sociopsychologieal mech- anisms,” stafl" functions, such as person- nel, can develop and define their role and authority. The author feels the “human relations” approach insufficient to “answer the complex problems of management.” 638. MCFARLAND, R. A. “Ergonom- ics: The Study of Man at Work, with Special Reference to the Psy- chological Factors in the Practice of Industrial Hygiene.” Amer Industr Hyg As: ], 24(3) :209—221, May— June, 1963. 639. McFARLAND, R. A. “Psychologi- cal Factors in the Practice of In- dustrial Hygiene.” Transactions of 24th Annual Meeting of American Conference of Government Hygien- ists, Washington, D.C., 1962. The role of experimental psychology in human factors research (ergonomics) in industry is reported. Psychophysics and related disciplines are useful in in- tegrating various sensory and mental functions with the design of instruments, demonstrating how the basic input and response characteristics of the human organism, including visibility and the capabilities and limitations of perform- ance. can be related to the design and operation of equipment. Examples from OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES industries illustrate accidents and re- design cost resulting from neglect of ergonomic principles. 640. MCGEE, L. C. “Trends in Health Programs for Workers in Industry.” Ann Intern Med, 58: 181—188, January 1963. 641. MCGEE, L. C. AND CREGER, J. D. “Gastrointestinal Disease Among Industrial Workers.” ] Amer Med Ass, 120:1367—1369, December 1942. 642. MCGREGOR, D. “Conditions of Effective Leadership in the Indus- trial Organization.” ] Consult Psy- chol, 8(2) 255—63, 1944. 643. McGREGOR, D. “Sickness Ab- sence Among Forestry Workers in the North of Scotland, 1958.” Brit ] Industr Med, 17:310—317, Oc- tober 1960. 644. McGREGOR, D. M. The Human Side of Enterprise. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1960. 645. MCGREGOR, D. M. “The Hu- man Side of Enterprise,” in Studies in Personnel and Industrial Psy- chology, F leishman, E. A. The Dorsey Press, Homewood, Ill., 1961. The hierarchy of needs and how these are related to motivating human effort in organizations is a central considera- tion in the social-industrial milieu. The author reviews and questions assump- tions of the “traditional” organizational control structure and policies. 646. MCGREGOR, D. M., KNICKER- BOCKER, I., HAIRE, M., AND BAVE- LAS, A. “The Consultant Role and Organizational Leadership: Im- proving Human Relations in In- dustry.” ] Soc Issues, 4:4, summer 1948. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 647. MCKINNEY, A., WERNIMONT, R, AND GALITZ, W. “Has Specializa- tion Reduced Job Satisfaction?” Personnel, 39(1) :8—17, January— February 1962. Reviewing studies of worker attitudes under highly specialized repetitive con- ditions, the authors found that some re- searchers concluded that satisfaction is reduced under these conditions, while others concluded that dissatisfaction is related to individual, intrinsic, rather than job factors. Because of such indi- vidual responses, it is proposed that em- phasis be on the individual, rather than such things as job rotation and enlarge- ment. 648. MCLEAN, A. A. “Are Your Employee Communications Effec- tive?” Petroleum Refiner, 35(6): 228—230, June 1956. 649. MCLEAN, A. A. AND WOHLKING, W. “Self-Actualization in Indus- try: Is it Time to Redefine Job Satisfaction?” Industr Med Surg, 31(11):470, November 1962. 650. MCLEAN, H. “Group Tension.” ] Amer Med Wom Ass, 2:479—484, November 1947. 651. MCMECHEN, A. “Daily Visits to the Launching Pads.” Amer ] Nurs, 63:58—59, January 1963. 652. MCMURRAY, R. N. “The Case for the Benevolent Autocracy.” Harv Bms R, 36(1) :82—90, 1958. 653. MCMURRAY, R. N. “Conflicts in Human Values.” Harv Bsns R, 41(3) :130—145, May—June, 1963. The basis of most interpersonal prob- lems are conflicting values; and values, which strongly influence thinking and perception, may be both inconsistent and unrcusoned and cause painful, anxiety- provoking conflicts within an individual, 117 as well as highly emotional differences of opinions among organizational members. These areas and factors are discussed by the author, a management consultant, who recommends management action on the basis of these understandings. 654. MCMURRAY, R. N. “Empathy: Management’s Greatest Need.” Advanc Mgmt, 18(7) :6—11, 34, 1953. 655. MCMURRAY, R. N. “The Mys- tique of Super-Salesmanship.” Harv Bsns R, 39(2) :113—122, 1961. 656. MCPARTLAND, T. S. AND CUM- MING, J. H. “Self-Conception, So- cial Class, and Mental Health.” Hum Org, 17:24—29, 1958. The subjects’ responses to the ques- tion, “Who Am I?”, described them- selves in terms of the groups and organizations to which they belonged, especially among upper- and middle-class subjects. 657. MCPEAK, C. F. “Help Workers to the Right Jo .” Personnel], 21: 289—294, 1943. 658. MEAD, M., editor. Cultural Pat- terns and Technical Change. Co- lumbia University Press, New York, 1953. 659. MEADOWS, P. The Culture of Industrial Man. University of Ne- braska Press, Lincoln, Nebr., 1950. 660. MEDICAL RESEARCH COUNCIL. “Absence from Work—Prevention of Fatigue.” Government Publica- tions—Medical Research Council. H. M. Stationeiy Ofi’ice, London, England, 1944. 661. MEI-IENDALE, Y. S. “Occupa- tional Disasters and Adolescent Crime.” Indian ] Soc Work, 18: 25—28, 1947. 118 662. MEIGS, J. W. “Illness and In- jury Rates in Small Industrial Plants: A Study in Factory Epidem- iology.” ] Occup Med, 5:11—23, January 1948. 663. MEIGs, J. W. “Occupational Medicine.” New England ] Med, 264(16):81M15, Apr. 20, 1961, and 264(17):861—867, Apr. 27, 1961. 664. MEIKLEJOHN, A. “Occupa- tional Health in Relation to the Health Services of Great Britain.” Industr Med Surg, 29:405—412, September 1960. 665. MEIKLEJOHN, A. “Occupa- tional Health in Egypt: A Travei~ er’s Impression.” Trans Ass In- dustr Med Ofi'icers, 11:16—21, April 1961. 666. MELLON INSTITUTE. “The Education of Physicians for In- dustry.” ] Med Educ, 3123, March 1956. The report of a conference at the Mellon Institute, Pittsburgh, Pa., De- cember 6—8, 1955, includes presentation of the needs and areas of training for industrial physicians. 667. MEL‘IZER, H. “Human Rela- tions and Morale in Industry.” Amer ] Orthopsychiat, 152329, April 1945. 668. MELTZER, L. AND SALTER, J. “Organizational Structure and the Performance and Job Satisfaction of Physiologists.” Amer Sociol R, 27(3) :351—362, June 1962. 669. MENCEL, Z. “Preventive Health Services and Health Education in Industry.” Arch Environ Health, 3 : 338—341, September 1961. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 670. MENNINGER, K. The Human Mind. Alfred A. Knopf, New York, 1947. 671. MENNINGER, K. Love Against Hate. Harcourt, Brace & Co., New York, 194-2. 672. MENNINGER, K. Man Against Himself. Harcourt, Brace & Co., New York, 1938. 673. MENNINGER, K. A .Manual for Psychiatric Case Study. Grune & Stratton, New York, 1952. 674-. MENNINGER, K. A Psychiatrist’s World. The Viking Press, New York, 1959. 675. MENNINGER, W. C. AND LEAF, M. You and Psychiatry. Scribner, New York, 194-8. 676. MENTAL HEALTH RESEARCH FUND. Prospects in Psychiatric Re— search. Blackwell Scientific Publi- cations, Oxford, England, 1953. 677. MENTAL HEALTH RESEARCH IN- STITUTE. First Report. University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich., 1957. 678. MENTAL HEALTH RESEARCH IN- S'I'ITUTE. Second Annual Report, [uly I, 1957, June 30, 1.958. Uni- versity of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich., 1959. 679. MERTON, R. K. “Bureaucratic Structure and Personality,” in Per- sonality in Nature, Society, and Culture, Kluckhohn, C., Murray, H. A. and Schneider, D. M., edi- tors. Alfred A. Knopf, New York, 1953. The rational, formal system of organi- zation in bureaucracy is analde in terms of function and persons within the OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES structure who tend to adopt the “per- sonality pattern of the bureaucrat~the norm of impersonality.” Areas of con‘ flict for member and client are explored and related to other authorities in this field. 680. MERTON, R. K. “The Machine, the Worker, and the Engineer,” in Social Theory and Social Structure. The Free Press, Glencoe, Ill., 1950. 681. MERTON, R. K. “Social Struc- ture and Anomie,” in Social Theory and Social Structure. The Free Press, Glencoe, Ill., 1950. 682. METCALF, W. 0. “Health Maintenance for Greater Effi- ciency.” Small Business Adminis- tration, Superintendent of Docu- ments, US. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C., October 1954. This 51-page booklet gives informa- tion on how a small plant can provide medical services to its workers, and in- cludes costs, functions, and programs. 683. MEYER, H. D. AND PRESSELL, G. L. “Personality Test Scores in the Management Hierarchy.” ] Appl Psychol, 38:80, 1954. 684. MICHAEL, D. N. “The Social Environment.” Operations Res, 7: 506—523, July—August 1959. Man-machine system designs, if they are to be precise, eflicient, and predict- able, must include cognizance of the hu- man social environment—individual mo- tives, values, and reward/punishment factors which have developed in the proc- ess of socialization. 685. MILBANK MEMORIAL FUND. In- terrelation: Between the Social En- vironment and Psychiatric Disor- ders. Milbank Memorial Fund, New York, 1953. 119 686. MILLER, D. C. “Economic Factors in the Morale Of College Trained Adults.” Amer ] Social, 47: 139—156, September 1941. 687. MILLER, D. C. AND FORM, W. H. Industrial Sociology. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1951. 688. MILLER, D. C. AND FORM, W. H. “Measuring Patterns of Occupa- tional Security.” Sociometry, 10: 362—375, November 1947. 689. MILLER, D. C. AND SHULL, F. A. “The Prediction of Administrative Role Conflict Resolutions.” Admin Sci Q, 7(2) :143—160, September 1962. 690. MILLER, E. C. “Personnel Policies: Framework for Manage- ment Decisions.” Mgmt R, 49(1) : 20—26, January 1960. 691. MILLER, S. E. “The General Practitioner in Occupational Dis— Gen Pract, 12(2) : ease Control.” 85, 1955. 692. MILLER, S. E. “Health Problems of Veterans in Industry.” Nursing Outlook, 2(10) :537—540. October 1954. 693. MILLER, S. E. “Occupation and Health.” Proc. Ofice Life Under— writers Assoc, 34: 168, 1953. 694. MILLER, S. E. “The Organiza- tion of Health Care in Small Plants in the U.S.A.” WHO Bull, 13(4) 2687, 1955. A survey of industrial medicine in general, trends and existing programs are presented. 695. MILLER, S. E. “Proposed Med- ical Standards for the Operators of 120 mercial Vehicles.” Industr filed Surg, 29: 153-159, April 1960. 696. MILLS, C. W. The Power Elite. Oxford University Press, New York, 1956. 697. MILLS, C. W. White Collar: The American Middle Class. Ox- ford University Press, New York, 1951. 698. MINDUS, E. “Rationalization and Mental Hygiene.” Ment Health, 11 :59—65, 1952. 699. MINER, J. B. “Personality and Ability Factors in Sales Perform- ance.” ] Appl Prychol, 4626-13, 1962. A variety of personality and ability tests were utilized to isolate effective predictors of sales success and factors in sales performance among 65 dealer- salesmen employed by a major petro- leum company. Objective measures were sales statistics from a 4-year period. Two tests, the Wechsler Adult Intelli- gence Scale Arithmetic subtest and the Tomkins-Horn Picture Arrangement test were found to be reliable predictors, the latter correlating measures of depend- ence, sociophilia, self-confidence, and happiness with successful sales perform- ance. 700. MINNESOTA UNIVERSITY SOCIAL SCIENCE RESEARCH CENTER. So- ciety’s Stake in Mental Health. Minnesota University, Minneapolis, Minn, 1957. 701. MISTOWT, G. I. “Medical Pro- gram for Americans Overseas.” ] Occup Med, 5(7) :350—352, July 1963. Outlines the medical benefits for the 36,000 Department of State employees and dependents overseas. Diseases, im- munizations, and problems of a psychi- OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES atric nature are discussed, with special attention to the problem in evacuating the resistant psychotic patient through international borders. 702. MOFFIE, D. J. “The Selection of Employees in Industry.” Arch Environ Health, 3:94—99, July 1961. The author presents a selection pro. gram developed for a specialized com- pany. He feels proper selection would make employees happier, more produc- tive, tend toward less turnover and absenteeism. The results of this investi- gation and many others being currently conducted in his company show that a weighted system can be of real value in the selection of personnel. 703. MOORE, H. Psychology for Busi- ness and Industry. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1942. The author lists, briefly describes, and and evaluates all psychological tests that are in use. 704-. MOORE, W. E. The Conduct of the Corporation. Random House, New York, 1962. 705. MOORE, W. E. Industrial Rela- tions and the Social Order. Mac- Millan, New York, 1954. 706. MOORE. W. E. “Industrial So- ciology: Status and Prospects.” Amer Social R, 13:382—391, 1948. 707. MOORE, W. E. “Three Views of the Businessman.” Dun’x R, 80:31, December 1962. An essay by a sociologist commenting on the contemporary fictionalized views. The author describes environmental pressures and circumstances which affect role behavior and, thus, image. 708. MORE, D. M. “Demotion.” Soc Probl, 9(3) :213—221, 1962. Developing a scheme of the forms, conditions, and range of demotion used in American businesses, the author analyzes the consequences of demotion on affected individuals and their or- ganizations. Specific effects on de- motees’ (and others indirectly involved) behavior may be decreased productivity and creative effort, loss of loyalty, in- creased chronic illness, increased abuse of privileges, moonlighting, formation of protective power cliques, and other symptoms of morale loss. He feels that this area of downward social and oc- cupational mobility needs further re- search. 709. MOREEL, B. “Public Health: An Industrialist’s Appraisal.” Amer ] Public Health, 46(3) :272, March 1956. 710. MORRIS, J. N. AND CRAWFORD, M. D. “Coronary Heart Disease and Physical Activity of Work.” Brit Med ], 2:1485—1496, 1958. When for each social class the amount of physical activity on the job was held constant, the relationship of class to dis- ease disappeared. All occupations re- quiring heavy physical activity had lower rates of coronary heart disease than those occupations at the corre- sponding status level which were (more or less) sedentary. 711. MORSE, N. C. Satisfaction: in the White Collar job. University of Michigan Press, Ann Arbor, Mich., 1953. 712. MORSE, N. C. AND WEISS, R. S. “The Function and Meaning of Work and the Job.” Amer Social R, 20(2) :191—198, April 1955. 713. MORTENSEN, J. M., STEVENSON, T. T., AND WHITNEY, L. H. “Mor- tality due to Coronary Disease Analyzed by Broad Occupational 1776—430—65!79 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 121 Groups.” Arch Indurtr Health, 19: 1—4, January 1959. The question of whether management is more susceptible to death due to coronary heart disease than nonman- agement was a primary reason for a re- cent mortality study based on male employees of the Bell Telephone Co. in the United States. The results of this study indicate that in the Bell Tele- phone System there is no material dif- ference in coronary mortality between the top management group and the craftsmen and laborers group. 714. Moss, C. S. AND CLARK, J. R. “Role Satisfaction of Psychologists in State Hospitals.” Amer Psy- chologist, 16(8) :523—528, 1961. Lower occupational self-esteem and satisfaction with achievement appeared to be related to discrepancies between educational and salary level. 715. MURPHY, G. Human Potenti- alities. Basic Books, Inc., New York, 1958. 716. MURPHY, H. B. M. “Social Change and Mental Health.” Milbank Mem Fund Q, 39(3): 385—445, July 1961. Rates of admissions to mental hos- pitals provide measures of changes in mental health in the following circum- stances: Migration (among countries and among regions), change from war to peace and vice versa, and adjustment of non-Western peoples to modern West- ern civilization. Rates generally in- crease during social change when asso- ciated with such factors as age, personal perception and way of meeting change, and social factors (expectations, assess- ment, and values which society gen- erally attributes to such experiences), with acute confusional states and epi- demic hysteria being particularly asso- ciated with social change. 122 717. MUSCIO, B. “Vocational Guid- ance: A Review of the Literature.” Government Publications—Medical Research Council, Industrial Health Research Board, Report No. 12. H. M. Stationery Office, Lon- don, England, 1921. 718. MUSHLIN, H. R. “Control of Absenteeism: A Cooperative Ef- fort.” ] Occup Med, 42256—257, May 1962. 719. MYERS, J. K. AND SCIIAFFER, L. “Social Stratification and Psychi- atric Practice.” Amer Sociol R, 19:307—310, 1945. 720. NAEGLE, K. D. “Superintend- ency Versus Superintendents.” Harv Educ R, 30(4) :372—393, fall 1960. 721. NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF MANUFACTURERS. “Industrial Health Practices: A Report of a Survey of 2,064 Industrial Estab- lishments.” The Association, New York, 1941. 722. NATIONAL INDUSTRIAL CONFER- ENCE BOARD. “Personnel Activities in American Business.” Study in Personnel Policy No. 86. National Industrial Conference Board, New York, 1947. 723. NEEL, R. “Nervous Stress in the Industrial Situation.” Personnel Prychol, 8:405—416, 1955. 724. NELSON, A. J. “The Clinical Components of an Occupational Health Program.” Occup Health R, 14: 15—17, 1962. 725. NESOW, S. AND FORM, W. H., editors. Alan, W'ork, and Society: A Reader in the Sociology of 06- OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES cu/Jations, Basic Books, New York, 1962. 726. NEUMAN, G. S. “Report No. 6: Persons With NO Psychiatric Dis- orders.” University Of the State of New York, State Education Depart- ment, Division of Vocational Re- habilitation, Albany, N.Y., February 1963. A statistical report about persons re- habilitated through New York State’s Vocational Rehabilitation program. This includes a report on types and patterns of jobs to which patients have been rehabilitated in the State of New York. 727. NEUMAN, L. E., KAHN, R. L., JONES, J. P., SCOUTTEN, E. F., ESTES, H., AND McGREGOR, D. “Behavioral Science: What’s In It For Management?” Brns Mgmt Rec, pages 32—44, June 1963. This l2-page article brings into focus the many obstacles to communication be- tween the behavioral scientist and the manager and suggests reasons for man- agers’ resistance to the utilization of the social scientist. Most of the discussion deals with the kind of knowledge one needs in order to take appropriate management action in different situations at different times with different people. 728. NEw YORK STATE ASSOCIATION OF COUNCILS OF SOCIAL AGENCIES. Community Action for the Aging: Aid to Program Planning. The Association, New York, 1950. 729. NILES, M. C. Middle Alanage- ment. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1941. 730. NIMBKAR, S. K. “Employment Potential Of the Physically Handi- capped.” Indian ] Soc Work, 20 (4) 2 94~97, l\'1arch 1960. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 731. NOLAN, T. F. “The Viewpoint of Management: The Role of the Industrial Medical Department.” Industr Med Surg, 29:57—60, Feb- ruary 1960. 732. NORo, L. “Occupational Health Services: Finland.” World Med ], 7: 190—192, May 1960. 733. NORO, L. “Profiles in Occupa- tional Health: Sven Forssman, M. D., on the Fiftieth Anniversary of His Birth.” Industr Med Surg, 30:247—249, June 1961. 734. NUNN, H. L. The Whole Man Goes to Work. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1953. 735. O’CONNOR, R. B. “Medical Service in Small Plants.” Industr Med Surg, 28:565—567, December 1959. 736. O’CONNOR, R. B. “Labor, Management and Medicine.” Bull NY Acad Med, 39:116—118, Feb- ruary 1963. 737. ODELL, C. E. “Productivity of the Older Worker.” Personnel ] 37:288—291, 1958. 738. OHIO STATE UNIVERSITY BU- REAU OF BUSINESS RESEARCH. Personal and Social Adjustment in Industry. Monograph R—61, Co- lumbus, Ohio. 739. OPLER, M. K. Culture and Mental Health. MacMillan, New York, 1959. Papers illustrating the variable effects of culture and stress on mental health represent the diversity of world cultures, as well as dichrent methods of study and analysis (anthropological field observa- tion, psychoanalysis, sociology, and pub- lic health statistics). The selections include seven reprinted articles, eight 123 symposium papers, and eight new con- tributions. 740. OPLER, M. K. “Industrial So- cieties and the Changing Role of Doctors.” ] Occup Med, 4:237— 241, May 1962. 741. O’SULLIVAN, E. N. M. Text- book of Occupational Therapy. Philosophical Library, New York, 1955. 742. OVERSTREET, H. AND OVER- STREET, B. “What Emotional Health Looks Like.” ] Amer Soc Training Directors, 9(3):23—25, 1955. 743. PACKARD, V. The Pyramid Climbers. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1962. 744. PAGE, R. C. “The Aging Execu- tive.” Industr Med Surg, 29:121— 124, March 1960. 745. PARR, D. “The Disease Concept of Alcoholism.” Trans Industr Med Ofi‘icers, 9:65—68, July 1959. In diagnosing chronic alcoholism in individuals, doctors should keep firmly to clinical criteria, and avoid being lured into the indiscriminate applica- tion of the term to all, who by social or moral standards abuse alcohol. To limit the medical concept of alcoholism in this way leaves physicians with the formidable tasks of treating those alco- holics who ask for treatment and of persuading the others to ask for it. 746. PASAMANIK, B. “Future Ex- plorations in Mental Health and Disease.” Amer I Public Health, 47: 1242—1249, October 1957. 747. PAUL, B. “Social Science in Public Health.” Amer ] Public Health, 46:1390—1393, November 1956. 124 748. PEACE, C. H. “Pastoral Coun- selling in Industry.” Arch Environ Health, 3:69—71, July 1961. A description of the kind of pastoral counselling done at R. J. Reynolds To- bacco C0,, Winston Salem, NC. 821 counselling sessions were conducted in a typical year; 28.8 percent mental prob- lems, 21.9 percent personality difficulties, 11.7 percent family troubles, 8.1 percent alcoholism, 7.9 percent mental-alcohol counselling, 6.6 percent miscellaneous, 4 percent job related problems, 3 percent counselling related to employment, 3 per- cent premarital counselling, 2.2 percent family illness, 2 percent financial differ- ence, 0.6 percent grief and 0.2 percent psychotic. 749. PEARSE, R. F. “Developing En- gineers into Executives.” M ech Engring, 719—722, September 1953. 750. PELL, SVAND D’ALONzo, C. A. “Myocardial Infarction in a One- Year Industry Study.” ] Amer Med Ass, 166:332—337, 1958. 751. PELL, S. AND D’ALONzo, C. A. “A Three-Year Study of Myocar- dial Infarction in a Large Employed Population.” ] Amer Med Assoc, 175:463—470, 1961. 752. PELLEGRIN, R. J. AND COATES, C. H. “Executives and Supervisors: Contrasting Definitions of Career Success.” Admin Sci Q, 1:506- 517, 1957. 753. PELz, D. C. “Influence: A Key to Effective Leadership in the First- Line Supervisor.” Personnel, 29: 209—217, 1952. Questionnaires filled out by 8,000 nonsupervisory employees and interviews conducted with all supervisors and managers of the Detroit Edison Co. pro- vided data that a supervisor’s “influ- OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES ence” or power upward was the variable which conditioned whether or not his behavior raised employee satisfaction. Positive behavior, without real influence, was not effective. The author suggests to administrators that training foreman in new behavior patterns could result only in frustration unless commensurate powers were also delegated. 754. PENNOCK, G. A. “Industrial Research at Hawthorne.” Person- nel 1, 8(5) :296—313, February 1930. 755. PEPINSKY, P. N. “The Social Dialectic of Productive Noncon- formity.” Merrill-Palmer Q, 7(2) : 127—137, April 1961. Research in three natural settings, a large university campus, the main labor- atories of a large research institution, and a planned suburban area, was con- cerned with variations in behavior and orientation involving conformity or non- conformity and productivity. One im- plication is that the productive non- conformist is more task than position oriented and that his evaluation of the task is more internally than outwardly prescribed. 756. PERLMAN, S. Labor in the New Deal Decade. Education Depart- ment, International Ladies Garment Workers’ Union, New York, 1945. 757. PERRY, J. “Human Relations in Small Industry.” Small Business Management Series NO. 38, Small Defense Plants Administration, Washington, D.C., March 1953. 758. PERSONNEL COUNSELING AND PUBLIC RELATIONS ORGANIZATIONS. Personnel Counseling: A Reference for Supervisors. Western Electric CO., Kearney Works, Allentown, Pa., 1948. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 759. PETERS, G. A. AND PHELAN, J. “Practical Group Psychotherapy and Role Playing for the Industry Supervisor.” Group Psychother, 12:143—147, June 1959. Training to change the basic nega- tive attitudes of industrial supervisors utilized a method called the intensive industrial role-playing technique, which allowed an individual to extemporane- ously live through the experiences of a particular character. 760. PETERS, G. A. AND PHELAN, J. G. “Role Playing Techniques in Industrial Situations.” Group Psy- chother, 12: 148—155, June 1959. The second of two articles describing the industrial role playing techniques for industrial supervisors. 761. PETERS, R. W. Communication Within Industry. Harper & Broth- ers, New York, 1950. 762. PETRIE, L. M. “To Each His Own: A State Occupational Health Program.” Amer ] Public Health, 49: 1658—1663, December 1959. 763. PHILLIPS, A. M. “A Study of Prolonged Absenteeism in Indus- try.” ] Occup Med, 32575—578, December 1961. 764-. PICKARD, K. “Maintaining the Professional Status of the Doctor.” Industr Med Surg, 29:64—68, Feb— ruary 1960. 765. PIGKARD, K. “The Value of Routine Health Examinations in In- dustry: Four Specific Chest Cases.” NYS ] Med, 60:3679—3683, No- vember 1960. 766. PIGORS, P. J. AND MYERS, C. A. Personnel Administration: A Point of View and a Method. McGraw- Hill, New York, 1947. 776430465 10 1 25 767. PIGORs, P. J. AND MYERS, C. A., editors. Readings in Personnel Ad- ministration. McGraw—Hill, New York, 1952. 768. PILISUK, M. “Cognitive Bal- ance, Primary Groups, and the Patient-Therapist Relationship.” Behav Sci, 8(2):137—145, April 1963. The psychotherapeutic relationship, unique among interpersonal relation- ships, provides an opportunity to inter- pret the patient’s inappropriate expec- tations of personal support from secon- dary group associates and his frustrations over failures in these associations. The therapeutic process is described in terms of cognitive balance theory and an analysis of the social aspects of the patient’s problem. 769. PLUMMER, N. AND HINKLE, L. E. “Sickness Absenteeism.” Arch In- dustr Health, 112218—230, March 1955. 770. POLLAK, 0. Social Adjustment in Old Age. Social Science Re- search Council, Bulletin 59, New York, 1948. 771. POLLOCK, F. The Economic and Social Consequences of Auto- mation. B. Blackwell, Oxford, England, 1957. 772. PORTER, L. W. “Job Attitudes in Management: (1) Perceived De- ficiencies in Need Fulfillment as a Function of Job Level.” ] Appl Psychol, 46(6) :375—384, December 1962. 773. PORTER, L. W. “Job Attitudes in Management: (2) Perceived Im- portance of Needs as a Function of Job Level.” ] Appl Psychol, 4-7 (2) :141—148, 1963. 126 Questionnaire responses from 1,916 of the 6,000 forms sent to 5 management levels in a nationwide sample yielded data on importance and satisfaction needs. Although there was similarity of “degree of importance,” lower manage- ment levels perceived less satisfaction, particularly in self-actualization and autonomy. The author concludes that, based on this and previous findings, these needs are both most important and least fulfilled and “probably the most critical psychological need areas for or- ganizations to consider in their relations with management.” 774. POWELL, M. AND FERRARO, C. D. “Sources of Tension in Married and Single \Vomen Teachers of Differ- ent Ages.” ] Educ Psychol, 51 :92— 101, 1960. A word association test given 100 married and 100 single elementary school teachers ranging in all from 20 to 59 years showed significant differ- ences in emotional reactions with greater tensions in single women and in older teachers in both groups. 775. POWLEs, W. E. AND Ross, W. D. “How Good a Listener Are You?” Med Econ, 38(21), 1961. 776. POWLEs, W. E. AND Ross, W. D. “The Physician as Interview- 3 er. ’ Kentucky Acad Gen Prac, 6: 14—18, October 1960. 777. PRESTHUS, R. V. Organiza- tional Society. Alfred A. Knopf, New York, 1962. Applying psychological, as well as po- litical and sociological theory to organi- zational behavior, the author analyzes the structural characteristics (size, spe- cialization, impersonality, hierarchy, and centralized authority of large-scale or- ganizations and the effects of these characteristics on individual behavior). Harry Stack Sullivan’s interpersonal theory of psychiatry is used to explain OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES personality development and individual reactions to organizational demands for loyalty, adaptability, and consistency. 778. PRESTHUS, R. V. “Weberian vs. Welfare Bureaucracy in Tradi- tional Society.” Admin Sci Q, 6 (1) :1—24, June 1961. From data derived from a field survey of the Turkish state coal monopoly through interviews, the author concludes that the underlying social values pro- vide the essential basis for motivation and behavior within a given bureau- cratic organization, as contrasted with the apparent manifest structure. 779. PRICE, D. E. “Is Man Becoming Obsolete?” Public Health R, 74: 693—699, August 1959. 780. PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION RE- VIEW. “Social Science Sympo- sium.” Public Admin R, 22:3, Sep- tember 1962. 781. PUFFER, R. R. “Frequency of Sickness Among Employees At- tached to the Industry 1952—1953.” Monthly R, 15:135—137, July 1954. 782. PUGH, D. S., GORDON, C., AND LEVY, K. Among Railway Clerical Staff.” Brit J Industr Med, 16:269—273, October 1959. 783. PURCELL, T. V. The Worker Speaks His Mind on Company and Union. Harvard University Press, Cambridge, Mass, 1952. “Sickness Absence 784. QUARTERLY JOURNAL OF STUD- IEs ON ALCOHOL. “Proceedings, Research Conference on Problems Of Alcohol and Alcoholism.” Quart ] Stud Alcohol, 20(3), September 1959. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 785. QUARTLY, C. J. “Placing Re- tired Military Personnel.” ] Col- lege Placement, 23(3) :69—78, Feb- ruary 1963. A study conducted at University of California in 1962 identified seven “bar- riers” to successful job placement of military retirees. Discussion of these barriers center around “stereotype” im- ages of employers and insufficient non- military knowledge of retirees. 786. QUINN, J. A. Human Ecology. Prentice-Hall, New York, 1950. 787. QUINN, J. A. Urban Sociology. American Book Co., New York, 1955. 788. RAFFLE, P. A. “Automation and Repetitive Work: Their Ef- fect on Health.” Lancet, 1:733— 737, April 6, 1963. 789. RAINWATER, L., COLEMAN, R. P. AND HANDEL, G. Workingman’s Wife. Oceana Publications, Inc., New York, 1953. 790. RAMON, A. C. “The Effect of Rapid Culture Change on Mental Health.” Bull World Fed Ment Health, 12(4):152—162, 1960. A comparison of two villages in Mau- rituis-Triolet and Stanley shows “that acculturation, when rapid and extensive, has a damaging effect on mental health and results in increase of mental illness; an uneven rate of deculturation is more damaging than mere rapidity.” 791. RANDALL, L. K. “Management Development Reproached and Re- Approached.” ] Amer Soc Train- ing Directors, 16(1) 225-28, Janu- ary 1962. Pros and cons, aims and disappoint- ments, in the results of management development programs are discussed. 127 The author sees integration of sensi- tivity training with the computer games approaches as the “new era” in man- agement development. 792. RATCLIFF, J. D. “Why Business- men Die Before Their Time.” Nation’s B3115, 40(12):?)0—31, De- cember 1952. 793. RATCLIFFE, H. L. “Environ- mental Factors in Coronary Dis- ease.” Circulation, 272481, April 1963. 794-. RAVEN, B. H. AND REITSEMA, J. “The Effects of Varied Clarity of Group Goal and Group Path Upon the Individual and His Relation to His Group.” Hum Relat, 10:29—- 45, 1957. 795. RAVITz, M. “The Implications of Changing Employment Pat- terns.” Adult Lead, p. 199, Jan- uary 1963. Jobs are viewed as key to one’s social status in an increasingly urban industrial society. A society that expects to sur- vive must constantly modify its occu- pational structure to suit the demands of new economic activity, which involves training youth for such expectations. 796. READ, W. H. “Upward Com- in Industrial Hier- 15:3—15, munication archies.” Hum Relat, February 1962. 797. REDLICH, F. C. “The Concept of Normality.” Amer ] Psychother, 6:551—576, 1952. 798. REED, L. S. “Employee Health Benefit Programs: I. Growth and Coverage.” Arch Industr Health, 14:405, 1956. “II. Administrative Arrangements for Health Benefit Plans.” Ibid, page 4-96. 128 799. REGUR, D. L. “Keeping Em- ployees on the Job: The Training Supervisor Views the Physician’s Role in Management Develop- ment.” ] Occup Med, 5: 199—201, April 1963. 800. REID, R. C. “What Happens While They’re on Vacation.” Su- pervisory Mgmt, 7(3) :2—7, March 1962. 801. REIDER, N. AND FIRESTONE, M. J. “An Understanding of Human Relations: Helps in Resolving Su- pervisory Problems.” Mod Hosp, 74:46—48, January 1950. 802. REINES, C. M. “The Jewish Conception of Work.” Judaism, 8(4) :329—337, fall, 1959. 803. REISS, A. J., DUNCAN, O. D., HATT, P. K., AND NORTH, C. C. Occupations and Social Status. The Free Press, Glencoe, Ill., 1961. 804. REISSMAN, L. AND ROHRER, J. H. Change and Dilemma in the Nursing Profession. G. P. Put- nam’s Sons, New York, 1957. 805. RENNIE, T. A. C. “Social Psy- chiatry: A Definition.” Int ] Soc Psychiat, 1:5, 1955. 806. RENNIE, T. A. C. “The York- ville Community Mental Health Study,” in Interrelations Between the Social Environment and Psychi- atric Disorders. Milbank Memorial Fund, New York, 1953. 807. RENNIE, T. A. C. AND SROLE, L. “Social Class Prevalence and Distri- bution of Psychosomatic Conditions in an Urban Population.” Psycho- som Med, 18:449—456, 1956. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 808. RENNIE, T. A. C., SROLE, L., AND OPLER, M. K. “Urban Life and Mental Health.” Amer ] Psy- chiat, 113:831—837, March 1957. 809. REUTER, E. B. Handbook of Sociology. Dryden Press, New York, 1961. 810. RICHARDSON, F. L. W. AND WALKER, C. R. Human Relations in an Expanding Company. Yale University Press, New Haven, Conn., 1949. 811. RICHARDSON, F. L. W. AND WALKER, C. R. “Work Flow and Human Relations.” Harv Bsns R, 27(1) :107—122, January 1949. 812. RICHARDSON, W. P. “The Gov- ernor’s Council on Occupational Health: A Medium of Cooperative Effort for the Health of the Worker.” N Carolina Med ], 21: 377—379, September 1960. 813. RIESMAN, D. The Lonely Crowd. Yale University Press, New Haven, Conn., 1950. 814-. RIESMAN, D. “Some Clinicaland Cultural Aspects of Aging.” Amer J Social, 58:379, January 1954-. 815. RIGNEY, T. G. AND ECKARDT, R. E. “Research and Occupational Medicine in the United States.” ] Occup Med, 2:327—329, July 1960. 816. RIMEL, W. M. AND Ross, W. D. “The Hidden Half-Man at Work.” Ohio Health, 11:14—20, 1959. 817. ROBERTsON, L. T. “1959 Health Forum—Special General Session on Small Plants: A Sum- mary.” Industr Med Surg, 28: 570—572, December 1959. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 818. ROBINSON, W. S. “Ecological Correlations and the Behavior of Individuals.” Amer Sociol R, 15: 351—357, June 1950. 819. RODGERS, A. “How People Com- pensate or Adjust Themselves for Lack of Ability.” Hum Fact, 11: 385—393, 1937. 820. ROE, A. “Analysis of Group Rorschachs of Biologists.” Ror- schach Res Exchange ] Projective Techn, 13:25—43, 1949. 821. ROETHLISBERGER, F. J. “The Foreman: Master and Victim of Double Talk.” Harv Bins R, 23 (3) :283—298, April 1945. 822. ROETHLISBERGER, F. J. “Hu- man Relations: Rare, Medium or Well Done?” Harv Bsns R, 26 (1) 289—107, January 1948. 823. ROETHLISBERGER, F. J. Man- agement and Morale. Harvard University Press, Cambridge, Mass, 1941. A series of collected lectures, this book should not be confused with the author’s earlier work, “Management and the Worker,” which is the definitive descrip- tion of the Western Electric experiment. 824. ROETHLISBERGER, F. J. “The Scientific and the Administrative Ap- proach in Administration: The Re- lation of Ideas to Practice.” Industr Med Surg, 31(11) : 494—498, No- vember 1962. 825. ROETHLISBERGER, F. J. AND DICKSON, W. J. Management and the Worker. Harvard University Press, Cambridge, Mass, 1939. 826. ROETHLISBERGER, F. J., LOM- BARD, G. R, AND RONKEN, H. for Training Human Relations. 129 Harvard University, Division of Re- search, Graduate School of Business Administration, Cambridge, Mass, 1954. This report of a program for “Ad- vanced Training and Research in Human Relations” describes the first 3 years’ ex- perience (1950—53) of staff and ten trainees in attempting improved practice in human relations. The program, at Harvard Graduate School of Business Administration, financed by a Ford Foundation Grant, through 1960, is an attempt to prepare people to do human relations training and research in a va- riety of formal organizations, including business. 827. ROGERS, C. R. AND ROETHLIS- BERGER, F. J. “Barriers and Gate- ways to Communication.” Harv Bsnx R, 30(4) :46—52, July—August 1952. In this essay on communication, based on experience with psychotherapeutic re- lationships, the authors point out that judgmental, reactive barriers to inter- personal communication in an occupa- tional setting can be lessened by attempts to “understand the other” and to focus on problem-solving, rather than on at- tack or defense. 828. ROSE, A., editor. Mental Health and Mental Disorder: A Sociological Approach. W. W. Norton & Co., New York, 1955. 829. ROSE, A. “Social Psychological Effects on Physical Deprivation.” ] Health Hum Behav, 1(4) :285—289, winter 1960. This questionnaire study of 1,754 en- listed men fighting in Italy, in March 1945, indicates the relationship between deprivation of sleep and food, and the incorporation of a combat group’s values. 830. ROSE, A. M. AND STUB, H. R. “Social Characteristics of the Men- 130 tally Disordered,” in Mental Health and Mental Disorder: A Sociological Approach. Rose, A. M., editor. W. W. Norton & Co., New York, 1955. 831. ROSE, A. M. AND STUB, H. R. “Summary of Studies on the Inci- dence of Mental Disorders,” in M en- tal Health and Mental Disorder: A Sociological Approach. Rose, A. M., editor. W. W. Norton & Co‘., New York, 1955. 832. ROSEN, G. “Social Stress and Mental Disease From the 18th Cen- tury to the Present: Some Origins of Social Psychiatry.” Bull Hyg, 34 (12) 11256, December 1959. Current opinions regarding causes of mental illness are traced through 18th and 19th century writings, the primary concept being that social stress is a major factor. Recent definition of other varia- bles suggest that social change, rather than complexity, itself, may be the most significant concern for future research. 833. ROSEN, H. “Job Enlargement and Its Implications.” Industr .Med Surg, 32(6) :217, June 1963. A study of the attempts to meet union objection to routine jobs found that, al- though job rotation resulted in the same productivity and salary, worker dissatis- faction increased. It is postulated that workers would respond positively to change according to their own needs, not the rigid rotation or job enlargement in a preset pattern. 834. ROSEN, H. AND WEAVER, C. G. “Motivation in Management: A Study of Four Managerial Levels.” ] Appl Psychol, 44:386—392, 1960. 835. Ross, H. G. “Medicine in In- dustry,” in Human Behavior and its Relation to Industry, Cameron, D. E. and Ross, H. G., editors. McGill University, Montreal, Canada, 1944. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 836. Ross, H. G. “The Medical De- partment Contributes to Supervi- sion,” chapter 8, in Studies in Super- vision, Cameron, D. E. and Ross, H. G., editors. McGill University, lVIontreal, Canada, 1945. 837. Ross, I. C. AND ZANDER, A. F. “Need Satisfactions and Employee Turnover.” Personnel Psychol, 10: 327—338, 1957. A followup study was made of 169 em- ployees who resigned from an orignal group of 2,680 female skilled workers in 48 locations of a large company. In comparison with a control group, findings indicated that resignations might have been due to insufficient need satisfaction on the job, but could also be partially due to job interference with family and community satisfactions. 838. Ross, W. D. “Fatigue and Phys- ical Fitness: The Importance of Training.” Physical Educ Ass Bull, 10: 2, November 1942. 839. Ross, W. D. Asthenia,” in Current Conn, H. F., editor. Philadelphia, Pa., 1955. 840. Ross, W. D. “A Quantitative Use of the Rorschach Method.” AmerfPsyc/iiat, 101 : 100—104, 1944. 841. ROTH, W. F. AND LUTON, F. H. “The Mental Health Program in Tennessee.” Amer ] Psychiat, 99: 662—675, 1943. 842. ROTHBARD, B. “Functions and Aims of the United Wire, Metal and Machine Medical Center.” ] Occup Med, 3 : 209—210, April 1961. 843. ROUBAL, J. “A State Occupa- tional Hygiene Service in Czecho- slovakia.” Ann Occup Hyg, 3:66— 68, January 1961. “N eurocirculatory Th era py, Saunders, OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 844. RUDD, J. L. AND FEINGOLD, S. N. “A Work Adjustment Center in V0- cational Rehabilitation.” Arch Phys Med, 40: 29—34, January 1959. Patients with severe emotional prob- lems, physical handicap or limited intel- ligence spend up to 9 months working in a program designed to condition the patient for work. Selection, training, evaluation, and placement procedures are described. 845. RUESCH, J. Therapeutic Com- VV. W. Norton & Co., munication. N.Y., 1961. 846. RUESCH, J. AND BATESON, G. Communication: The Social Matrix of Psychiatry. W. W. Norton & Co., N.Y., 1951. 847. RUESCH, J. AND BATESON, G. “Structure and Process in Social Re- 12:105—124, lations.” 1949. 848. RUESCH, J. AND KEES, W. Non- Verbal sity of California Press, Berkeley and Los Angeles, Calif., 1956. 849. RUFFIN, J. B. “Functional Test- ing for Behavioral Toxicity: A Miss- Psychiatry, Communication. Univer- ing Dimension in Experimental En- vironmental Toxicology.” ] Occup Med, 5(3) : 117—121, March 1963. The author feels that study of be- havioral indices of toxicity is crucial and should rank near the top in toxicity study criteria. He suggests that toxic changes in central nervous system often result in functional impairment without obvious physical impairment and urges develop- ment further of the field of psychotoxi- cology. 850. RUSALEM, H. “Placeability of Older Disabled Clients.” Voc Guid Q, 19:38-41, 1961. 131 851. RYAN, W. C. Mental Health Through Education. Common- wealth Fund, New York, 1938. 852. SAITow, R. A. “How to Control Group Insurance Costs.” Person- nel, 39(1) : 66—72, Janualy-Febru- ary 1962. 853. SALz, A. “Occupation,” in vol. 11. Encyclopedia of the Social Sci- ences. The MacMillan Co., New York, 1933. 854. SAMLER, J. “Psychosocial As- pects of Work: A Critique of Occu- pational Information.” Personnel Guidance ], 39:458—465, 1961. This points out the neglect of consid- ering psychodynamic aspects of occupa- tional adjustment in current literature which deals primarily with the “economic man.” 855. SAMPSON, E. E. “Status Con- gruence and Cognitive Consistency.” Sociometry, 26(2): 146—162, June 1963. The concept of societal tendencies to- ward equilibrium is described as similar to psychological tendencies toward cogni- tive consistency, and the consequences for interpersonal behavior are emphasized. 856. SAMPSON, R. C. The Stafir Role in Management: It: Creative Uses. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1955. 857. SARIC, M. “Systematic Health Examinations in Industry: A Yugo- slavian Experience.” I ndustr Med Surg, 30:113—118, March 1961. 858. SARIC, M. AND VOUK, V. B. “Oc- cupational Health in Yugoslavia.” Ann Occup Hyg, 5: 173—176, July— September 1962. 859. SAWYER, W. A. “Impact of La- bor Health Plans on Occupational Health: The Opportunity.” Amer ] Public Health, 44:600—608, 1954. 132 860. SAWYER, W. A. “Medical Care in Industry.” Ann Amer Acad Pol Soc Sci, 273:151—159, 1951. 861. SAYLES, L. R. “The Change Process in Organizations: An Ap- plied Anthropology Analysis.” Hum Org, 21 :62—67, summer 1962. 862. SCHEER, W. E. “The Danger is not in Machines Thinking Like Men, but in Men Thinking Like Ma- chines.” Empl Relat Serv, pages 1— 18, May 1963. This speech by the personnel director of Blue Cross-Blue Shield stresses the ef- fects of today’s fast pace; the buildup of tensions, the earlier onset of fatigue and lessened efficiency. 863. SCHELL, E. H. “Industrial Con- tinuum and the Nature of Man.” Advanc Mgmt, 21 :26—28, May 1956. 864. SCHROEDER, C. W. “Mental Disorders in Cities.” Ameeroeiol, 48:40—47, 1942. 865. SCHULBERC, H. C. “Authori- tarianism, Tendency to Agree, and Interpersonal Perception.” ] Ab- norm Soc Psychol, 63(1) :101—108, July 1961. 866. SCHULTE, J. H. “Effects of Mild Carbon Monoxide Intoxication.” Arch Environ Health, 7:524—530, November 1963. 867. SCHULTZ, R. S. Personnel Tests.” September 1946. 868. SCHUSTER, G. Chrixtianity and Human Relations in Industry. The Epworth Press, London, England, 1951. 869. SCHWARTZ, L. “Factors Con- tributing to Excessive Use of Sick “How to Use Personnel, 25:3, OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES Leave.” Industr Med Surg, 14: 646—649, August 1945. 870. SCOTT, E. L. Leaderthip and Perceptions of Organization. Ohio Leadership Studies, Bureau of Busi- ness Research, Ohio State Univer- sity, Columbus, Ohio, 1956. In this study of enlisted men aboard submarines, each man’s perception of the structure of his unit of organization was compared with an organization chart prepared for his unit. The data are analyzed in terms of discrepancies between perceived organization and charted organization, and correspond- ences (reciprocations) between the per- ceptions of superiors, peers, and subordi- nates. The relationship of perceptual error and perceptual reciprocation to morale, unit effectiveness, and other vari- ables is discussed. 871. SCOTT, T. S. “Profiles in Occu- pational Health: The Personal Med- ical World of Ethel Browning.” In- dustr Med Surg, 29:93—95, Febru- ary 1960. 872. SCOTT, W. A. “Social Psycho- logical Corelates of Mental Illness and Mental Health.” Psychol Bull, 55:65—67, 1958. 873. SCOTT, W. A. “Research Defini- tions of Mental Health and Mental Illness.” Psychol Bull, 55(1) :29— 45, 1958. 874. SCOTT, W. A. “Social Psycho- logical Correlates of Mental Illness and Mental Health.” Psychol Bull, 55(2) :65—87, March 1958. 875. SCOTT, W. G. “Modem Human Relations in Perspective.” ] Occup Med, 2(8) :411, August 1960. The field of human relations is de- scribed as a special interrelating of sev- eral disciplines in order to provide an OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES understanding basic to problem-solving. “introversion and shortsightedness” are criticized, and the goal Of worker satis- faction is advocated. 876. SCOTT, W. G. Human Relations in Management: A Behavioral Sci- ence Approach. Dorsey Press, Homewood, Ill., 1962. 877. SEASHORE, S. E. Group Cohe- in an Industrial Work Survey Research Center, siveness Group. University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich, 1954. 878. SEELEY, J. R. “Social Values, the Mental Health Movement and Mental Health.” Ann Amer Acad Pol Soc Sci, pages 15—24, March 1953. 879. SEEMAN, M., EVANS, J. W., AND ROGERS, E. L. “The Measurement of Stratification in Formal Organiza- Hum Org, 19(2) :90—96, summer 1960. 880. SEGAL, B. E. “Male Nurses: A Case Study in Status Contradiction and Prestige Loss.” Soc Forces, 41 (1) :31—38, October 1962. Male nurses in a psychiatric hospital were compared and contrasted to female colleagues in terms of their intrahospital status and prestige “outside.” Their views Of reference groups differed from female nurses’ and their self-perceptions included a low estimate of self-esteem. tions.” 881. SEILER, J. A. “Diagnosing Inter- departmental Conflict.” Harv Bsns R, 41(5) :121—132, September—Oc- tober 1963. Interdepartmental conflicts are usually related to an organization environment and goals, through the influence of top management. Insecurity and defensive behavior may be fostered by ambiguity 133 in the definition of roles of subunits or of individuals. Thus, for real problem- solving, goals, and interrelationships must be clarified. 882. SEILER, J. A. “Toward a Theory Of Organization Congruent With Primary Group Concepts.” Behav Sci, 8(3) :190—198, July 1963. This field observation of the entire management population of a medium sized manufacturing firm developed data which included a clinical history of the firm, together with observations and in- terviews with individuals and groups. Two man-years of data collection was the basis for this attempt to “bridge the gap” between personality theory, primary group theory and organization theory. 883. SELEKMAN, B. M. Labor Rela- Mc- tions and Human Relations. Graw-Hill, New York, 1947. 884. SELIGMAN, B. B. “Man, Work, and the Automated Feast.” mentary, 34:9—19, July 1962. 885. SELZNICK, P. “Foundations of the Theory of Organization.” Amen Socil R, 13:25—35, 1948. 886. SEWARD, G. AND MARMOR, J. Psychotherapy and Culture Conflict. Ronald Press Co., New York, 1956. 887. SEYMOUR, W. H. “Challenge of Industry to the Medical Profession.” Arch Industr Hyg Occup Health, 8:102—108, August 1953. 888. SEYMOUR, W. H. “Occupa- tional Health Problems in Small Employee Groups.” Arch Environ Health, 3:72—76, July 1961. 889. SHAFFER, R. “Job Satisfaction as Related to Need Satisfaction at Work.” Psychol Monogr, 67(14) : 1—25, 1953. Com- 134 890. SHAH, R. M. AND JOSHI, P. D. “Development Techniques for Per- sonality Changes for Happier Indi- viduals and Smoother Society.” ] Educ Psyc/zol, 18:344—359, 1960. Illustrations of a technique designed to introduce personality changes on a wide scale are given through two examples. A group discussion among industrial super- visors of human relations in supervisory tasks, and group discussion among par- ents regarding problems of the develop- ment of children. 891. SHALLENBERGER, J. B., editor. Proceedings of National Conference of Social Work, San Francisco. Co- lumbia University Press, New York, 1955. 892. SHANDs, H. C. AND FINESINGER, J. E. “A Note on the Significance of Fatigue.” Psychosom Med, 14: 309, 1952. 893. SHATIN, L. “Motivation: The Will to Work.” Amer Arch Reha¢ bilit Ther, 8(1) :17—24, 1960. The conscious and unconscious atti- tudes which adversely influence the will to work are described. 894. SHAW, M. E. “The Effective- ness of Whyte’s Rules: How to Cheat on Personality Tests.” ] Appl Psyc/zol, 46:21—25, 1962. Ninety-four undergraduates took the Bernreuter Personality Inventory twice, 51 subjects once following Whyte’s sug- gested dishonest rules, and once respond- ing normally. One group answered hon- estly both times; one group dishonestly both times. Test scores of the 51 sub- jects plotted, and personnel supervisors were asked which profile was preferable for a specific job description and which would be hired (if either). Honest and dishonest responses differed significantly, but although dishonest profile was slight- OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES ly favored by personnel no great ad- vantage was assured. 895. SHEPHERD, H. “An Action Re- search Approach to Organization Development.” Mgmt Rec, p. 4—7, June 1960. 896. SHEPHERD, R. D. AND WALKER, J. “Absence and the Physical Con- ditions of Work.” Brit ] Industr Med, 14:266—274, October 1957. 897. SHEPHERD, R. D. AND WALKER, J. “Absence From Work in Rela- tion to Wage Level and Family Re- sponsibility.” Brit ] Industr Med, 15:52—61, January 1958. 898. SHERMAN, M. Mental Hygiene and Education. Longmans, Green & C0,, New York, 1934-. 899. SHIELDS, C. D. AND DAITz, B. “The Challenge of Disability to Medicine.” ] Amer Med Ass, 174- (12) :1611—1616, November 19, 1960. 900. SHILLITO, F. H. “Post-Graduate Training in Occupational Medicine at the University of Michigan Medi- cal Center.” Postgrad Med ], 27: 46—50, January 1960. 901. SHIMADA, K. “Social Role and Role Conflicts of the Protestant Par- ish Minister Focused on S. W. Bliz- zard’s Study.” japanese Social R, 10(2) :29—50, March 1960. The six major roles of a Protestant minister include functions they are least motivated to do, and result in incongru- ences and often in emotional reactions. Incongruent role expectations produce less conflict, on the conscious level, how‘ ever, for the authoriatarian personality who identifies more strongly with tradi- tional roles. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 135 902. SHIMMIN, S. “Extra-Mural Fac- tors Influencing Behavior at Wor ” Occup Psychol, 36(3) :124—131, July 1962. This summary deals with financial re- wards to workers as related to individual need outside the job. The desire to work overtime, related to family situation, is particularly stressed. 903. SHRONTS, J. F. “Industrial Medicine: The Changing Scene, 1870—1960.” Lancet, 80:245—251, May 1960. 904. SHUVAL, J. T. “Occupational Interest and Sex—Role Congruence.” Hum Relat, 16(2):171—182, May 1963. The relationship of occupational in- terests to traditional definitions (includ- ing religious) of the female role was stud- ied in terms of replies given by 1,266 girls in grades 10 to 12 in 20 Israeli high schools. Some evidence of a weak- ening of sex—linking to specific occupa- tions was found. 905. SIEGEL, A. I. “The Social Ad- justment of Puerto Ricans in Phila- delphia.” ] Soc Psychol, 46:99— 100, August 1957. Interview surveys provided findings concerning the adjustment in the areas of language, health, religion, city living, social distance, communication, police and laws leadership, and occupation. 906. SIKES, W. “The Paradox of Par- ticipation.” Personnel, 39( 1) :35— 38, January—February 1962. The involvement of individuals in po- litical government through soliciting their opinions and votes is incongruent with the authoritarian methods of business which exclude participation in decisions affecting employees. The author sug- guests that, since the social scientists’ claim that participation aids production has not convinced business leaders of an economic value, the democratic values should, instead, be stressed as a motiva- tion. 907. SIMMONS, L. W. AND WOLFF, H. G. Social Science in Medicine. Russell Sage Foundation, New York, 1954. 908. SIMON, B. “Psychiatric Rehabili- tation.” ] Amer Med Ass, 171: 2098—2101, Dec. 12, 1959. 909. SIMON, H. A. Administrative Behavior: A Study of Decision-Mak- ing Processes in Administrative 07‘- ganization. MacMillan Co., New York, 1947. This is a work on organization with acknowledgement to Chester I. Barnard (entry No. 49) whose concepts relative to authority, decisionmaking and commu- nication are discussed with general ap- proval. 910. SIMPSON, R. L. AND GULLEY, W. H. “Goals, Environmental Pres- sures, and Organizational Charac- teristics.” Amer Sociol R, 27(3): 344-351, June 1962. A survey was conducted with 221 vol- untary associations which indicated that the goals and environment of an orga- nization will affect its internal structure and its operating practices. The hypo- thesis follows that organizations which must adapt to a wide range of pressures will differ in internal characteristics from those facing a narrower range of pres- sures. 911. SIMPSON, R. L. AND SIMPSON, I. H. “Social Origins, Occupational Advice, Occupational Values, and Work Careers.” Soc Forces, 40(3) : 264—271, 1962. Three hundred eighty interviews in- dicate that workers who received advice from numerous sources, whose main ad- visers were outside their families, and 136 who had positive orientations to work were relatively likely to obtain high-status first jobs. These relationships were to some extent independent of each other and of workers’ class background and for the most part they also applied to the workers’ choice of their most recent jobs. However, workers’ advice-seeking and values when they chose their first jobs were not related to their later job his- tories. The findings are examined in the light of alternative theories of occupa- tional choice. 912. SINGER, D. M. “A Study of Lump Sum Settlements and Reha- bilitation Under the Massachusetts Workmen’s Compensation Act.” Dissert Abstr, 22(4) :1286, 1961. 913. SIPPY, H. I. “Masked Symptoms in Safety and Health.” Industr Med Surg, 29: 127—129, March 1960. The dangers of having an “unwell per- son” on the job may be compounded by medication which mask symptoms prior to diagnosis. The author suggests a five- point program to deal with such diag- nostic problems. 914. SIROTA, D. “Some Effects of Promotional Frustration on Em- ployees’ Understanding of, and Attitudes Toward, Management.” Sociometry, 22 : 273—278, 1959. Satisfaction of promotional needs was related to understanding of company pol- icies and goals; those moderately frus- trated had the greatest understanding, while highly frustrated employees had least. Findings are interpreted in terms of frustration theory; severe frustration is apt to produce maladaptive behavior, while moderate frustration may produce problem solving behavior and motivate the employee to search for cues to expec- tations from management. 915. SLATER, E. AND SHIELDS, J. “Psychotic and Neurotic Illnesses in Twins.” Government P u b l i c a- OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES tions—Medical Research Council, Industrial Health Research Board, Report No. 278. H. M. Stationery Oflice, London, England, 1953. 916. SMITH, F. L. “Cause of Sickness Absenteeism Peculiar to Women.” Industr Med Surg, 13: 217—219, March 1944-. 917. SMITH, G. A. “The Promotion of Health: Industrial Medicine’s Contribution to Preventive Medi- cine.” Royal Soc Health ], 80: 340—344, July—August 1960. The author discusses the role of indus- trial medicine for increasing numbers of industrial employees and thus for the health of the Nation. He advocates pre- vention as a major concern of industrial medicine and a team approach as most efficient. 918. SMITH, G. C. “Occupational Health Services, Australia.” World Med ], 71189—190, May 1960. 919. SMITH, H. C. Psychology of In- dustrial Behavior. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1955. 920. SMITH, M. “University Student Intelligence and Occupation of Fa- thers.” Amer Sociol R, 7(6) : 764— 771, December 1942. 921. SMITH, M. B. “Research Strate- gies Toward a Conception of Posi- tive Mental Health.” Amer Psy- chologist, 14(1): 673—681, Novem- ber 1959. 922. SMITH, M. B., FAWCETT, J. T., EZEKIEL, R., AND ROTH, S. “A Factorial Study 01 Morale Among Peace Corps Teachers in Ghana.” ] Soc Issues, 19(3), 1963. 923. SMITH, E. D. AND NYMAN, R. C. Technology and Labor. Yale Uni- OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES versity Press, New Haven, Conn, 1939. 924. SMUTs, R. W. Women and Work in America. Columbia Uni- versity Press, New York, 1959. 925. SOCIAL S c I E N c E RESEARCH COUNCIL. Social Adjustment in Old Age. The Council, Bulletin 59, New York, 1948. 926. SOCKLER, H. C. Processes of 07'- ganization and Management. Pub- lic Affairs Press, Washington, D.C., 1948. Here is a collection of writings by sev- eral authors from areas of industrial man- agement and public administration. Of particular interest are two 40-year-old pa- pers on organization by Russell Robb, formerly of the Harvard Graduate School of Business Administration. 927. SODDY, K., editor. Identity, Mental Health and Value Systems: Cross-Cultural Studies in Mental Health. Quadrangle Books, Chi- cago, Ill., 1961. 928. SOMERS, A. R. Health Plan Ad- ministration. Foundation on Em- ployee Health, Medical Care and Welfare, Inc, New York, 1961. The techniques and procedures for ad- ministration of many different types of plans, together with copies of more than 35 current forms, are evaluated in terms of the most efficient methods for achiev- ing savings through administration with- out any modification of benefits. 929. SOLEM, A. R. “A Study of Re- actions to Retirement.” Personnel Admin, 26(3):8—16, May—June, 1963. Interviews were conducted with a group of 23 individuals in a large eastern manufacturing company, all of whom were within 32 months of retirement at 776—430—65———~10 137 age 65. The purpose of these interviews was to determine how they experienced the prerctirement period and what were their expectations for the postretirement period. A second series of interviews were held with 15 of these individuals from 1 to 29 months after their retire- ment. Findings suggest that there are greatly different “psychological ages and adaptations.” 930. SOROKIN, P. Social Mobility. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1927. 931. SPATES, T. G. “Leadership and Human Relations at the Place Where People Work.” Advanc Mgmt, 13298—102, September 1948. 932. SPEARS, E. M. “Management Looks to its Health.” Mgmt Rec, 9: 150, June 1947. 933. SPENCER, L. M. What YPO Presidents Think About: Prelimi- nary Findings of the 1954 Survey. Young Presidents’ Organization, Science Research Associates, Chi- cago, Ill., 1954. 934-. SPENCER, L. M. Portrait of Company Presidents. Third An- nual Survey Report, Young Presi- dents’ Organization, Science Re- search Associates, Chicago, Ill., 1955. 935. SPICER, E. H., editor. Human Problems in Technological Change. Russell Sage Foundation, New York, 1952. 936. SPIRO, E. S. “Women in Indus- try: Patterns of Women’s Work and Occupational Health and Safety.” Amer ] Public Health, 50: 1318— 1319, September 1960. 937. SPRATTLING, F. H. “Absenteeism in Industry: Assembly and Uses of Sickness Absence Statistics.” Royal 138 Society Promot Health ], 77:667— 675, October 1957. 938. SPRIEGEL, W. R. AND MYERS, C. E., editors. The Writings of the Gil- brethx. The Dorsey Press, Home- wood, 111., 1953. 939. SROLE, L., LANGNER, T. 8., MICHAEL, S. T., OPLER, M. K., AND RENNIE, T. A. C. Mental Health in the Metropolis: The Midtown Manhattan Study McGraw—Hill, New York, 1962. Research teams including psychiatric social workers, clinical psychologists, so- cial caseworkers, and psychiatrists, con- ducted an extensive (65-page interview schedule) interview program among a probability sample drawn from 175,000 residents of Manhattan in the 20—59 year age group. The fundamental postulate, that so- ciocultural conditions aflect mental health in adulthood, was explored through the following independent varia- bles: age, sex, parental socioeconomic status, ethnic origin, parental religion, generations in United States. Reciprocal variables, open to reciprocating influence from mental health, were marital status, socioeconomic status, rural-urban back- ground, own religion. Among analyses of the data were interpretations and diag- noses by the psychiatrists, indicating a high percentage of disability symptoms. 940. STAGNER, R. “Motivational As- pects of Industrial Morale.” Per- sonnel Psychol, 11:64—70, 1958. This theoretical discussion describes morale as arising from the degree of con- gruence between individual and organi- zational goals. Thus, morale is within the context of an “individual-group re- lationship; it is an index of the extent to which the individual perceives a prob- ability of satisfying his own motives through cooperation with the group.” 944. STARK, S. 947. STEINBERG, H. H. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 941. STAGNER, R. Psychology of In- dustrial Conflict. John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1956. 942. STAMLER, J., LINDBERG, H. A., BERKSON, D. M., SHAFFER, A., MILLER, W., AND POINDEXTER, A. “Prevalence and Incidence of Coro- nary Disease in Strata of the Labor Force of a Chicago Industrial Cor- poration.” ] Chron Dis, 11 1405— 420, April 1960. 943. STANDARD OIL Co. OF NEW JERSEY AND AFFILIATES. “A Bio- metric Study of 10 Years’ Medical Service.” Med Bull, 7:57, 1947. “Executive Person- ality and Psychological Testing.” Curr Econ Comment, 20(2) 215—32, 1958. The author refutes William H. Whyte’s thesis (in The Organization Man) that personality testing of business executives is unscientific and unethical. 945. STEIN, M. 1., MACKENZIE, J. N., RODGER, R. R., AND MERR, B. “A Case Study of a Scientist,” in Clini- cal Studies of Personality, Burton, A. and Harris, R. E., editors. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1955. 946. STEIN, M. R., VIDICH, A. J., AND WHITE, D. M., editors. Identity and Anxiety, Survival of the Person in Man- Society. The Free Press, Glencoe, 111., 1960. Forty-three eminent scientists and hu- manists present discussions dealing with identity and anxiety and their sources in mass life, including work, politics, re- ligion, race, sex, the family, and “the dissolution of identities.” “Industrial Health and Hygiene Review, 1947.” OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES Industr Med, 15:105—115, April 1948. 948. STEINER, S. D. “Management Health Examination Program in General Motors.” ] Occup Med, 32424—428, September 1961. 949. STEPHENSON, R. R. “Occupa- tional Choice as a Crystallized Self- Concept.” ] Counsel Psychol, 8: 211—216, 1961. The occupational status of 343 pre- medical students who were not admitted to medical school at the first attempt was determined 4 to 8 years after application. The results were analyzed in terms of medical, medically related but nonmedi- cal degree, and nonmedically related oc- cupations. The findings were inter- preted as evidence that the self-concept of the premedical student has crystal- lized prior to making application to a school of medicine. 950. STERN, E. M. Notes After Fifty. National Association for Mental Health, New York, 1955. Designed to encourage planning in preparation for the later years, and of particular interest to personnel execu- tives for use in preretirement counseling programs, the author presents six illus- trated four-page letters to men and women 50 and over. 951. STERNBACH, R. A., GUSTAFSON, L. A. AND COLLIER, R. L. “Don’t Trust the Lie Detector.” Harv Bsns R, 40(6) : 127—134, November— December 1962. The inadequacies of the polygraph as a screening device of potentially dis- honest employees are felt to far out- weigh any usefulness. Lack of uniform training among polygraph operators, as well as problems of validity and relia- bility are negative factors. The author also feels it a moral issue. It is suggested that the best tools are tests, question- 139 naires, interviews, and, of highest value, firsthand observations of performance. 952. STEVENSON, G. S. Mental Health Planning for Social Action. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1956. 953. STEVENSON, I. AND RIPLEY, H. S. “Variations in Respiration and Res- piratory Symptoms During Changes in Emotion.” Psyc/zosom Med, 14: 476, 1952. 954. STEVENSON, I. AND WOLFF, H. “Life Situations, Emotions and Bron- chial Mucous.” Psychosom Med, 11:223, 1949. 955. STEWART, D. Health.” 1960. 956. STOGDILL, R. M. “Personal Fac- tors Associated with Leadership: A Survey Of the Literature.” ] Psy— chol, 25:35—71, 1948. “Occupational Med Ann, 782316—327, 957. STOGDILL, R. M. AND COONs, A. E., editors. Leader Behavior: It: Description and Measurement. Ohio Leadership Studies, Bureau of Business Research, Ohio State Uni- versity, Columbus, Ohio, 1957. This monograph consists of a collection of papers by staff members of the Ohio State Leadership Studies. The papers de- scribe the development, analysis, and ap- plication of.set of items devised for the de- scription of leader behavior. These items were used for the description of the leader behavior of business executives, foremen, teachers, college administrators, Air Force officers, and Navy officers. Data on the relation to leader behavior to ef- fectiveness measures, group descriptions, and attitude climate are presented. A copy of the Leader Behavior Descrip- tions Questionnaire and directions for its use are also included. 140 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 958. STOGDILL, R. M., SHARTLE, C. L., SCOTT, E. L., COONS, A. E., AND JAYNES, W. E. A Predictive Study of Administrative Work Patterns. Ohio Leadership Studies, Bureau of Business Research, Ohio State Uni- versity, Columbus, Ohio, 1956. 959. STOKINGER, H. E. Armed Forces Index of Occupational Health Methods and Equipment. National Research Council, Washington, D.C., 1955. 960. STOKINGER, H. E. “Standard for Safeguarding the Health of the In- dustrial Worker.” Public Health Rept, 70:1, 1955. (Reprint NO. 3251.) 961. STOKES, J. L. “Medical Aspects of an Industrial Medical Plan.” Med ] Aust, 46(2) :752—753, No- vember 1959. 962. STONEQUIST, E. V. The Margi- nal Man. Charles Scribner’s Sons, New York, 1937. Prof. Robert Park once described the “marginal man” as the individual who through migration, education, marriage, or some other influence leaves one social group or culture without making a satis- factory adjustment to another and finds himself on the margin of each but a member of neither. He is further de- scribed in this volume. 963. STOTLAND, E. “Peer Groups and Reactions to Power Figures,” in Studies in Social Power, Cartwright, D., editor. Research Center for Group Dynamics, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich., 1959. 964. STOTLAND, E., THORLEY, S., THOMAS, E. J., COHEN, A. R., AND ZANDER, A. “The Effects Of Group Expectations and Self-Esteem upon Self-Evaluation.” ] Abnorm Soc Psyc/zol, 54:55—63, 1957. 965. STRAUSS, G. AND SAYLES, L. R. Personnel: The Human Problem of Management. Prentice-Hall, En- glewood Cliffs, N.J., 1960. This textbook is addressed to the stu- dent of business who wants to equip him- self to deal effectively with the human problems of the business organization. Instructors of courses in the closely allied fields of public, educational, and hospital personnel administration will find that much of the content is also relevant to their p a r t i c u l a r needs. Thirty-One chapters are distributed among seven parts: “Components of the Personnel Problem,” “Supervision,” “Supervisory Skills,” “Organization,” “Manpower and Employee Development,” “Incen- tives for Effective Performance,” and “Management’s Responsibilities in Deal- ing With People.” 966. STRAUSS, M. A. “D e f e r r e d Gratification, Social Class and the Achievement Syndrome.” Amer Sociol R, 27(3):326—335, June 1962. Findings from a study of self-imposed postponement of gratification, as related to social class and social mobility, among 338 male high school students, supported the theory that need deferment is func- tional for social mobility in American society, through correlation with achieve- ment role performance and role orienta- tion. The relevant theoretical and re- search literature is reviewed. 967. STRAUS, R. AND BACON, S. Al- coholism and Social Stability. Yale Center Of Alcohol Studies, New Haven, Conn., 1951. A study of occupational integration in 2,033 male clinic patients with a diag- nosis of alcoholism is presented. 968. STRODTBECK, F. “Family inter- action, Values and Achievement,” OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 141 in Talent and Society, McClelland, D. C., editor. Van Norstrand, Princeton, N.J., 1958. A positive relationship between feel- ings of personal control and orientation toward achievement, in terms of both performance and purpose, is reported. 969. STRODTBECK, F. L. AND HARE, A. P. “Bibliography of Small Group Research (1900—1953).” Socio- metry, 17(2) :107—178, 1954. 970. STROTHER, C., editor. Psychol- ogy and Mental Health: A Report of the Institute on Education and Training for Psychological Contri- butions to Alental Health Held at Stanford University, August, 1955. American Psychological Associa- tion, Washington, D.C., 1957. 971. STROTHER, G. B., editor. Social Science Approaches to Business Be- havior. The Dorsey Press, Home- wood, 111., 1961. This collection of papers by social scientists who participated in the Ford Foundation grant to the University of Wisconsin for interdisciplinary approach to business problems includes: Strother, G. B., “Changing Concepts of Teaching and Research in Business”; Dubin, R., “Business B e h a v i o r Behaviorally Viewed”; Argyris, C., “The Integration of the Individual and the Organiza- tion”; Warner, W., "The Careers of American Business and Government Ex- ecutives: A Comparative Analysis”; Whyte, W., “Applying Behavioral Sci- ence Research to Management Prob- lems”; Luce, R., “Psychological Studies of Risky Decision ‘Making”; Haire, M., “The Concept of Power and the Concept of Man.” 972. STUART, I. R. “Intergroup Re- lations and Acceptance of Puerto Ricans and Negroes in an Im- 975. STRUNK, O. migrants’ Industry.” ] Soc Psychol, 56:89—96, 1962. Some problems revolving around cul- tural conformation of group personality characteristics are investigated in an in- dustrial setting. The efforts of a labor union to improve the economic status of Negroes and Puerto Ricans met with obstacles within the personality structure of Negroes as well as in anticipated resistance from the groups making up the industry. Negroes more than Puerto Ricans refused to leave the security of their fellows although they would im- prove their economic status by doing so. In addition, they could not accommodate themselves to the competitive demands of a piecework craft. 973. STUB, H. R. “The Occupational Characteristics of Migrants to Du- luth: A Retest of Rose’s Hypothe- sis.” Amer Sociol R, 27:87—90, 1962. The present study corroborates the major findings of Rose’s earlier study of distance of migration and socioeconomic status of migrants. The two studies in- dicate that both in Minneapolis and Du- luth professionals and managers migrate longer distances than do lower status mi< grants. Likewise the higher status mi- grants are more likely to come from Eastern urban centers while middle and lower status groups come from rural areas and small cities and towns lying west of the Mississippi. 974. STUIT, D. B. Predicting Success in Professional Schools. American Council on Education, Washington, D.C., 1949. The uses of tests for counseling and selection of students in the fields of engi- neering, law, medicine, dentistry, music, agricultural training, teacher training, and nursing are summarized. “Man, Emotions and the Ministry.” Relig Educ, 54: 429—434, September—October 1959. 142 An analysis of approximately 100 auto- biographies of Protestant ministerial stu- dents was made considering their motiva- tions for entering the ministry: altruism, mystical call, desire for reform, curiosity, aptitude, prestige, security emotional in- adequacy parental wishes, money, and glamour. 976. SUNIER, J. “Medical Problems in a Great International Port.” Tri- angle, 4:271—276, October 1960. 977. SUTHERLAND, E. H. The Profes- sional Thief. University of Chicago Press, Chicago, Ill., 1937. 978. SWADos, H. 0n the Line. Lit- tle, Brown & 00., Boston, Mass., 1957. 979. SWADOS, H. Happy Worker.” 68, Aug. 17, 1957. 980. SWAN, P. G. “Some Results from the Periodical Medical Examination of Executives in Industry.” Tram A55 Industr Med Oficers, 8(2), July 1958. 981. SWANSON, G. E., NEWCOMB, T. M. AND HARTLEY, E. L., editors. Readings in Social Psychology. Harry Holt, New York, 1952. 982. SWOFFORD, L. “Mental Hygiene and the College Library.” Coll Res Libr, 8: 161—166, 1947. 983. SYMONDs, P. M. “Role Playing as a Diagnostic Procedure in the Se- lection of Leaders.” Sociatry, 1:43, March 1947. 984. TAGIURI, R., editor. Research Needs in Executive Selection: A Symposium. Harvard University School of Business Administration, Division of Research, Boston, Mass., 1961. “The Myth of the Nation, 185:65— OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 985. TANNENBAUM, A. S. “Control in Organizations: Individual Adjust- ment and Organizational Perform- ance.” Admin Sci Q, 7(2):236, September 1962. This discussion of the psychological values and the costs of increasing em- ployees’ control and responsibility at lower levels in the organizational hier- archy is based on industrial research findings of the University of Michigan Survey Research Center. 986. TANNENBAUM, R., KALLEJIAN, V., AND WESCHLER, J. R. “Train- ing Managers for Leadership.” Personnel, 30, January 1954. 987. TANNENBAUM, R. AND SCHMIDT, W. H. “How to Choose a Leader- ship Pattern.” Harv Bsns R, 36:95— 101, 1958. 988. TARNOPOL, L. “Motivation in Human Relations: Part 1: The Scientific Background.” ] Amer Soc Training Directors, 16(1) : 39— 43, January 1962. 989. TARNOPOL, L. “Motivation in Human Relations: Part 2: Frustra- tion.” ] Amer Soc Training Direc- tors, 16(2):23—27, February 1962. 990. TARNOPOL, L. AND TARNOPOL, J. “How Top-Rated Supervisors Differ From the Low-Rated.” Personnel ], 34(9) :331—335, February 1956. 991. TAYLOR, F. W. Scientific Man- agement. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1947. This is an historic description of prin- ciples of organizational structure and function based on the assumption of ra- tional, predictable, behavior motivated by monetary reward. 992. TAYLOR, J. A. “Future Role of Occupational Medicine in the Public OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES H e a l t h Programme.” Occup Health R, 14:12—14, 1962. 993. TEBROOK, H. E. “The Epi- demiologic Method as Applied to Industrial Medicine.” Arch Indus Health, 212224—227, March 1960. 994. TEXAS STATE DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH. “Selected Mental Health Films, 1957—58.” Texas State De- partment of Health, Division Of Mental Health, Austin, Tex. 995. THOMAS, D. 8., AND LOOKE, B. Z. “Marital Status, Education and Occupational Differentials in Mental Disease.” Milbank Mem Fund Q, 41(2):145~160, April 1963. Among relationships between personal indices and mental hospital admissions were inverse relations between marital status, occupational class, and education and performance and admission. 996. THOMAS, M. “Sexual Symb'ol- ism in Industry.” Int ] Psychoanal, 32-part 2:128—133, 1951. 997. THOMPSON, V. A. “Hierarchy, Specialization, and Organizational Conflict.” Admin ci Q, 5(4) :485— 521, March 1961. Factors contributing to conflict in hier- archical organizational structure are dis- cussed in terms of inconsistencies between rights and interdependencies of roles. Such conflict is not formally recognized within the modern organization and reso- lution must therefore be accomplished in- formally, or the conflict repressed and glossed over with a superficially harmoni- ous atmosphere. 998. THOMPSON, V. A. Modern Or- ganization. Alfred A. Knopf, New York, 1961. “Dysfunctional behavior” in organiza- tions may result from tension and in- 143 security over role incongruities arising from contemporary imbalances between rights and technologically required abil- ities. The author introduces the concept of “bureaupathic” behavior at the leader- ship level, which may fostcr “bureausis” among clients or employees, creating “a kind of social disease.” 999. THOMSON, D. J. “Expectations of Management Regarding Occupa- tional Health.” Industr [Med Surg, 28:555—557, December 1959. 1000. THORMAN, G. Toward Men- tal Health. Public Affairs Com- mittee, New York, 1946. 1001. THORNE, F. C. “Life Record Criteria Of Psychological Health.” ] Clin Psychol, 14:123—132, 1958. Four pilot studies of life records of 25 outstandingly healthy persons were un- dertaken to empirically identify some be- havior characteristics and personality di- mensions. Freedom from chronic mental disorder, stable work history, a broad range of vocational and avocational in- terests, and stable conduct are common characteristics in the group. 1002. THORPE, J. J. “Attendance Motivations.” Industr Med Surg, 24:450—452,()ctober 1955. 1003. TIETzE, C., LEMKAU, R, AND COOPER, M. “Personal Disorder and Spatial Mobility.” Amer ] Social, 48:29—30, July 194-2. 1004-. TIETzE, C., LEMKAU, R, AND COOPER, M. “Schizophrenia, Ma- nic-Depressive Psychosis, and Socio- Economic STATUS.” Amer ]. Social, 47: 167—175, 1941. 1005. TIFFIN, J. Industrial Psychol- ogy. Prentice-Hall, New York, 1952. 1006. TIME. “Mother Union. Time, 41—42,]an.16,1950. 144 1007. TILLIS, S. “The Manager’s Job: A Systems Approach.” Harv Bsns R, 41(1) :73, January—Febru- ary 1963. 1008. TOKOTI, M. “Applied Anthro- pology in Industry: A Critical Ap- praisal.” fapanese Social R, 8(1) : 140—147, November 1957. 1009. TOMISLAV, T. “Levels of Knowledge of Requirements as a Motivational Factor in the Work Situation.” Hum Relat, 45:197, August 1962. An experiment with pupils doing arith- metic in a Yugoslavian school was de- signed to determine the effects of demo- cratic or autocratic approaches among four groups. The researcher, from the University of Belgrade, found the task- oriented democratic approach, which in- corporated group discussion, to be most productive. 1010. TOMINAGA, K. “The Concept, Models, and the Measurement of the Social System.” japanese Social R, 7(2) : 17—30, February 1957. 1011. TRASKO, V. M. “Industrial Hygiene Milestones in Government Agencies.” Amer ] Public Health, 45(1) :39, January 1955. 1012. TRASKO, V. M. “Occupational Disease Reporting: A Review of Current Practices, Togther With a Collection of Incidence Statistics.” Public Health Service Publication No. 288, Government Printing Of- fice, Washington, D.C., 1953. 1013. TRASKO, V. M. “Occupational Health and Safety Legislation: A Compilation of State Laws and Reg- ulations.” Public Health Service Publication No. 357, Government OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 1954. 1014. TRIANDIS, H. C. “A Critique and Experimental Design for the Study of the Relationship Between Productivity and Job Satisfaction.” Psychol Bull, 56: 309—312, July 1959. A new approach to the study of the relationship between employee output and job satisfaction is needed, which would examine the characteristics of workers shown to be high in both of these factors with groups of workers not operat- ing at such a level. A procedure to locate such workers is described. 1015. TRIST, E. L. AND BAMFORTH, V. “Some Social and Psychological Consequences of the Long-Wall Method of Coal-getting.” Human Relat,4:3—38, 1951. 1016. TRITES, D. K. AND KUBALA, A. L. “Characteristics of Successful Pilots.” ] Auiat Med, 28: 34—40, 1957. 1017. TROW, D. B. “Executive Suc- cession in Small C o m p a n i e 5.” Admin Sci Q, 6(2) :228—239, Sep- tember 1961. 1018. TRUMBO, D. A. “Individual and Group Correlates of Attitudes Toward Work Related Change.” ] Appl Prychol, 45(5) :338—344, 1961. Questionnaire and personnel file data obtained from 278 workers indicated that employees’ perceptions of change are in- fluenced by situational factors, such as group cohesiveness and supervisory atti- tudes, and by individual factors, such as differences in capacity and needs for va- riety, status, or self-expression. 1019. TUCKERMAN, J. AND LORGE, I. Retirement and the Indurtrial Worker. Teachers College, Colum- OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES bia University. Bureau Of Publica- tions, New York, 1953. 1020. TUER, D. F. “The Industrial Physician in the Personnel Pro- gram.” Personnel, 26:30—32, May 1947. 1021. TURK, H. “Social Cohesion Through Variant Values: Evidence from Medical Role Relations.” Amer Social R 28(1) : 28—37, 1963. 1022. TURK, H. AND TURK, T. “Per- sonal Sentiments in a Hierarchy.” Soc Forces, 40(2):137—140, De- cember 1961. 1023. TURNER, A. N. “A Researcher Views Human Adjustment to Auto- mation.” Advanc Mgmt, 21:21— 25, May 1956. 1024. TURNER, J. W. A. “Metallic Poisons and the Nervous System.” Lancet, 268:661, March 1955. 1025. TYHURST, J. S. “The Role Of Transition Status—Including Disas- ters in Mental Illness,” in Sympo- sium on Preventive and Social Psy- chiatry. Government Printing Of- fice, Washington, D.C., 1958. 1026. UAW—CIO, OLDER AND RE- TIRED W O R K E R 5 DEPARTMENT. Handbook on Retired Workers. UAW—C10, Detroit, Mich. 1027. UAW—CIO EDUCATION DE- PARTMENT. Automation: A Report to the UAW—C10 Economic and Collective Bargaining Conference, Nov. 1954. UAW—CIO, Detroit, Mich., January 1955. 1028. US. CONGRESS, SENATE COM- MITTEE ON LABOR AND PUBLIC WEL- FARE. Mental Health Hearings. 145 Government Printing Office, Wash- ington, D.C., 1955. 1029. U.S. DEPARTMENT OF THE AR- MY. Army Regulations No. 40—155 M e d i c a I Department: Physical Standards and Physical Profiling for Enlistment and Induction. Gov- ernment Printing Oflice, Washing- ton, D.C., August 1948. 1030. U.S. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH, EDUCATION, AND WELFARE. “Man- agement and Union Health and Medical Programs.” Public Health Service Publication NO. 329, Gov- ernment Printing Office, Washing- ton, D.C., 1953. 1031. U.S. DEPARTMENT OF LABOR. Automatic Technology and Its Im- plications: A Selected Annotated Bibliography. Bureau of Labor Statistics Bulletin No. 1198, Wash- ington, D.C., August 1956. 1032. U.S. OFFICE OF STRATEGIC SERV- ICES STAFF. Assessment of Men. Rinehart, New York, 1948. 1033. U.S. PRESIDENT’S COMMITTEE ON LABOR-MANAGE— MENT POLICY. “The Benefits and Problems Incident to Automation ADVISORY and Other Technological Advances: Report.” Government Printing Of- fice, Washington, D.C., Jan. 11, 1962. 1034. U.S. PUBLIC HEALTH SERVICE. “Annual Report for Fiscal Year 1955 of the Occupational Health Branch, Public Health Service.” Arch Industr Health, 13:385, 1956. 1035. U.S. PUBLIC HEALTH SERVICE. A Disability Table for Urban Work- 146 ers. The DO, 1942. 1036. U.S. PUBLIC HEALTH SERVICE. “Government and I n d u s t rial Service, Washington, Health: The Public Health Serv- ice.” Industr Med Surg, 22:498, 1953. 1037. U.S. PUBLIC HEALTH SERVICE. A List of Health Information Leaf- lets and Pamphlets of the P.H.S. Subjects: Alcoholism, Poison Ivy, Heat Prostration and Personal Health. Public Health Service Publication No. 323, Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 1957. 1038. US. PUBLIC HEALTH SERVICE. The Physician in the U.S. Public Health Service. Public Health Service Publication No. 394, GOV- ernment Printing Office, Washing- ton, D.C., 1954. 1039. U.S. PUBLIC HEALTH SERVICE. The Public Health Service Today. Public Health Service Publication No. 165, Government Printing Of- fice, Washington, D.G., 1955. 1040. U.S. PUBLIC HEALTH SERVICE. “Resurvey of Vermont Granite Sheds and Quarries.” Arch Industr Health. 13:97. 1956. 1041. U.S. PUBLIC HEALTH REPORT. “Wide Focus for Industrial Health.” Public Health Rept, 75:369—370, April 1960. 1042. UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN. A Discussional on Medical-Personal Relations in Industry. Proceedings of Inservice Training Course No. 38, School of Public Health, October 1951. University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan, October 1951. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 1043. UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN, SCHOOL OF PUBLIC HEALTH. “Medical Personal Relations in In- dustry: A Discussion.” Industr Med Surg, 21(1) :28, January 1952. 1044. URWICK, L. Management of Tomorrow. Nisbet and (30., Lon- don, England, 1933. An exponent of scientific management suggest the structure and functioning of a rational organizational management. 1045. URWICK, L. “The Manager’s Span of Control.” Harv Bsns R, 34(3) :39—47, May—June 1956. 1046. VAN ATTA, F. A. “The View- point of Labor: The Role of the Industrial Medical Department.” Industr Med Surg, 29:61—63, Feb- ruary 1960. 1047. VAN AUKEN, K. G. The In- troduction of an Electronic Compu- ter in a Large Insurance Co. De- partment of Labor, Bureau of Labor Statistics, Washington, DC. 1955. 1048. VEBLEN, T. The Theory of the Leisure Class. B. S. Huebsch, Inc., New York, 1918. 1049. VEBLEN, T. The Instinct of Workmanship. B. S. Huebsch, Inc., New York, 1922. 1050. VERNON, H. M. “Fatigue and Efficiency in the Iron and Steel In- dustry.” Government Publica- tions—Medical Research Council, Industrial Health Research Board, H.M. Stationery Office, London England, 1920. 1051. VERNON, H. M. “The Speed of Adaptation of Output to Altered Hours of Work.” Government Pub- lications—Medical Research Coun- cil, Industrial Health Research OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES Board, H.M. Stationery Office, Lon- don, England, 1920. 1052. VERNON, H. M. Industrial Fatigue and Efliciency. Routledge, London, England, 1921. 1053. VERNON, P. E. “The Assess- ment of Psychological Qualities by Verbal lWethods: A Survey of Atti- tude Tests, Rating Scales and Per- sonality Questionnaires.” Govern- ment Publications#Medical Re- search Council, Industrial Health Research Board, H.M. Stationery Office, London, England, 1938 (re- printed 1952) . 1054. VISHER, S. S. “A Study of the Type of the Place of Birth and of the Occupations of Fathers of Subjects of Sketches in W ho’s Who in Amer- ica.” Amer ] Social, 30(5) : 551~ 557, March 1925. 1055. VITELES, M. S. “The Critical Viewpoint in Vocational Selection.” ] Appl Psychol, 9(2) 2131—138, June 1925. 1056. VITELES, M. S. “Psychology in Industry.” Psychol Bull, 27:567— 635,1930. 1057. VITELES, M. S. Motivation and Morale in Industry. W. W. Norton & Co., New York, 1953. 1058. VONACHEN, H. A. “Medicine in Industry.” ] Amer Med Ass, 157 (18) : 1992, Apr. 30, 1955. A concise statement of the functions of an industrial medical program. 1059. VONACHEN, H. A. AND KRO- NENBERG, M. “The Education of the Industrial Physician.” Industr Med Surg, 21:561—566, 1952. 147 1060. VONACHEN, H. A. AND ROCHE, W. J., Jr. “Comparative Study of Executive Health Examinations.” ] Occup Med, 52389—395, August 1963. A report of health examinations given management personnel of Caterpillar Tractor Co. provides statistical analyses of disease and abnormality as related to age group classifications, and is com- pared with similar studies. The author comments on stress associated with the nature of eXCCutive positions. 1061. VROOM, V. H. “The Effects of Attitudes on Perception of Organi- zational Goals.” Hum Relat, 13 (3) :229—240, August 1960. The effects of attitudes toward an or- ganization upon the perceptions of the organization’s goals were studied. The author generalizes that “persons tend to attribute their own attitudes, opinions, and goals to persons, groups, and organi- zations toward which they have a posi- tive attitude and deny them in persons, groups, and organizations toward which they have a negative attitude.” 1062. VROOM, V. H. “Human Rela- tions Research in Industry: Some Things Learned,” in Research Fron- tiers in Industrial Relations Today. 14th Annual Conference, Industrial Relations Centre, McGill University, Montreal, Canada, 1962. 1063. VROOM, V. H. “Projection, Negation, and the Self-Concept.” Hum Relat, 12(4) :335—344, 1959. Some conditions associated with the degree to which one person perceives an- other as having similar attitudes and opinions were studied through attitude measurement data from 352 supervisor- subordinate pairs working in an elec- tronics manufacturing company. Find- ings indicated that an individual tends to project his own attitudes and opinions to persons toward whom he has a positive 148 attitude, while negating those in persons he dislikes. 1064. VROOM, V. H. Some Personal- ity Determinants of the Efi‘ects of Participation. Prentice-Hall, Inc, Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 1960. Satisfaction and performance on the job are related differentially to the in- dividual’s feeling of participation (amount of influence he feels he has in decision making), his independence needs being the intervening variable. 1065. VROOM, V. H. AND MANN, F. C. “Leader Authoritarianism and Employee Attitudes.” Personnel Psychol, 13:125—140, 1960. Substantial differences between effects of leader authoritarianism on the atti- tudes of employees in two kinds of work groups were found within a single or- ganization. Employees in small, highly interdependent, and high-interaction work groups had more positive attitudes toward equalitarian leaders. In con- trast, employees in large work groups in which opportunities for interaction in- terdependence among workers and be- tween workers and their supervisors were greatly restricted had more positive at- titudes toward authoritarian leaders. 1066. WADE, L. “Medical Prepara- tion for Retirement.” Industr Med Surg, 22: 215, May 1953. 1067. WADE, L. “What is Industrial Medicine?” Industr Med Surg, 29: 54—56, February 1960. 1068. WADE, L. “Why People Don’t Work.” Texas ] Med, 54:496—500, July 1958. 1069. WALD, R. AND DOTY, R. A. “The Top Executive: A First Hand Profile.” Harv Bins R, 32:44—54, 1954. 1070. WALKER, C. R. “Life in the Automatic Factory.” Harv Bsns R, OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 36:111—119, 1958. 1071. WALKER, C. R. Steel: The Diary of a Furnace Worker. Atlan- tic Monthly Press, Boston, Mass., 1922. 1072. WALKER, C. R. Toward the Automatic Factory: A Case Study of Men and Machines. Yale Uni- versity Press, New Haven, Conn., 1957. 1073. WALKER, C. R. AND GRIFFITH, R. “Case History of a Steel Mill,” in Man and Automation. Report of Proceedings of Conference Spon- sored by Society for Applied An- thropology. Published by the Tech- nology Project, Yale University, New Haven, Conn., 1956. 1074. WALKER, C. R. AND GUEST, R. H. The Man on the Assembly Line. Harvard University Press, Cam- bridge, Mass., 1956. 1075. WALKER, C. R., GUEST, R., AND TURNER, A. Foreman on the As- sembly Line. Harvard University Press, Cambridge, Mass., 1956. This longitudinal study focuses on the impact, and often unintended conse- quences, of technology on workers and foremen. 1076. WALKER, N. Morale in the Civil Service: A Study of the Desk Worker. Aldine Publishing Co., Chicago, 111., 1962. Human relations within the ‘welfare work” functions of three British Minis- tries was studied to provide comparative data with the United States and with noncivil .service research findings. Four main areas were investigated: Dismissal practices and their effects on satisfaction and efficiency; the “oflice as a factory” approach to replicate some directions and January — February 5 OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES findings of the Hawthorne study; turn- over and sick leave as related to job satis- faction; and relationship Of personal data Many dif- ferences were found in comparison with other area studies. 1077. WALLACH, M. A. AND KOGAN, N. “Aspects Of Judgment and De- cision Making: Interrelationships and Changes with Age.” Behav Sci, 6(1) :23—36, January 1961. Procedures for assessing aspects of judgment and decisionmaking, such as utility, subjective probability, extremity, and confidence, were developed and ad- ministered to 511 adults varying in age and sex, while similar in intelligence and educational levels. Findings indicate dif- ferences in age and sex on confidence and extremity of decisions. “Disutility or deterrence of failure was found to be positively related to subjective probabil- ity of failure.” 1078. WALLIN, J. E. “The Psycho- logical, Educational, and Social Problems Of the Aging as Viewed by a Mid-Octogenarian.” ] Genet Psychol, 100:4146, 1962. The author stresses the need for indi- vidualized perceptions of the aging. Many of the mental and social malad- justments, being socially produced, can be prevented or overcome. The impor- tance of activity therapy is described in terms of “creative, remunerative work,” which can be a “rejuvenating force.” The writer protests against involuntary, automatic retirement systems at an arbi- trary age and advocates adoption of plans in accordance with scientific find- ings. variables to efficiency ratings. 1079. WALTER REED ARMY INSTITUTE OF RESEARCH, AND NATIONAL RE- SEARCH COUNCIL. Symposium on Preventive and Social Psychiatry. US. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 1957. 149 1080. WALTERS, R. E. “Does Your Company Need a Doctor?” Person- nel ], 41(10) :486—490, November 1962. The scope of an occupational health program is defined by listing its functions, although not specifically citing mental health. 1081. WAR MANPOWER COMMISSION. “The Training Within Industry Re- port, 1940—1945.” War Manpower Commission. US. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C., September 1945. 1082. WARNER, W. L. The Corpora- tion in the Emergent American So- ciety. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1962. In “A Ford Distinguished Lecture” this sociologist analyzes demands made upon big business leaders by their high status and considers what this means for the lives of these individuals in their com- munities. 1083. WARNER, W. L. “The Society, the Individual and His Mental Dis- orders.” Amer ] Psychiat, 94:275— 286, September 1937. 1084. WARNER, W. L. The Status System of a Modern Community. Yale University Press, New Haven, Conn, 1942. 1085. WARNER, W. L. AND ABEGGLEN, J. C. Big Business Leaders in America. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1955. 1086. WARNER, W. L. AND ABEGGLEN, J. C. Occupational Mobility in American Business and Industry, 1928—1952. University Of Minne- sota Press, Minn., 1955. MInneapOlIs, 150 1087. WARNER, W. L. AND Low, J. O. The Social System of the Modern Factory. Yale University Press, New Haven, Conn, 1947. 1088. WARNER, W. L. AND LUNT, P. S. The Social Life of a Modern Com- munity. Yale University Press, New Haven, Conn, 1941. 1089. WARNER, W. L. AND SROLE, L. The Social Systems of American Ethnic Groups. Yale University Press, New Haven, Conn., 1945. 1090. WARSHAW, L. J. “Employment of the Handicapped.” N YS ] Med, 60:2426—2433, August 1960. 1091. WARSHAW, L. J., editor. The Heart in Industry. Harper & Broth- ers, New York, 1960. 1092. WASSERMAN, P. “Measure- ment and Evaluation of Organiza- tional Performance,” in McKinsey Foundation Annoted Bibliography. Graduate School of Business and Public Administration, Cornell Uni- versity, Ithaca, N.Y., 1959. 1093. WATSON, G. AND SEIDMAN, J. M. “Dissatisfactions in Work.” ] Soc Psyclzol, 13:183—186, 1941. 1094. WATSON, J. AND LIPPITT, R. “Cross-Cultural Experience as a Source of Attitude Change.” ] Conflict Resolut, 2(1) :61—66, March, 1958. A group of 29 Germans who visited the United States for from 6 to 12 months responded to three interviews and questionnaires: Soon after arrival, shortly before departure, and 6 months after their return. Sources and phases of attitude changes in the host country, as well as readjustment problems toward their “native” values on their return, are described. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 1095. WATTS, G. “Prescription for Executives”: Accompanying “Your Job Doesn’t Have To Drive You Nuts.” Financial Post, 49(32) 213, August1955. 1096. WATTS, G. S. “Selection of Candidates for Foremanship Train- ing.” ] Amer Soc Training Direc- tors, 16(2) :39—46, February 1962. 1097. WAYNE, G. J. “Work Therapy in the Soviet Union.” Merit Hosp, 12(8) :21—23, 1961. This discussion of the Soviet work therapy program at the Bechterov In- stitute in Leningrad points out that while its applicability to treatment of mental illness is questionable, selected emphases deserve further consideration. 1098. WEATHERBY, F. E. “War Neu- roses After Air Attack on Oahu, Ter- ritory of Hawaii, December 7, 1941.” War Med, 4: 270, 1943. 1099. WEAVER, N. K. “The Selective Placement of Cardiacs in Industry: An Analysis of Experience in a Large Refinery.” Med Bull, 19:329—339, November 1959. 1100. WEIL, T. P., FREYSINGER, J. J., AND PARRISH, H. M. “Epidemiol- ogy of Patient Accidents.” Industr Med Surg, 31:186—190, May 1962. 1101. WEINBERG, A. A. “Problems of Adjustment of New Immigrants to Israel.” Bull World Fed Ment Health, part 1, 5:57—63, part 2, 5:129—135, August 1953. 1102. WEINBERG, S. K. Society and Personality Disorders. Hall, New York, 1952. 1103. WEISS, B. AND LATIES, V. G. “Enhancement of Human Perform— ance by Caffeine and the Ampheta- Prentice- OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES Pharmaeol R, 14:1—36, mines.” 1962. The relevant literature is reviewed. The effects on mood and judgment are surveyed. The authors’ discussion takes up two main issues: 1. Can caffeine and the amphetamines actually produce su- perior performance or do they merely re- store to a normal level performance de- graded by fatigue, boredom, or other influences? 2. Are the performance- enhancing effects of these drugs counter- balanced by untoward effects to such an extent that their practical use is not feasible or desirable? (118 references.) 1104. WEISS, D. J., DAWIS, R. V., ENGLAND, G. W., AND LOFQUIST, L. H. Validity of Work Histories 0b- tained by Interview. University of Minnesota P r e s 5, Minneapolis, Minn., 1961. Work histories of a least 5 years were obtained from individuals through struc- tured interviews. Validity data was gathered through questionnaires to em- ployers. “For most items, validity de- creased as time between job termination and interview increased.” 1105. WELLS, R. L. “The General Practitioner and the Industrial Physician.” Gen Praet, 27:80—81. January 1963. 1106. WELLS, R. L. “The Woman Worker.” Arch Environ Health, 4:439—445, April 1962. .1107. WELLS, R. L. “Variables in Industrial Absenteeism.” ] South Med Ass, 43:893—900, October, 1950. 1108. WELLS, R. L., MURPHY, A. J., BROWN, M. L., DERRYBERRY O. M., AND Ross, D. M. “The President’s Conference on Occupational Safe- ty.” Imlustr filed Surg, 311249—259, June 1962. 151 1109. WESCHLER, I. The Leader and Creativity. The Association Press, New York, 1962. 1110. WESCHLER, R. J., KLEMES, M. A., AND SHEPHERD, C. “New Focus in Executive Training.” Advanc Mgmt, 20:19—22, May 1955. 1111. WEST, S. S. Scientists.” Sociometry, 251—269, September 1961. 1112. WHEATLEY, G. M. “How to Deal With Your Tensions.” Fac- tory, 121(8) :52—55, August, 1963. The helpful and troublesome aspects of tension are described together with ad- vice about symptoms of exceeding limits and remedial measures. 1113. WHERRY, R. J. “Industrial Morale: Factor Analysis of Morale Data: Reliability and Validity.” Personnel Psychol, 11:78-89, 1958. 1114. WHITE, R. “Competence and the Psycho-Sexual States of Devel- opment,” in Nebraska Symposium on Motivation, Jones, M. R., editor. University of Nebraska Press, Lin- coln, Nebr., 1960. 1115. WHITE, T. H. “Some Medical Aspects of Social Progress in an African Industrial Community.” E Afr Med ], 36:585—595, November 1959. 1116. WHITTAKER, P. J. “Graduate Training in Occupational Medicine: The In-Plant Component. ] Occup Alert, 2: 312—314, July 1960. 1117. WHITFIELD, J. W. “Five An- swers to the Big Five: Research.” Safety, 18:22—25, autumn 1962. “Class Origin of 24(3): 152 1118. WHITEHEAD, T. N. The In- dustrial Worker. Harvard Univer- sity Press, Cambridge, Mass, 1938. 1119. WHITEHEAD, T. N. Leadership in a Free Society, Harvard Univer- sity Press, Camridge, Mass., 1936. 1120. WHITEHORN, J. C. “Guide to Interviewing and Clinical Person- ality Study.” Arch Neurol Psy- chiat, 52: 197, September 1944. 1121. WHYTE, W. F. Human Rela- tions in the Restaurant Industry. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1948. 1122. WHYTE, W. F. “Human Rela- tions Theory: A Progress Report.” Harv Bsns R, 34(5) :125—132, Octo- ber 1956. 1123. WHYTE, W. F., editor. Indus- try and Society. McGraw—Hill, New York, 1946. Members of the Committee on Human Relations in Industry, at the University of Chicago, report their research activ— ities in a number of businesses, indus- tries, and unions, integrated around the concept “understanding of the social structure and the way in which it con- trols and molds the individual.” Con- tributors are: Gardner, B. B., “The Fac- tory as a Social System”; Warner, W. L. and Low, J. 0., “The Factory in the Community”; Barnard, C. 1., “Func- tions and Pathology of Status Systems in Formal Organizations”; Davis, A., “The Motivation of the Underprivileged Worker”; Hughes, E. C., “Race Rela- tions in Industry”; Whyte, W. F., “When Workers and Customers Meet”; Starr, M., “Role of Union Organizations”; Harbison, F. H., “The Basis of Industrial Conflict.” 1124. WI-IYTE. W. F. Men at Work. Dorsey Press, Homewood, Ill., 1961. Utilizing his research together with other findings from relevant studies, OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES Whyte presents material and analyses of “what life is like in the work places.” The many influences on work behavior are considered, with specific attention to environmental forces in interaction with more personal factors. 1125. WHYTE, W. F. Money andMo- tivation. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1955. 1126. WHYTE, W. F. “Needs and Op- portunities for Industrial Relations Research.” Reprinted from “Essays on Ind. Rel’ns. Res. Prob. & Pros- pects,” reprint series No. 125. New York State School of Industrial and Labor Relations. Cornell Univer- sity, Ithaca, N.Y., 1961. 1127. WHYTE, W. F. Pattern for In- dustrial Peace. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1951. Based on observations, interviews, and company record data, this case study of workers and management at Inland Steel Container Co. in the period 1937~49, describes and analyzes the events and in- fluences which developed, the disatisfac- tion, open conflict, continuous “ham- stringing” of effective management, and, finally the cooperation which allowed both sides to “win” in a labor-manage- ment conflict. 1128. WHYTE, W. F. “Small Groups and Large Organizations,” in Social Psychology at the Crossroads, Rohrer and Sherif, editors. Harper & Brothers, New York, 1951. 1129. WHYTE, W. F. “Social Science and Industrial Relations: How Management Can Use the Human Relations Specialist.” Personnel, 27 (4) :256—266, January 1951. 1130. WHYTE, W. H., Jr. “How Hard Do Executives Work?” Fortune, 49: 108—109, 1954. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 1131. WHYTE, W. H., Jr. The Orga- nization Man. Simon & Schuster, New York, 1956. 1132. WICKERT, F. “Turnover and Employee’s Feelings of Ego-Involve- ment in the Day-tO-Day Operations of a Company.” Personnel Psychol, 4:185—197, 1951. 1133. WIENER, N. The Human Use of Human Beings: Cybernetics and Society. Houghton Mifflin Com- pany, Boston, Mass, 1950. “The purpose of this book is both to explain the potentialities of the machine in fields which up to now have been taken to be purely human, and to warn against the dangers of a purely selfish exploita- tion of these possibilities in a world in which to human beings, human things are all important.” The author discusses his theme that man should not be used for purposes of less than his “full status,” and that machines should release humans for functions which utilize their po- tentials. 1134. WIKSTROM, W. A., editor. Developing Better Managers: An Eight-Nation Study. National In- dustrial Conference Board, New York, 1961. 1135. WILENSKY, H. L. “Work, Ca- reers, and Social Integration.” Int Soc Sci], 12(4) 2543—560, 1960. Through comparative analyses, it be- comes increasingly apparent that careers are “a major source of stability for mod- ern society” with ability an important factor. For those who are nonmobile and low-skilled, occupations become decreasing centers of interest and identity of self is attempted through nonwork af- filiations and interests. 1136. WILENSKY, J., JOFFRE, D., LA- TOUCHE, N., AND BERGER, B. “Work and Leisure in Modern SO- 776430——65———11 153 ciety: A Symposium.” Industr Relat, 1:1—45, February 1962. 1137. WILKINSON, F. “Social Dis- tance B e t w e e n Occupations.” Social Soc Res, 234—244, January 1929. 1138. WILLARD, H. N., SWAN, R. C., AND WOLF, G. A. “Life Situations, Emotions and Dyspnea,” in Life Stress and Bodily Disease. Williams & Wilkins Co., Baltimore, Md., 1950. 1139. WILLIAMS, H. “The Occupa- tional Health Challenge to Preven- tive Medicine.” Public Health Rept, 75:561—563, June 1960. 1140. WILLIAMS, W. “What’s on the Worker’s Mind?” Charles Scrib- ner’s Sons, New York, 1920. 1141. WILLIS, E. S. “Medical Care for Industrial Workers: Manage- ment’s Viewpoint.” Amer ] Public Health, 47(4) :459, April 1957. 1142. WILSON, A. T. M. Social Changes in Structural Groups: Cur- rent Trends in British Psychology. Methuen, London, England, 1953. 1143. WILSON, B. R. “The Teacher’s Role: A Sociological Analysis.” Brit ] Social, 13(1) :15—«32, March 1962. The changing role of the teacher in Great Britain is discussed in the context of changes in the nature of education, as well as changing expectations of complex societies. Role conflicts and insecurities arising from the teacher’s position are analyzed. 1144. WILSON, L. The Academic Man. Oxford University Press, New York, 1942. 1145. WILSON, V. A. “The Control of Absenteeism.” Arch Health, 3:57~62, July 1961. Environ 154 Characteristics of absenteeism are noted, including combinations which are more related to “emotional maladjust- ment” and “poor motivation” than to organic disease. The author suggests methods to correct the high-absence rate by preplacement physical examinations, preventive medical programs, and im- munization to be carried out by the oc- cupational medical department as well as by management cooperation with supervisory personnel. 1146. WINOKUR, G., editor. “Mental Health and Preventive Medicine.” Hum Org, 16(4), winter 1958 (spe— cial issue). 1147. WITMER, H. L., editor. Teach- ing Psychotherapeutic Medicine. Commonwealth Fund, New York, 1947. 1148. WISE, R. A. “Sickness and Ab- sence in Industrial Population.” Southern Med ], 49:384—387, April 1956. 1149. WISPE, L. G. AND THAYER, P. W. “Role Ambiguity and Anxiety in an Occupational Group.” ] Soc Psychol, 46:41—48, August 1957. The role expectancies of three princi- pal positions in a life insurance company were investigated by intensive interviews of agents, assistant managers, and district managers. Study showed that assistant managers showed the greatest amount of anxiety as well as considerable role ambiguity. 1150. WISPE, L. G. “The Success At— titude: An Analysis of the Relation- ship Between Individual Needs and Social Role Expectaneies.” ] Soc Psychol, 46:119—123, August 1957. The “success attitude” of life insur- ance agents, in this study, is partly the response to intense competition, involv- ing high aspiration levels, self—blame, and distortion of reality, and utilizes the OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES mechanisms of externalization and pro- jection to explain successes and failure. 1151. WOLFMAN, B. “Medical Ex- penses and Choice of Plans: A Case Study.” Monthly Labor R, 84(11) : 1186—1190, November 1961. A study of the choices and medical expenditures of 200 trade union mem- bers’ families was conducted to obtain a clearer picture of the economic and per- sonal considerations influencing family ehoiee between two health plans: One providing comprehenisve medical cover- age through group medieal practice and its own facilities, and the second provid- ing limited coverage with free choice of physician. 1152. WOODWARD, J. L. “Changing Ideas on Mental Illness and Its Treatment.” Amer Social R, 16: 443—454, August 1951. 1153. WOODCOCK, L. “Where Are We Going in Public Health: A La- bor Leader’s Appraisal. Amer ] Public Health, 46(3) :278, March 1956. 1154. WOOLF, M. G. “Health Pro- motion in Industry.” South African Med ], 351432—435, May 1961. 1155. WORLD HEALTH ORGANIZATION. “Occupational Health.” WHO Technical Report Series N o. 66. Report of a Joint ILO—WHO Com- mittee on Occupational Health, 1953. This report sets forth purposes, re— quirements and methods for use in in- dustrial mental health programs and for occupational health in general. 1156. WORTHY, J. C. “Freedom Within American Enterprise.” Ad- vanc .Mgmt, 19(6) :5—8, 1954. 1 157. WYATT. S. “Individual Differ- ences in Output in the Cotton Indus- OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES try.” Government Publications— Medical Research Council, Indus- trial Health Research Board, Report No. 7. H. M. Stationery Oflice, London, England, 1920. 1158. YAFFE,C.D. IndustrialMeth- ads and Plant Design as Related to Employees. Proc Symposium on “Anthrax in Man.” University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pa., 1954. 1159. YAFFE, C. D. “Occupational Health: A Joint Industry and Pub- lic Health Responsibility.” Oceup Health, 13: 100, 1953. 1160. YODER, D. Personnel M anage- ment and Industrial Relations. Prentice-Hall, New York, 1948. 1161. YONEBAYASHI, T. “Application of Sociology and Applied Sociology.” Japanese Sociol R, 10(3—4) 133—50, July 1960. 1162. YOUNG, M. A. C. “Health Edu- cation Programs in Mass Industries.” Industr Med Surg, 26(1) :35, Janu- ary 1957. A health educator discusses an un- successful attempt to introduce organized health education to the workers of a plant. 1163. ZAIDENS, S. H. “Psychiatric Treatment of the Neurodermatoses.” Industr Med Surg, 32(7) :261—265, 1963. There are no set rules for the psychi- atric treatment of the patient with neuro- dermatoses but often group or family therapy with either psychoanalysis or psy- chotherapy, is the most efiective treat- ment. This article discusses the types of problems treated by this method and the basic techniques employed. 155 1164. ZALEZNIK, A. “The Human Dilemmas of Leadership.” Harv Bsns R, 41 (4) : 49—55, July—August 1963. The author describes the inner con- flicts of leaders as a main source of the dilemmas of leadership and of the con- fusion of subordinates. Among top ex- ecutives, a “status anxiety” may occur, while “competition anxiety” may be the inner conflicts of those moving up through the hierarchy. 1165. ZALKIND, S. S. AND COSTELLO, T. W. “Perception: Some Recent Research and Implications for Ad- ministration.” Admin Sci Q, 7(2) : 219—235, September 1962. The administrator frequently bases de- cisions and actions on his perceptions of other persons. Recent systematic studies of the process of perception, by behav- ioral scientists, are reviewed here in terms of implications for administrative prac- tice. Understanding the process is one means of trying to avoid gross errors in judgments. 1166. ZANDER, A. “Group Member- ship and Individual Security.” Hum Relat, 2:99—111, 1958. 1167. ZANDER, A., COHEN, A. R., AND STOTLAND, E. “Power and the Rela- tions Among Professions,” in Studies in Social Power. Research Center for Group Dynamics, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich., 1959. 1168. ZANDER, A., COHEN, A. R., AND STOTLAND, E. Role Relations in the Mental Health Professions. Re- search Center for Group Dynamics, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich., 1957. 1169. ZANDER, A. AND CURTIS, T. T. “Effects of Social Power on Aspira- tions and Striving.” ] Abnorm Soc Psychol, 64 : 63—74, 1962. 156 1170. ZANDER, A. AND HAVELIN, A. “Social Comparison and Interper- sonal Attraction.” Hum Relat, 13(1) :21—32, February 1960. A study of 32 groups of Norwegian sailors, each with 9 strangers of equal rank, tested the following predictions: (1) “Persons will be most attracted to others whose competence is closest to their own,” (2) “Members within a group will be more attracted to their group the higher its competence,” (3) “Persons will be more attracted to in- dividuals divergent from them in ability who are high in competence, than to per- sons divergent from them who are low in competence.” 1171. ZANDER, A. AND JACKSON, J. A Summary of Personnel Research at Michigan Bell, Institute for Social Research, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich., 1958. 1172. ZANDER, A, AND QUINN, R. “The Social Environment and Men- tal Health: A Review of Past Re- search at the Institute for Social Research.” ] Soc Issues, 18(3): 48—66, July 1962. OCCUPATIONAL MENTAL HEALTH: NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 1173. ZELENY, L. D. “Selection of Compatible F lyin g Partners.” Amer ] Social, 52(5) :424—4—31, March 1947. 1174. ZETTERBERG, H. L. So cial Theory and Social Practice. Bed- minster Press, New York, 1962. 1175. ZILLER, R. C., BEHRINGER, R. D., AND GOODCHILDS, J. D. “Group Creativity Under Condi- tions of Success or Failure and Var- iations in Group Stability.” ]. Appl Psychol, 46:43—49, 1962. This laboratory experiment measured groups’ creativity in timed task under various conditions. Sixty-four groups with a total of 192 subjects were studied. The results indicate that groups which had had membership changes were sig- nificantly more creative than the stable groups. 1176. ZNANIECKI, F. The Social Role of the Man of Knowledge. Columbia University Press, New York, 1940. Index to Specific Entries Absenteeism: 7, 11, 18, 22, 45, 84, 88, 89, 134, 160, 189, 318, 345, 385, 465, 467, 469, 481, 513, 594, 606, 613, 641, 680, 707, 715, 767, 797. Accidents in Industry: 5, 18, 21, 38, 40, 48, 63, 79, 81, 132, 148, 155, 158, 170, 186, 189, 209, 210, 223, 230, 287, 299, 309, 321, 335, 349, 350, 369, 373, 385, 388, 408, 443, 459, 481, 486, 487, 491, 497, 509, 514, 525, 531, 532, 553, 556, 567, 576, 626, 641, 647, 658, 661, 662, 668, 781, 791. Aging and Retirement: 50, 89, 211, 260, 274, 338, 371, 383, 493, 541, 641, 655, 686, 746. Alcoholism, as an Industrial Problem: 9, 33, 68, 136, 168, 188, 208, 231, 234, 235, 237, 248, 253, 317, 352, 405, 428, 480, 481, 523, 536, 566, 575, 580, 589, 591, 623, 628, 641, 740, 741, 743, 744, 777 780, 803. Automation: 255, 466, 794. Behavior in Industry: (Also see Personality) 28, 122, 416, 508, 634, 687, 719. Change, Reactions to: 359, 466, 625. Drugs, Use of in Industry: 53, 240, 294, 314, 421, 485, 560, 627. Employee (Entries specifically concerning psychopathology of the hourly employ- ee): 55, 86, 141, 185, 226, 241, 270, 286, 296, 316, 322, 342, 348, 370, 395, 415 473, 504, 517, 564, 585, 640, 665. Employment (Includes discussion of job placement and screening): 49, 82, 93, 139, 193, 276, 354, 360, 372, 453, 529, 593, 596, 653, 654, 659, 710, 716, 775, 786. Employer-Employee Relationship: 43, 60, 489, 505, 539, 696, 699. 12 776—430-—05 Executive (Entries concerned with the general role and psychopathology of the Executive): 29, 31, 32, 71, 72, 73, 141, 184, 185, 198, 213, 315, 358, 382, 415, 438, 462, 484, 488, 498, 502, 512, 516, 598, 669, 675, 684, 724, 783, 795. Fatigue in Industry: 44, 62, 131, 162, 375, 549, 552, 581, 598, 639, 643, 644. Historical (Of interest as part of the back- ground and growth of occupational men- tal health): 16, 18, 69, 75, 78, 114, 143, 147, 165, 166, 199, 241, 267, 273, 299, 311, 367, 368, 375, 444, 527, 548, 564, 577, 618, 641, 661, 672, 692, 693, 707, 792, 798, 799, 800. Industrial or Occupational Medicine: 116, 117, 203, 227, 265, 440, 633, 635, 636, 670. Job (Work) Satisfaction: 58, 73, 96, 118, 177, 226, 244, 246, 286, 330, 500, 501. 511,605,681, 760. Labor Turnover: 22, 88, 89, 304, 474. Leadership and Supervision: 22, 123, 214, 266, 343, 410, 411, 412, 413, 433, 455, 458, 469, 492, 495, 500, 504, 550, 553, 635, 710, 721, 761. Legal Aspects: 41, 47, 7o, 78, 381,552, 597, 768, 776, 800. Men (Entries specific to the male role at work): 320, 323, 346. Mental Health: General: 50, 129, 142, 183, 212, 687. Mental Health and the Community (Also see Society): 128, 278, 312, 355, 422. Mental Health in Industry: General: 2, 16, 18, 19, 35, 43, 51, 74, 75, 85, 91, 92, 97, 99, 103, 106, 107, 108, 113, 120, 164, 179, 190, 199, 200, 202, 205, 206, 207, 157 158 Mental Health in Industry: General—Con. 233, 247, 256, 262, 263, 267, 272, 284, 285, 293, 300, 301, 303, 316, 322, 329, 333, 351, 372, 393, 397, 407, 430, 432, 441, 444, 476, 499, 500, 506, 507, 515, 521, 545, 546, 563, 604, 641, 645, 665, 667, 685, 713, 716, 767, 792. Mental Health Programs: General: 18, 30, 54, 75, 77, 87, 103, 126, 163, 201, 232, 273, 282, 293, 329, 334, 340, 367, 392, 393, 394, 420, 431, 444, 482, 483, 490, 499, 520, 527, 548, 557, 559, 579, 582, 603, 616, 641, 692, 697, 717, 757, 770. Clinical: 42, 100, 203, 311, 490, 631, 641, 758, 763. Counseling: 181, 197, 271, 275, 431, 452, 609, 701, 711, 756. Educational: 6, 8, 57, 282, 364, 410, 411, 412, 413, 490, 518, 519, 641, 697, 789. Pamphlets and Publications: In sup- port of 13, 14, 429, 479, 519, 524, 544, 547. Proposed: 85, 144, 145, 196, 494, 595, 642. Treatment: 48, 49, 59, 194, 257, 258, 342, 376, 377, 391, 522, 526, 591, 641, 695, 696, 697, 724, 759, 778, 802. Methodology: 30, 133, 242, 244. Morale and Attitudes: 74, 88, 90, 261, 292, 306, 331, 423, 465, 513, 525, 543. Motivation and Incentives: 96, 97, 158, 281, 470, 477, 511, 567, 587. Occupations: Specific: 67, 68, 115, 137, 160, 225, 277, 298, 304, 306, 313, 319, 349, 366, 406, 412, 449, 450, 478, 510, 535, 561, 562, 570, 583, 584, 600, 606, 608, 610, 612, 628, 648, 653, 656, 673, 691, 694, 705, 706, 742, 779. Occupational Role and Status: 50, 76, 121, 138, 156, 243, 245, 279, 389, 406, 427, 599, 601. Personality: (and work) 8, 23, 26, 32, 97, 102, 132, 139, 209, 210, 292, 302, 304, 320, 322, 325, 330, 334, 366, 374, 396, 416, 427, 436, 477, 500, 565, 585, 586, 641, 666, 681, 749, 759, 772, 791. 124, INDEX TO SPECIFIC ENTRIES Physical Handicaps: (Psychological aspects) 39, 173, 224, 238, 457, 648, 796. Productivity: Performance and Efliciency 22, 34, 36, 64, 84, 239, 277, 279, 292, 318, 324, 475, 500, 511, 549, 567, 637, 719, 748. Psychodynamics: 198, 296, 297, 353, 360, 403, 404, 418, 419, 430, 436, 470, 525, 533, 565, 578, 586, 666, 749, 773, 774. Psychopathology in Industry: Mental Retardation: 1, 387, 401, 554, 721, 722, 723. Organic Brain Syndromes: 4, 37, 40, 47, 56, 78, 80, 82, 159, 249, 254, 283, 332, 362, 384, 386, 396, 400, 451, 555, 558, 649, 650, 748. Personality Disorders: 161, 259, 270, 338, 366, 368, 503, 781. Psychoneurotic Reactions: (Including Traumatic Neuroses) 58, 61, 83, 127, 147, 174, 192, 219, 221, 241, 290, 307, 376, 377, 381, 384, 437, 442, 446, 461, 501, 502, 530, 537, 577, 578, 597, 621, 641, 660, 691, 703, 749, 762, 763, 764, 800. Psychosomatic Reactions: 32, 52, 109, 135, 182, 185, 186, 191, 222, 228, 289, 306, 357, 370, 569, 607, 637, 641, 658, 772, 801, 802. Psychotic Reactions: 65, 79, 138, 157, 229, 246, 371, 567, 570, 641, 718. Unspecified Mental Illness: 2, 17, 36, 49, 55, 71, 72, 84, 90, 125, 140, 146, 149, 165, 180, 218, 225, 236, 245, 257, 277, 308, 324, 327, 348, 354, 365, 372, 389, 393, 399, 406, 463, 472, 473, 492, 538, 540, 561, 574, 600, 614, 630, 640, 682, 720, 747. Research: 108, 130, 152, 153, 154, 171, 176, 195, 331, 346, 347, 364, 367, 380, 389, 395, 423, 436, 465, 466, 467, 468, 471, 481, 493, 496, 501, 520, 553, 641, 650, 651, 652, 654, 672, 682, 688, 784. Rehabilitation: 20, 46, 49, 60, 65, 66, 77, 95, 168, 211, 251, 281, 295, 337, 341, 354, 376, 402, 409, 414, 425, 439, 444, 445, 446, 447, 448, 523, 543, 567, 572, 574, 587, 592, 596, 615, 617, 620, 623, INDEX TO SPECIFIC ENTRIES 629, 655, 671, 688, 689, 708, 744, 775, 788, 790. Role of: (In industrial mental health pro- grams) Industrial M.D.: 77, 113, 157, 197, 255, 288, 291, 356, 369, 409, 542, 635, 641, 690. Manager—Supervisor: 8, 402, 429. Nurse: 98, 197, 219. Psychiatrist: 3, 10, 12, 18, 75, 103, 104, 105, 108, 115, 126, 130, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 169, 176, 195, 199, 205, 206, 207, 255, 264, 268, 269, 300, 305, 339, 357, 359, 390, 391, 394, 435, 456, 494, 495, 500, 527, 528, 641, 693, 709, 715. Psychologist: 15, 42, 59, 204, 276, 391, 417, 434, 460, 527, 539, 624, 699, 702, 771. Society: (Also see mental health, commu- nity) 172, 220, 278, 424, 785. Stress: (Work related) 20, 25, 239, 334, 345, 363, 365, 452, 454, 463, 551, 611, 632, 638, 656, 657, 669, 676, 679. 159 Suicide: (In relationship to Occupation) 76, 250, 599, 601, 622, 704. Supervisor: (Entries concerning the role of the foreman and supervisor) 32, 86, 109, 111, 141, 184, 185, 187, 213, 275, 348, 382, 512. Trauma: (Psychiatric aspects) 3, 4, 40, 61, 70, 78, 80, 114, 221, 249, 396, 426, 461, 530, 537, 641, 649, 650, 749. Unions: 175, 232, 589, 641. Women: (Entries specific to the role of women in industry) 34, 167, 274, 346, 583, 584, 608, 797. Work Groups: 84, 397, 611, 787. Work, Meaning of: 302, 310, 353, 360, 378, 403, 404, 436, 500, 533, 573, 578, 641, 773, 774. Work Organization, Structure, Function and Environment: 24, 25, 26, 28, 101, 242, 297, 328, 330, 336, 347, 348, 361, 380, 384, 427, 436, 452, 494, 500, 690, 766. m' Index to Non-Specific Entries Ability: 699, 819, 920. Abxenteeixm: 58, 94, 186, 242, 273, 276, 310, 312, 314, 322, 327, 344, 353, 398, 431, 486, 509, 593, 594, 620, 632, 645, 718, 763, 769, 781, 782, 869, 896, 897, 916,1002,1068,1107,1148. Accidents: 56, 112, 124, 240, 330, 347, 392, 503, 512, 593, 661, 662, 913, 936, 1013,1100, 1108, 1117. Adolescence: 403, 661. Aging: 6, 14,61, 105, 130, 160, 161, 189, 313, 350, 486, 551, 620, 728, 737, 744, 814, 950, 1077, 1078. Alcoholism: 149, 271, 328, 502, 587, 636, 645, 784, 967. Attitudes and Values: 45, 69, 84, 95, 104, 121, 214, 218, 248, 267, 339, 508, 511, 1018, 1061, 1065, 1094, 1150. Authority and Power: 68, 95, 101, 287, 619, 696, 753, 985. Automation: 39, 102, 123, 156, 188, 238, 358, 387, 446, 509, 602, 698, 771, 779, 788, 862, 884, 923, 1023, 1027, 1031, 1033, 1070, 1072. Behavior: 24, 30, 32, 36, 38, 83, 114, 175, 201, 214, 225, 237, 266, 283, 285, 316, 360, 378, 385, 399, 540, 580, 818, 835, 849, 902, 909, 957, 971. Behavioral Science: 122, 150, 167, 230, 275, 376, 510, 580, 614, 627, 895, 906, 908, 971, 1171. Chzznge: 45, 70, 85, 141, 179, 188, 196, 238, 288, 289, 335, 345, 424, 426, 506, 553, 610, 615, 617, 658, 716, 790, 861, 935,1018,1047,1051,1142. Cognition: 768, 855, 901. Communication: 37, 246, 279, 337, 546, 648, 761, 775, 776, 796, 827, 845, 846, 847, 848, 1137. Conflict: 360, 522, 523, 653, 689, 941. Culture: 348, 387, 555, 588, 591, 627, 628, 629, 633, 656, 658, 659, 685, 707, 739, 886, 939, 962, 1094. Employee, (Includes Worker): 2, 9, 28, 44, 57, 69, 128, 178, 184, 199, 220, 227, 257, 288, 360, 487, 504, 550, 697, 711, 734, 816, 978, 979, 1074, 1076, 1140, 1118. Employee—Employer Relationships: 116, 177, 227, 289, 335, 340, 396, 522, 563, 590, 705, 783. Employment, Selection and Placement: 6, 44, 61, 105, 106, 109, 160, 209, 239, 264, 315, 329, 505, 631, 702, 795, 867, 894, 951, 974, 1032, 1055, 1094, 1095, 1173. Environmental Influences: 3, 85, 102, 112, 131, 143, 153, 165, 166, 175, 182, 200, 201, 205, 213, 227, 228, 241, 247, 253, 550, 554, 582, 807, 1172. Executives: 11, 31, 91, 96, 100, 134, 164, 174, 192, 194, 196, 208, 210, 216, 217, 232, 277, 341, 357, 382, 393, 394, 400, 401, 451, 452, 463, 595, 597, 744, 749, 752, 792, 932, 933, 934, 944, 948 980, 983, 984, 986, 999, 1017, 1060, 1085, 1095,1110, 1130,1139. Fatigue: 115, 636, 660, 838, 892, 1050, 1052. Groups: 77, 82, 83, 117, 184, 241, 285, 370, 399, 521, 546, 549, 586, 616,650, 794, 829, 877, 882, 888, 940, 964,’ 969, 1128,1142,1166,1175. Human Relations: 223, 266, 267, 313, 319, 320, 370, 469, 480, 494, 520, 553, 584, 667, 754, 757, 801, 810, 822, 826, 863, 868, 875, 876, 883, 1062. 161 162 INDEX TO NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES Industrial Health and Occupational Medi- Management: 176, 186, 194, 196, 198, cine: 214, 220, 274, 276, 325, 359, 427, 442, General: 1,2, 12, 17, 50, 51,57, 75, 77, 461, 497. 504. 506. 516. 533. 577, 578, 73, 88, 39, 93, 111, 116, 117, 120, 579, 683, 689, 690, 708, 729, 736, 743, 125, 126, 134, 135, 143, 169, 176, 772, 773, 791, 799, 824, 825, 834, 926, 177, 184, 189, 192, 202, 203, 207, 973, 1007, 1044. 215: 219: 220: 236’ 242: 244: 386: Mental Health in the Community: (In- 388, 397, 434, 436. 441, 461, 466, eluding Society) 55, 125, 182, 205, 216, 467. 471. 478. 630. 634. 640. 651, 222, 229, 247, 293, 302, 413, 433, 525, 663. 664. 665, 693, 695. 701, 724, 526, 529, 558, 559, 806, 1083, 1172. 733’ 798’ 812’ 835’ 836’ 860’ 873’ Mental Health: (General Consideration) 887, 903, 947, 955, 1027, 1041, 1042 1058 1067 1080 1139 1141 22’ 286’ 290’ 346’ 356’ 403’ 448’ 449’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ 521, 530, 562, 613, 656, 677, 678, 681, “54: “55’ ”59‘ 700, 716, 739, 742, 746, 790, 797, 828, Education: 256, 527, 666, 900, 1059, 873, 874, 878, 921’ 927’ 939, 952’ 962, 1115- 970, 982, 1000, 1001, 1146. Government: 701, 762, 812, 959, , 1011, 1036. Mental Health 1n Industry: (General Con- International: 255, 270, 323, 334, $138322“) 10’ 71’ 217’ 290’ 592’ 698’ 362, 366, 375, 417, 418, 440, 519, ’ I ' 732, 843, 857, 353, 913, 976. Mental Health Programs in Industry: Organized Labor: 335, 507, 535, 736, General: 55, 60, 119, 557a 841' 1026, 1046. Counseling: 138, 355, 412, 748, 758. Small Organizations: 682, 694, 735, Educational: 27, 31, 54, 66, 74, 81, 817. 82, 91, 179, 267, 406. Programs: 119, 134, 371, 514, 515, Educational Aids: 127, 128, 524, 516, 539, 589, 669, 721, 731, 765, 1037, 1112. 842> 943: 1162' Treatment: 91, 409, 1097. The Individual at Work: 4, 5, 28, 29, 30, Morale: 104, 113, 137, 259, 495, 616, 667, 174, 504, 649, 656, 794, 813, 818, 946, 686, 823, 922, 940. 949, 964 968, 108 , 84, 11 . . . 1150. ’ 3 10 31’ 1132’ Motivation and Incentives: 2, 3, 36, 37, 80, 131, 132, 148, 163, 164, 172, 211, 246, Labor, Organized, and Unions: 14, 17, 48, 269, 383, 408, 409, 410, 453, 454, 476, 75, 103, 226, 227, 317, 335, 342, 358, 493, 518, 563, 577, 578, 579, 625, 633, 381, 388, 489, 506, 507, 535, 576, 736, 684, 778, 893, 902, 906, 940, 966, 968, 756, 783, 883, 923, 972, 1006, 1026, 975, 988, 989, 990, 1009, 1057, 1093, 1027,1030, 1046. 1124, 1169. Labor Turnover: 326, 398, 509, 837, 1132. Occupations,- (Specific) 7, 26, 59, 72, 73, 84, 139, 146, 168, 180, 181, 190, 191, Leadershi}; and Supervision: 97, 114, 127, 194, 200, 221, 237, 242, 251, 275, 292, 128, 137, 147, 248. 266, 267. 316, 359, 294, 339, 343, 353, 365, 371, 372, 376, 365. 368, 369. 370, 385, 399, 462, 463, 385, 405, 406, 490, 492, 496, 523, 524, 479, 495, 537, 574, 583, 586, 607, 621. 531, 532, 551, 561, 619, 812, 945, 974, 622, 623, 642, 643, 644, 646, 652, 654, 1016, 1038, 1071, 1111, 1143, 1144, 753, 870, 931, 956, 957, 958, 983, 984, 1167, 1173, 1176, 987, 1045, 1085, 1109,1119, 1164. , Occupational Roles and Status: 48, 49, 83, Legal Considerations: (Including Work- 96, 129, 132, 162, 178, 180, 183, 190, men’s Compensation) 16, 48, 116, 239, 197, 198, 200, 203, 205, 212, 228, 241, 335, 388, 395, 912, 1013. 252, 261, 286, 345, 349, 351, 373, 390, INDEX TO NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES 416, 419, 421, 422, 423, 438, 491, 552, 688, 743, 803, 855, 880, 904, 911, 949, 1025, 1054, 1084, 1086, 1135, 1137, 1168. Organization: Administration: 540, 547, 579, 607, 619, 643, 926. Conflict: 653, 881, 997. Mobility: 708, 743, 914. Structure: 668, 679. Theory: 359, 368, 369, 378, 428, 430, 536, 545, 565, 644, 704, 777, 778, 882, 885, 910, 998, 1087. Personality: 4, 5, 7, 22, 28, 29, 30, 80, 95, 97, 110, 114, 146, 147, 174, 237, 249, 389, 513, 517, 566, 569, 618, 679, 683, 715, 820, 865, 882, 890, 944, 966, 1064, 1120. Personnel Administration: 268, 332, 635, 637, 690, 722, 766, 767, 965, 1042, 1126, 1160. Physical Handicap: 98, 109, 119, 354, 443, 470, 508, 1035, 1090. Physical Illness: General: 286, 413, 414, 415, 491, 610, 622, 691. Cardiovascular: 329, 490, 505, 710, 713, 750, 751, 793, 942, 1091, 1099. Productivity and Performance: 104, 137, 179, 193, 199, 206, 284, 365, 385, 493, 495, 603, 618, 668, 699, 755, 862, 1014, 1092,1110,1114, 1157. Preventive Medicine: 501, 562, 669, 1146. Psychodynamics: 3, 22, 54, 59, 72, 73, 80, 97, 113, 114, 132, 140, 146, 157, 163, 170, 172, 178, 201, 203, 235, 246, 249, 264, 292, 293, 294, 302, 303, 400, 405, 406, 410, 414, 419, 450, 453, 457, 481, 485, 489, 492, 513, 517, 566, 649, 656, 670, 671, 672, 673, 674, 675, 715, 819, 827, 893, 946, 953, 996, 1022, 1049, 1063, 1064, 1114, 1132, 1149, 1164, 1166, 1170. Psychopathology: (Mental Illness) Mental Retardation: 608. Organic Brain Syndromes; 33, 34, 361, 367, 849, 966, 1024. 163 Personality Disorders: 569, 1102, 1163. Psychoneurotic Reactions: 33, 159, 210, 282, 839, 953, 1098. Psychosomatic Reactions: 8, 23, 79, 100, 159, 265, 275, 414, 419, 593, 641, 807, 1138. Psychotic Reactions: 162, 304, 305, 348, 529, 701. Unspecified “Mental Illness”: 229, 233, 234, 247, 250, 254, 286, 306, 307, 348, 413, 420, 421, 422, 423, 445, 491, 530, 556, 560, 582, 609, 685, 830, 831, 832, 864, 913, 915, 995, 1003, 1083, 1152. Public Health: 561, 709, 747, 1036, 1039, 1153. Rehabilitation: 98, 109, 338, 354, 375, 395, 542, 582, 726, 730, 741, 850, 899, 908, 1090. Retirement: 311, 785, 929, 950, 1026, 1066. Role of: Flyers: 1016, 1173. Industrial Physician: 9, 35, 57, 66, 76, 87, 135, 244, 352, 477, 539, 543, 600, 731, 733, 836, 871, 1020, 1105, 1142, 1143. Manager or Supervisor: 48, 71, 81, 82, 97, 136, 225, 547, 549, 707, 752, 799, 801, 821, 1065, 1069, 1075, 1096, 1165. Nurse: 13, 15, 135, 180, 203, 538, 804, 880. Personnel: 67, 230, 231. Physician: (General) 125, 543, 691, 740, 764, 775, 776. Psychiatrist: 47, 76, 87, 336, 339, 376. Psychologist: 27, 47, 52, 91, 92, 185, 187, 209, 226, 231, 251, 252, 430, 714,1056,1168. Salesman: 655, 699. Scientist and Engineer: 523, 531, 532, 551, 619, 945, 974,1111. Teachers: 724, 774, 1144, 1145, 1176. 1019, 164 Psychiatry: General: 376, 575, 601, 671, 672, 673, 675, 774. Social: 475, 517, 553, 554, 555, 556, 571, 582, 805, 832, 1079. Psychology: Human Factors: 392, 638, 639. Industrial: 262, 268, 332, 379, 380, 402, 488, 498, 541, 606, 703, 919, 1005. Managerial: 544. Organizational: 548. Social: 377, 378, 432, 567, 568, 586, 829, 985. Satixfactionst 289, 365, 373, 407, 430, 492, 509, 711, 714, 833, 837, 979, 1014, 1093 Society and Culture: 6, 102, 149, 153, 242, 348, 374, 413, 517, 554, 696, 697, 706, 719, 786, 905, 930, 966, 972, 973, 1048, 1082, 1083, 1088, 1093, 1102, 1123. Sociology: General: 433, 786, 809, 813, 828, 830,1010,1161,1174. INDEX TO NON-SPECIFIC ENTRIES Industrial: 425, 687, 725, 1004-, 1087,1121,1122,1124,1127,1128. Organizational: 777, 778. Social Structure: 681, 1089. Stress: 60, 100, 157, 180, 189, 190, 197, 203, 217, 222, 261, 351, 355, 359, 368, 369, 419, 444, 484, 723, 774, 862, 954, 1138. Tests: (Psychological) 271, 389, 492, 493, 512, 699, 703, 820, 840, 867, 894, 1053. Women: 62, 203, 464, 528, 789, 916, 924, 936, 1106. Work, Meaning of: 40, 53, 68, 243, 340, 410, 429, 482, 511, 596, 604, 712, 802, 853, 854-, 1132, 1135, 1136. Work Organization: 24, 26, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 4-1, 49, 64, 65, 71, 83, 85, 86, 118, 119, 129, 185, 193, 195, 197, 199, 206, 208, 231, 238, 359, 368, 369, 396, 432, 536, 540, 624, 647, 680, 684, 811, 825, 833, 939, 978, 991, 1073, 1074, 1075, 1121, 1122, 1123, 1124, 1127, 1128, 1131, 1158. Journals Searched Abbreviation Complete Title Admin Sci Q ______________________ Administrative Science Quarterly Adult Lead _______________________ Adult Leadership Advanc Mgrnt _____________________ Advanced Management Aerospace Med ____________________ Aerospace Medicine Alpha Kappa Deltan Amer Arch Rehabilit Ther __________ American Archives of Rehabilitation Therapy American Ass Industr Nurses J _______ American Association of Industrial Nurses Journal Amer Econ R _____________________ American Economic Review Amer Industr Hyg Ass J _____________ American Industrial Hygiene Association Jour— nal Amer J Hyg ______________________ American Journal of Hygiene Amer J Med Sci ___________________ American Journal of Medical Sciences Amer J Ment Defic ________________ American Journal of Mental Deficiency Amer J Nursing ___________________ American Journal of Nursing Amer J Occup Ther ________________ American Journal of Occupational Therapy Amer J Orthopsychiat ______________ American Journal of Orthopsychiatry Amer J Psychiat ___________________ American Journal of Psychiatry Amer J Psychoanal _________________ American Journal of Psychoanalysis Amer J. Psychother ________________ American Journal of Psychotherapy Amer J Public Health ______________ American Journal of Public Health Amer J Social _____________________ American Journal of Sociology Amer J Surg ______________________ American Journal of Surgery Amer Psychol _____________________ American Psychologist Amer Sci _________________________ American Scientist Amer Sociol R ____________________ American Sociological Review Ammunition Ann Amer Acad Pol Soc Sci _________ Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science Annals Int Med ___________________ Annals of Internal Medicine Ann Res Nerv & Ment Dis Proc ______ Annals of Research of Nervous and Mental Dis- orders Proceedings Ann Occup Hyg ___________________ Annals of Occupational Hygiene Ann R Psycho] ____________________ Annual Review of Psychology Arch Environ Health _______________ Archives of Environmental Health Arch Gen Psychiat _________________ Archives of General Psychiatry Arch Industr Health _______________ Archives of Industrial Health Arch Industr Hyg Occup Med _______ Archives of Industrial Hygiene and Occupa- tional Medicine Arch Neurol Psychiat _______________ Archives of Neurology and Psychiatry Arch Phys Med ____________________ Archives of Physical Medicine and Rehabilita. tion 165 166 Abbreviation Atlantic Behav Sci ________________________ Brit J Industr Med _________________ Brit J Opth _______________________ Brit J Industr Safety _______________ Brit J Med Psychol _________________ Brit J Physical Med ________________ Brit J Prev Soc Med _______________ Brit J Psychol _____________________ Brit J Sociol ______________________ Brit Med J _______________________ Bull Amer Rehabilit Comma. ________ Bull Canadian Psychol Ass __________ Bull Hyg _________________________ Bull Mass Dept Ment Dis ___________ Bull Menninger Clin _______________ Bull NY Acad Med ________________ Bull NY Acad Sci __________________ Bull World Fed Ment Health _________ Bsns Week ________________________ Calif Mgmt _______________________ Canad J Public Health _____________ Canad Med Ass J __________________ Canad Physical Educ Ass Bull _______ Chicago Med _____________________ Child Develop _____________________ Cincinnati J Med __________________ Circulation Clin J ___________________________ Coll Res Lib ______________________ Commentary Comprens Med ____________________ Conn Med ________________________ Consultant _______________________ Curr Econ Comment _______________ Digest Neurol Psychiat ______________ Dis Colon Rectum _________________ Dis Nerv Syst _____________________ Dissert Abstr ______________________ Dun’s R __________________________ E Afr Med J ______________________ Edinburgh Med J __________________ Emp Rclat Bull ____________________ Emp Relat Serv ___________________ Ergonomics Factory Mg'mt Maint _______________ JOURNALS SEARCHED Complete Title Behavioral Science British Journal of Industrial Medicine British Journal of Ophthalmology British Journal of Industrial Safety British Journal of Medical Psychology British Journal of Physical Medicine British Journal of Preventive and Social Medi- cine British Journal of Psychology British Journal of Sociology British Medical Journal Bulletin of the American Rehabilitation Com- mittee Bulletin of Canadian Psychological Association Bulletin of Hygiene Bulletin of Massachusetts Department of Men- tal Disease Bulletin of the Menninger Clinic Bulletin of the New York Academy of Medicine Bulletin of the New York Academy of Science Bulletin of the World Federation of Mental Health Business Week California Management Canadian Journal of Public Health Canadian Medical Association Journal Canadian Physical Education Association Bul- letin Chicago Medicine Child Development Cincinnati Journal of Medicine Clinical Journal College and Research Libraries Comprehensive Medicine Connecticut Medicine Consultant (Smith, Kline and French) Current Economic Comment Digest of Neurology and Psychiatry Diseases of the Colon and Rectum Diseases of the Nervous System Dissertation Abstracts Dun’s Review and Modern Industry East African Medical Journal Edinburgh Medical Journal Employee Relations Bulletin Employee Relations Service Factory Management Maintenance JOURNALS SEARCHED Abbreviation Family Financial Post Fortune Gen Pract ________________________ Genet Psycho] Monogr _____________ Group Psychother __________________ Harper ___________________________ Harv Bsns R ______________________ Harv Educ R _____________________ Health Bull _______________________ Hosp Admin ______________________ Hosp Corps Q _____________________ Hum Factors ______________________ Hum Org ________________________ Hum Relat _______________________ Hum Resources Res Office Res Rept--. Illinois Med J _____________________ Indian J Psycho] ___________________ Industr Arts Voc Educ _____________ Indian J Soc Work __________________ Industr Labor Relat R ______________ Industr Mgmt R ___________________ Industr Med ______________________ Industr Med Surg _________________ Industr Nursing ___________________ Industr Relat _____________________ Industr Relat Res Ass ______________ Industr Welfare Personnel Mgmt _____ Int J Group Psychother _____________ Int J Psychoanal ___________________ Int J Soc Psychiat _________________ Int J Soc Work ____________________ Iron Age Israel Med J ______________________ Japanese Sociol R _________________ J Abnorm Soc Psych _______________ J Acad Mgmt _____________________ J Amer Med Ass ___________________ J Amer Soc Training Directors _______ J Amer Med Wom Ass _____________ J App] Psycho] ____________________ J Aviat Med ______________________ J Chron Dis ______________________ J Clin Psychol _____________________ J Clin Psychopath _________________ J College Placement ________________ J Conflict Resolut __________________ J Consult Psycho] __________________ 167 Complete Title General Practice Genetic Psychology Monographs Group Psychotherapy Harper’s Magazine Harvard Business Review Harvard Educational Review Health Bulletin Hospital Administration Hospital Corps Quarterly Human Factors Human Organization Human Relations Human Resources Research Office Research Re— port Illinois Medical Journal Indian Journal of Psychology Industrial Arts and Vocational Education Indian Journal of Social Work Industrial Labor Relations Review Industrial Management Review Industrial Medicine (Oct. 1932—May 1949) Industrial Medicine and Surgery Industrial Nursing Industrial Relations Industrial Relations Research Association Industrial Welfare and Personnel Management International Journal of Group Psychotherapy International Journal of Psychoanalysis International Journal of Social Psychiatry International Journal of Social \Nork Israel Medical Journal Japanese Sociological Review Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology Journal of the Academy of Management Journal of the American Medical Association Journal of the American Society of Training Directors Journal of the American Mcdica] Women’s Association Journal of Applied Psychology Journal of Aviation Medicine Journal of Chronic Diseases Journal of Clinical Psychology Journal of Clinical Psychopathology Journal of College Placement Journal of Conflict Resolution Journal of Consulting Psychology 168 Abbreviation J Counsel Psychol __________________ J Educ Sociol _____________________ J Gen Psychol _____________________ J Genet Psychol ___________________ J Health Hum Behav _______________ J Indian Med Ass __________________ J Industr Hyg Toxicology ___________ J Industr Relat ____________________ J Iowa Med Soc ___________________ J Jewish Communal Services _________ J Market _________________________ J Med Educ ______________________ J Ment Sci _______________________ J Mich Med Soc ___________________ J Nerv Ment Dis ___________________ J Neurosurg ______________________ J Occup Med _____________________ J Occup Ther _____________________ J Pastoral Care ____________________ J Personal ________________________ J Personnel Admin Industr Relat____ J Psychol _________________________ J Psychol Res _____________________ J Psychosom Res __________________ J Rehabilit _______________________ J Soc Issues _______________________ J Soc Psychol _____________________ J South Med Ass __________________ J Tenn Med Ass ___________________ Judaism Kentucky Acad Gen Prac ___________ Labor Law J ______________________ Lancet Management Mgmt News ______________________ Mgmt Record _____________________ Mgmt R _________________________ Marriage Fam Liv _________________ Mech Engrng _____________________ Med Ann DC _____________________ Med Bull _________________________ Med Clin N Amer _________________ Med Econ ________________________ Med J Aust _______________________ lVIed J Malaya ____________________ Med Rec Ann _____________________ Med Serv J _______________________ Med Times _______________________ Med Women’s J ___________________ JOURNALS SEARCHED Complete Title Journal of Counseling Psychology Journal of Educational Sociology Journal of General Psychology Journal of Genetic Psychology Journal of Health and Human Behavior Journal of the Indian Medical Association Journal of Industrial Hygiene and Toxicology Journal of Industrial Relations Journal of the Iowa Medical Society Journal of Jewish Communal Services Journal of Marketing Journal of Medical Education Journal of Mental Science Journal of the Michigan Medical Society Journal of Nervous and Mental Diseases Journal of Neurosurgery Journal of Occupational Medicine Journal of Occupational Therapy Journal of Pastoral Care Journal of Personality Journal of Personnel Administration and In- dustrial Relations Journal of Psychology Journal of Psychological Resources Journal of Psychosomatic Research Journal of Rehabilitation Journal of Social Issues Journal of Social Psychology Journal of the Southern Medical Association Journal of the Tennessee Medical Association Kentucky Academy of General Practice Labor Law Journal Management News Management Record Management Review Marriage and Family Living Mechanical Engineering Medical Annals of the District of Columbia Medical Bulletin (Standard Oil Company of New Jersey) Medical Clinics of North America Medical Economics Medical Journal of Australia Medical Journal of Malaya Medical Records and Annals Medical Services Journal Medical Times Medical Women’s Journal JOURNALS SEARCHED Abbreviation Med Illustr _______________________ Menninger Bull ___________________ Menninger Q _____________________ Ment Health ______________________ Ment Hosp _______________________ Ment Hyg ________________________ Ment Hyg News __________________ Mich Bsns R ______________________ Milbank Mem Fund Q ______________ Milit MPd Mod Hosp ________________________ Mod Industr ______________________ Mo Labor R ______________________ Monthly R _______________________ Nation Nation’s Bsns ______________________ Nat Safety News ___________________ NEA Journal _____________________ New Eng J Med ___________________ NYS J Med _______________________ New Zeal Med J ___________________ Occup Health _____________________ Occup Health R ___________________ Occup Med _______________________ Occup Psychol ____________________ Occupations ______________________ Ohio Med J ______________________ Operation’s Res ___________________ Pastoral Psychol ___________________ Penn Med J ______________________ Personnel Personnel Admin __________________ Personnel Guidance J ______________ Personnel J _______________________ Personnel Mgrnt Abstracts ___________ Personnel Psychol __________________ Personnel Prac Bull ________________ Pharmacal R ______________________ Physical Ther R ___________________ Physiol R _________________________ Postgrad Med J ___________________ Postgrad Med _____________________ Practitioner Proc Royal Society Med ____________ Psychiatry Psychoanal Psychol R _______________ Psychol Bull ______________________ Psychol Monogr ___________________ Psychosom Med ___________________ 169 Complete Title Medicine Illustrated Menninger Bulletin Menninger Quarterly Mental Health Mental Hospitals Mental Hygiene Mental Hygiene News Llichigan Business Review Milbank Memorial Fund Quarterly Military Medicine Modern Hospital Modern Industry Monthly Labor Review Monthly R Nation’s Business National Safety News National Education Association Journal New England Journal of Medicine New York State Journal of Medicine New Zealand Medical Journal Occupational Health Occupational Health Review Occupational Medicine Occupational Psychology Occupations, the Vocational Guidance Maga- zine Ohio State Medical Journal Operations Research Pastoral Psychology Pennsylvania Medical Journal Personnel Administration Personnel Guidance Journal Personnel Journal Personnel Management Abstracts Personnel Psychology Personnel Practices Bulletin Pharmacological Review Physical Therapy Review Physiological Reviews Postgraduate Medical Journal Postgraduate Medicine Proceedings of the Royal Society of Medicine Psychoanalysis and Psychological Review Psychological Bulletin Psychological Monographs: General and Ap- plied Psychosomatic Medicine 170 JOURNALS SEARCHED Abbreviation Complete Title Public Admin R ___________________ Public Administration Review Public Health Rept ________________ Public Health Reports Public Personnel Ass _______________ PUblic Personnel Association Public Personnel R _________________ Public Personnel Review Quart J Med _____________________ Quarterly Journal of Medicine Quart J Stud Alcohol ______________ Quarterly Journal of Studies on Alcohol Relig Educ _______________________ Religious Education R Educ Res _______________________ Review of Educational Research Rorschach Res Exchange J of Projective Techn ________________ Rorschach Research Exchange and Journal of Projective Techniques Roy Soc Health J __________________ Royal Society of Health Journal Royal Society Promot Health J _______ Royal Society for the Promotion of Health Journal Safety News School R _________________________ School Review Sci Amer _________________________ Scientific American Scot Med J _______________________ Scottish Medical Journal Soc Casework _____________________ Social Casework Soc Forces ________________________ Social Forces Soc Probl _________________________ Social Problems Sociol Q _________________________ Sociological Quarterly Sociol Soc Res ____________________ Sociology and Social Research Sociometry S Afr Med J ______________________ South African Medical Journal S Dakota J Med Pharm ____________ South Dakota Journal of Medicine and Pharmacy Southern Med J ___________________ Southern Medical Journal Supervision Supervisory Mgmt _________________ SuPcrvisory Management Texas J Med ______________________ Texas Journal of Medicine Time Trans Ass Industr Med Officers ______ Transactions of the Association of Industrial Medical Officers Univ Iowa Stud Child Welfare _______ University of Iowa Studies in Child Welfare Us Armed Forces Med J ____________ United States Armed Forces Medical Journal Voc Guid Q ______________________ Vocational Guidance Quarterly Wall Street J _____________________ Wall Street Journal War Med ________________________ War Medicine W Virginia Med J _________________ West Virginia Medical Journal WHO Bull _______________________ World Health Organization Bulletin WHO Techn Rept Ser _____________ World Health Organization Technical Report Series Wisconsin Med J __________________ Wisconsin Medical Journal World Med J _____________________ World Medical Journal ".5. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OIFICIIIQCI {029913072 am